Metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear 8DN8
for rated voltage up to 145 kV
Operating instructions
Basic version
923 01050 174 O
Pos : 1.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module/1 Bild D ec kbl att @ 4\mod_1339133231593_0.doc x @ 19090 @ @ 1
Pos : 1.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module/2 C opyright @ 0\mod_1330597023963_18.doc x @ 2626 @ @ 1
Siemens AG
All rights reserved.
© Siemens AG 2016
Pos : 1.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 1.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module3 H erstell ernac hweis @ 28\mod_1414151075078_18.doc x @ 261590 @ @ 1
The manufacturer of this switchgear
Siemens AG
Energy Management
High Voltage Products
Gas Insulated Switchgear Systems
has introduced and uses an environmental management system as per ISO 14001 and a quality
management system as per ISO 9001.
Evidence was provided to the DQS (Deutsche Gesellschaft zur Zertifizierung von Managementsystemen =
German Association for Certification of Management Systems) for the first time in 1996 for the environmental
management system and in 1989 for the quality management system.
The electrical testing laboratories of the manufacturer have been certified since 1992 by the German
Accreditation Body in accordance with DIN EN 45001.
Reproduction in any form, even of extracts, and passing on to third parties is only permissible with the written
permission of the Siemens AG. If you require further copies of the operating instructions, please order them
from the appropriate Siemens office, indicating the title and order number shown on the title page.
Published by:
Siemens AG
Energy Management
High Voltage Products
Gas Insulated Switchgear Systems
GIS Factory Berlin
D-13623 Berlin
Subject to change.
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
09.2016 EM HP GS
Pos : 1.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
Pos : 1.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module/4 Inhal ts verzeic hnis - 01 Übersc hrift @ 1\mod_1332937910136_18.doc x @ 12310 @ @ 1
Table of Contents
Pos : 1.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module/5 Inhal ts verzeic hnis - 02 Aufbau @ 4\mod_1339585540705_0.doc x @ 19100 @ @ 1
0
1
2
General ............................................................................................................................ 0-13
0.1
Manual structure ...................................................................................................................... 0-15
0.1.1 Sub-division .................................................................................................................. 0-15
0.1.2 Cross references .......................................................................................................... 0-16
0.1.3 Numbering of sub-parts................................................................................................ 0-16
0.1.4 Communication by means of the operating instructions .............................................. 0-16
0.2
Safety Instructions .................................................................................................................... 0-17
0.2.1 Prescribed use ............................................................................................................. 0-17
0.2.2 Responsibility of the operator ...................................................................................... 0-18
0.2.3 Safety instructions in the operating instructions .......................................................... 0-19
Technical Data ................................................................................................................ 1-21
1.1
Electrical and mechanical parameters ..................................................................................... 1-23
1.1.1 Main identification data ................................................................................................ 1-23
1.1.2 Nominal insulation level ............................................................................................... 1-24
1.1.3 Operating times ............................................................................................................ 1-25
1.1.3.1 Circuit-breaker........................................................................................................... 1-25
1.1.3.2 Disconnector and earthing switch module ................................................................ 1-27
1.1.3.3 Work-in-progress earthing switch ............................................................................. 1-27
1.1.3.4 High-speed earthing switch ....................................................................................... 1-27
1.1.4 Current transformers and voltage transformers ........................................................... 1-27
1.1.5 Local control cabinet .................................................................................................... 1-27
1.1.6 Anti-condensation heating units ................................................................................... 1-27
1.2
Motor drives.............................................................................................................................. 1-29
1.2.1 Motor drive for circuit-breaker ...................................................................................... 1-30
1.2.1.1 DC motor with common drive (G) ............................................................................. 1-30
1.2.1.2 DC motor with single pole drive (E) .......................................................................... 1-30
1.2.1.3 AC motor 50 Hz with common drive (G) ................................................................... 1-30
1.2.1.4 AC motor 50 Hz with single pole drive (E) ................................................................ 1-30
1.2.1.5 Technical data for the auxiliary switch ...................................................................... 1-31
1.2.1.6 Opening and closing releases ................................................................................... 1-32
1.2.2 Motor drive for disconnector and earthing switch module ........................................... 1-34
1.2.2.1 Technical data for the operating mechanism ............................................................ 1-34
1.2.2.2 Technical data for the auxiliary switch ...................................................................... 1-34
1.2.3 Motor drive for work-in-progress and high-speed earthing switches ........................... 1-35
1.2.3.1 Technical data for the operating mechanism ............................................................ 1-35
1.2.3.2 Technical data for the auxiliary switch ...................................................................... 1-35
1.3
Gas monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 1-37
1.3.1 Terms ........................................................................................................................... 1-38
1.3.2 Gas pressures and operating values ........................................................................... 1-39
1.3.2.1 Gas pressures and the operating values of the circuit-breaker ................................ 1-39
1.3.2.2 Gas pressures and operating values of the system (without voltage transformer)... 1-40
1.3.2.3 Gas pressures and the operating values of the voltage transformer ........................ 1-41
1.4
Nameplates .............................................................................................................................. 1-43
1.5
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules ..................................................................... 1-47
Description ...................................................................................................................... 2-59
2.1
General features of switchgear 8DN8 ...................................................................................... 2-61
2.1.1 Switchgear modules ..................................................................................................... 2-61
2.1.2 Gas, gas compartments, gas monitoring ..................................................................... 2-62
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
2.1.10
2.1.11
2.1.12
2.1.13
2.1.14
Circuit-breaker.............................................................................................................. 2-62
Busbar modules ........................................................................................................... 2-62
Disconnector and earthing switch module, work-in-progress earthing switches and
high-speed earthing switches....................................................................................... 2-63
Current transformer ...................................................................................................... 2-63
Voltage transformer...................................................................................................... 2-64
RC voltage divider ........................................................................................................ 2-64
Arresters ....................................................................................................................... 2-64
Cable connection module .......................................................................................... 2-65
Cable disconnection module ...................................................................................... 2-65
Single-pole output line................................................................................................ 2-65
Overhead line connection module ............................................................................. 2-65
Local control cabinet .................................................................................................. 2-66
2.2
Electrical control ....................................................................................................................... 2-67
2.2.1 Use ............................................................................................................................... 2-67
2.2.2 Design .......................................................................................................................... 2-68
2.2.3 Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-70
2.3
Gas monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 2-71
2.3.1 Use ............................................................................................................................... 2-71
2.3.2 Construction ................................................................................................................. 2-72
2.3.3 Gas monitoring diagram ............................................................................................... 2-73
2.3.3.1 Symbols .................................................................................................................... 2-73
2.3.3.2 Example of various models ....................................................................................... 2-73
2.4
Monitoring, test and diagnostic attachments ............................................................................ 2-75
2.4.1 View port (optional) ...................................................................................................... 2-75
2.4.2 Camera mount (optional) ............................................................................................. 2-76
2.4.3 Arc detector (optional) .................................................................................................. 2-77
2.4.4 Voltage testing connection (optional) ........................................................................... 2-78
2.5
Circuit-breaker .......................................................................................................................... 2-81
2.5.1 Use ............................................................................................................................... 2-81
2.5.2 External design ............................................................................................................ 2-82
2.5.3 Internal design .............................................................................................................. 2-84
2.5.3.1 Design of conducting path ........................................................................................ 2-84
2.5.3.2 Design and function of the switching system ............................................................ 2-84
2.5.4 Design and function of the drive system ...................................................................... 2-87
2.5.4.1 Version with common drive (G) ................................................................................. 2-87
2.5.4.2 Version with single pole drive (E) .............................................................................. 2-90
2.6
Disconnector and earthing switch module ............................................................................... 2-93
2.6.1 Use ............................................................................................................................... 2-93
2.6.2 External design ............................................................................................................ 2-94
2.6.3 Internal design .............................................................................................................. 2-96
2.6.3.1 Conducting path ........................................................................................................ 2-96
2.6.3.2 Work-in-progress earthing switch variants ................................................................ 2-97
2.6.3.3 Function of the disconnector and earthing switch module ........................................ 2-97
2.6.4 Design and function of the drive .................................................................................. 2-99
2.7
Cable disconnector ................................................................................................................ 2-103
2.7.1 Use ............................................................................................................................. 2-103
2.7.2 External design .......................................................................................................... 2-104
2.7.3 Internal design ............................................................................................................ 2-106
2.8
Earthing switches ................................................................................................................... 2-109
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
Use ............................................................................................................................. 2-109
External design .......................................................................................................... 2-110
Internal design ............................................................................................................ 2-111
Drive ........................................................................................................................... 2-114
2.9
Current transformer ................................................................................................................ 2-119
2.9.1 Use ............................................................................................................................. 2-119
2.9.2 External design .......................................................................................................... 2-120
2.9.3 Internal design ............................................................................................................ 2-123
2.9.3.1 Conductor and core-and-coil assembly .................................................................. 2-123
2.9.3.2 Secondary terminal ................................................................................................. 2-126
2.9.4 Terminal designations ................................................................................................ 2-127
2.10
Voltage transformer ............................................................................................................ 2-129
2.10.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-129
2.10.2 External design ........................................................................................................ 2-130
2.10.3 Core-and-coil assembly ........................................................................................... 2-132
2.10.4 Terminal box ............................................................................................................ 2-133
2.10.5 Terminal designations .............................................................................................. 2-134
2.11
RC divider ........................................................................................................................... 2-135
2.11.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-135
2.11.2 External design ........................................................................................................ 2-136
2.11.3 Internal design .......................................................................................................... 2-137
2.11.4 Connection ............................................................................................................... 2-137
2.12
Expansion joints .................................................................................................................. 2-139
2.12.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-139
2.12.2 Types of structure .................................................................................................... 2-140
2.12.2.1 Pressure-balanced sliding expansion joint............................................................ 2-140
2.12.2.2 Removal link .......................................................................................................... 2-141
2.12.2.3 Lateral expansion joint .......................................................................................... 2-142
2.13
Busbar ................................................................................................................................. 2-143
2.13.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-143
2.13.2 Construction ............................................................................................................. 2-144
2.14
Three-pole connection modules ......................................................................................... 2-149
2.15
Overhead line connection module ...................................................................................... 2-155
2.15.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-155
2.15.2 External design ........................................................................................................ 2-155
2.15.3 Internal design .......................................................................................................... 2-157
2.16
Cable connection module ................................................................................................... 2-159
2.16.1 Range of application ................................................................................................ 2-159
2.16.2 Construction ............................................................................................................. 2-160
2.17
Covers, filter mounts, rupture disk assemblies ................................................................... 2-165
2.17.1 Use of cover and filter holders ................................................................................. 2-165
2.17.2 Design ...................................................................................................................... 2-166
2.17.2.1 Covers and filter holders without rupture disc devices ......................................... 2-166
2.17.2.2 Covers and filter holders with rupture disc devices .............................................. 2-167
2.18
Housing and conductor connections .................................................................................. 2-169
2.18.1 Housing and housing connections ........................................................................... 2-169
2.18.1.1 Housing manufacture and testing ......................................................................... 2-169
2.18.1.2 Flanges.................................................................................................................. 2-170
2.18.1.3 Bushings ............................................................................................................... 2-171
2.18.2 Conductor connections ............................................................................................ 2-172
3
4
Shipment and storage .................................................................................................. 3-175
3.1
Packaging............................................................................................................................... 3-177
3.1.1 Range of application .................................................................................................. 3-177
3.1.2 Design and manufacture ............................................................................................ 3-179
3.2
Markings ................................................................................................................................. 3-181
3.2.1 Symbols on packages ................................................................................................ 3-182
3.2.2 Identification of the shipping assemblies ................................................................... 3-184
3.3
Receipt and handling of shipments ........................................................................................ 3-185
3.3.1 Shipment .................................................................................................................... 3-185
3.3.1.1 Transport to the site ................................................................................................ 3-186
3.3.1.2 On-site transport ..................................................................................................... 3-187
3.3.2 Receipt of goods ........................................................................................................ 3-188
3.3.2.1 Make sure the delivery is complete......................................................................... 3-188
3.3.2.2 Check the goods against external damage............................................................. 3-191
3.3.2.3 Checking sealed packing ........................................................................................ 3-192
3.3.3 Unpack goods and check for damage incurred during transport ............................... 3-192
3.3.4 Storage of goods ........................................................................................................ 3-193
3.3.4.1 Time-limited storage of shipments .......................................................................... 3-194
3.3.4.2 Storing of spare parts .............................................................................................. 3-196
3.3.5 Action to be taken in the event of damage or loss ..................................................... 3-197
3.4
Handling of sealed packages ................................................................................................. 3-199
3.4.1 Basic information of sealed packing .......................................................................... 3-199
3.4.2 Recognizing sealed packing ...................................................................................... 3-199
3.4.3 Unpacking .................................................................................................................. 3-200
3.4.4 Repair of sealed packing............................................................................................ 3-200
3.4.4.1 Opening of the sealed packing ............................................................................... 3-200
3.4.4.2 Renewing the desiccant .......................................................................................... 3-200
3.4.4.3 Reconditioning the desiccant .................................................................................. 3-201
3.4.4.4 Resealing the foil ..................................................................................................... 3-202
Assembly and Commissioning .................................................................................... 4-203
4.1
Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................... 4-205
4.1.1 Documentations ......................................................................................................... 4-205
4.1.1.1 Operating instructions ............................................................................................. 4-205
4.1.1.2 Drawings ................................................................................................................. 4-206
4.1.1.3 Schematics .............................................................................................................. 4-206
4.1.1.4 Further documentation ............................................................................................ 4-206
4.1.2 Personnel prerequisites ............................................................................................. 4-207
4.1.2.1 Responsibility .......................................................................................................... 4-207
4.1.2.2 Erection and maintenance personnel ..................................................................... 4-207
4.1.3 Transportation routes, lifting equipment, transportation equipment .......................... 4-207
4.1.4 Tools, devices, expendable materials, gantries ......................................................... 4-208
4.1.5 Requirements with regard to the building site and its equipments ............................ 4-208
4.1.5.1 Location of the switchgear ...................................................................................... 4-208
4.1.5.2 Storage areas .......................................................................................................... 4-208
4.1.5.3 Office and recreation rooms, sanitary facilities ....................................................... 4-208
4.1.5.4 Lighting, ventilation, electricity and water supplies ................................................. 4-209
4.1.6 Clean work requirements ........................................................................................... 4-209
4.1.7 Fire and accident prevention ...................................................................................... 4-209
4.1.8 Documentation of erection and commissioning ......................................................... 4-209
4.2
Preparatory work .................................................................................................................... 4-211
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.10
Customer building prerequisites ................................................................................ 4-211
Instruction of third-party personnel ............................................................................ 4-212
Drawings .................................................................................................................... 4-212
Circuit diagrams ......................................................................................................... 4-212
Delivery documentation.............................................................................................. 4-212
Checking the delivery units ........................................................................................ 4-213
Tools / Instruments..................................................................................................... 4-213
Check the dimensions of cut-outs in the floor, ceiling and walls................................ 4-213
Check the cable ducts in the floor .............................................................................. 4-213
Measurement of equipment support points ............................................................. 4-214
4.3
Assembling the switchgear .................................................................................................... 4-215
4.3.1 Installation of switchgear according to main drawing ................................................ 4-216
4.3.2 Positioning of bays ..................................................................................................... 4-217
4.3.3 Check for visible damage to assemblies.................................................................... 4-220
4.3.4 External cleaning of the assemblies .......................................................................... 4-220
4.3.5 Visible check insides for damage and cleanliness ..................................................... 4-220
4.3.6 Treatment of flanges and O-rings .............................................................................. 4-220
4.3.7 Gas-tight and gas-permeable bushings ..................................................................... 4-221
4.3.8 Installing the tie rods and measuring the bay spacing ............................................... 4-222
4.3.9 Insert filter in switchgear gas compartments.............................................................. 4-223
4.3.10 In case of extension: check primary conductor allocation ....................................... 4-223
4.3.11 Switchgear earthing according to earthing plan ....................................................... 4-223
4.3.12 Installing control cables ............................................................................................ 4-223
4.3.13 Check unused cable glands for tightness ................................................................ 4-223
4.3.14 Earth the transformer and control cables shielding at both ends ............................ 4-223
4.3.15 Check, apply and/or repair paintwork ...................................................................... 4-223
4.3.16 Application of signs and lettering ............................................................................. 4-223
4.3.17 Installation of voltage transformers .......................................................................... 4-224
4.3.18 Installation of RC-divider .......................................................................................... 4-225
4.3.19 Apply corrosion protection to attachments located outdoors ................................... 4-225
4.3.20 HV terminals on Air bushings ................................................................................... 4-225
4.4
Commissioning of switchgear ................................................................................................ 4-227
4.4.1 Check the accordance with the circuit diagram. ........................................................ 4-227
4.4.2 Resistance measurement of main current path ......................................................... 4-227
4.4.3 SF6 Gas filling and measurement .............................................................................. 4-227
4.4.4 Check the internal cover of the density monitor ......................................................... 4-228
4.4.5 Function test of three-position disconnector, earth switch ......................................... 4-228
4.4.6 Check operation of circuit-breakers ........................................................................... 4-228
4.4.7 Check alarms ............................................................................................................. 4-228
4.4.8 Check that MCB’s are free of reverse voltage ........................................................... 4-228
4.4.9 Removing the stickers and/or plastic stopper at ventilation tubes ............................. 4-228
4.4.10 Check anti-condensation heating units .................................................................... 4-228
4.4.11 Check operation of control system ........................................................................... 4-228
4.4.12 Checking the HV testing systems ............................................................................ 4-228
4.4.13 Customer informed of pending high-voltage tests ................................................... 4-228
4.4.14 Check the condition of the cable end closing bush .................................................. 4-229
4.4.15 High-voltage test ...................................................................................................... 4-229
4.4.16 Alternating current test ............................................................................................. 4-229
4.4.17 Check current transformer ....................................................................................... 4-229
4.4.18 Check seal in terminal box ....................................................................................... 4-229
4.4.19 Voltage converter tests ............................................................................................ 4-229
4.4.20
4.4.21
4.5
5
6
Check the RC-divider ............................................................................................... 4-229
Weather-protection cover, check central bolt .......................................................... 4-229
Miscellaneous......................................................................................................................... 4-231
4.5.1 Revision of design drawings ...................................................................................... 4-231
4.5.2 Revision of schematics .............................................................................................. 4-231
4.5.3 Check whether anomalies entered in NCR (Non Conformity Report) ....................... 4-231
4.5.4 Inspection reports written ........................................................................................... 4-231
4.5.5 Check return of material and equipment .................................................................... 4-231
4.5.6 Check warnings regarding non-operational parts of the plant ................................... 4-231
4.5.7 Closing the ventilation ducts ...................................................................................... 4-231
4.5.8 Acceptance of switchgear accessories ...................................................................... 4-231
4.5.9 Preliminary / Final Acceptance-Report ...................................................................... 4-231
Operation....................................................................................................................... 5-233
5.1
Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................... 5-235
5.1.1 Basic requirements .................................................................................................... 5-235
5.1.2 Specific measures for accident and fire prevention ................................................... 5-236
5.1.3 Procedure if ambient temperatures are too high or too low ....................................... 5-237
5.2
Manual operation ................................................................................................................... 5-239
5.2.1 Manual operation in local control with the switchgear interlock deactivated ............. 5-240
5.2.2 Manual operation of the motor drive .......................................................................... 5-241
5.2.2.1 Manual operation of the earthing switch motor drive ............................................. 5-242
5.2.2.2 Manual operation of the disconnector and earthing switch module motor drive..... 5-246
5.2.3 Manual operation of the circuit-breaker ..................................................................... 5-250
5.3
Checks, alarms, causes, remedial measures ........................................................................ 5-255
5.3.1 Checks during operation ............................................................................................ 5-255
5.3.2 Alarms for the circuit-breaker ..................................................................................... 5-256
5.3.2.1 Circuit Breaker: Loss of SF6 .................................................................................... 5-256
5.3.2.2 Circuit Breaker: General lockout SF6 ...................................................................... 5-257
5.3.2.3 Circuit Breaker: On-spring unloaded ....................................................................... 5-258
5.3.2.4 Motor protection ...................................................................................................... 5-259
5.3.2.5 Motor run time monitoring ....................................................................................... 5-260
5.3.2.6 Autoreclosure interlocking: ...................................................................................... 5-261
5.3.2.7 Pole discrepancy alarm ........................................................................................... 5-261
5.3.3 Signals from switchgear modules .............................................................................. 5-262
5.3.3.1 Loss of SF6 .............................................................................................................. 5-262
5.3.3.2 Minimum SF6 density .............................................................................................. 5-262
5.3.3.3 SF6 pressure rising .................................................................................................. 5-263
5.3.4 Fault position .............................................................................................................. 5-263
Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 6-265
6.1
Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................... 6-267
6.1.1 Basic safety measures ............................................................................................... 6-267
6.1.2 Secure drive against operation .................................................................................. 6-270
6.1.2.1 Electrical interlocking of the earthing switch motor drive ........................................ 6-270
6.1.2.2 Mechanical blocking of the earthing switch motor drive ......................................... 6-271
6.1.2.3 Mechanical blocking of the earthing switch drive linkage for maintenance ............ 6-272
6.1.2.4 Electromechanical interlocking of the disconnector and earthing switch module
motor drive .............................................................................................................. 6-273
6.1.2.5 Mechanical blocking of the disconnector and earthing switch module motor
drive ......................................................................................................................... 6-273
6.1.2.6
Mechanical blocking of the disconnector and earthing switch module drive
linkage for maintenance .......................................................................................... 6-275
6.1.2.7 Securing locking and/or blocking with a padlock .................................................... 6-276
6.1.3 Assignment of personnel............................................................................................ 6-276
6.1.4 Maintenance kits ........................................................................................................ 6-276
6.1.5 Responding to malfunctions ....................................................................................... 6-277
7
6.2
Intervals and maintenance service ........................................................................................ 6-279
6.2.1 Influences on the maintenance interval ..................................................................... 6-279
6.2.1.1 Influences through mechanical wear and/or switching operations ......................... 6-279
6.2.1.2 Harmful environmental influences ........................................................................... 6-280
6.2.2 Starting date ............................................................................................................... 6-282
6.2.3 Maintenance service .................................................................................................. 6-283
6.2.4 Inspection of the contact system ................................................................................ 6-284
6.2.4.1 Contact system check as a function of the breaking current .................................. 6-284
6.2.4.2 Inspection of the high-speed earthing switch contact system................................. 6-284
6.3
Maintenance work .................................................................................................................. 6-285
General considerations and instructions.................................................................... 7-287
7.1
Checking external system condition ...................................................................................... 7-289
7.2
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments ........................................................ 7-291
7.2.1 Evacuating and filling the gas compartments ............................................................ 7-292
7.2.2 Emptying and venting the gas compartments ............................................................ 7-294
7.3
Checking the gas monitoring system ..................................................................................... 7-295
7.3.1 Testing the density monitor ........................................................................................ 7-296
7.3.2 Mounting and removing density monitor .................................................................... 7-296
7.3.2.1 Density monitor with test connection ...................................................................... 7-297
7.3.2.2 Test the density monitor with the test connector. ................................................... 7-298
7.3.2.3 Density monitor without test connection ................................................................. 7-298
7.3.2.4 Test the density monitor without the test connector. .............................................. 7-299
7.4
Checking for leaks in gas compartments ............................................................................... 7-301
7.4.1 Check pressure of the gas filling with precision pressure gauge ............................... 7-302
7.4.2 Leakage detection ...................................................................................................... 7-302
7.5
Measuring the moisture content and SF6 content of the gas ................................................. 7-303
7.5.1 Measuring the moisture content of the gas (dew point) ............................................. 7-304
7.5.2 Measuring the SF6 percentage or air content ............................................................ 7-304
7.6
Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections .............................................. 7-305
7.6.1 Spare parts, expendable materials and tools ............................................................ 7-305
7.6.2 Preparing and connecting flanges ............................................................................. 7-306
7.6.3 Preparing conductor connections .............................................................................. 7-308
7.7
Laying cables ......................................................................................................................... 7-309
7.7.1 Basic requirements for the laying and joining of cables ............................................. 7-309
7.7.2 Measures to ensure electromagnetic compatibility .................................................... 7-310
7.8
Testing the disconnectors, earthing and high-speed earthing switches ................................ 7-311
7.8.1 Visual check and inspection of the heating unit of the motor drive ............................ 7-311
7.8.2 Function test ............................................................................................................... 7-312
7.9
Check spring accumulator drive for circuit breaker ................................................................ 7-313
7.9.1 Check auxiliary switches ............................................................................................ 7-314
7.9.2 Checking the dampers for leakage ............................................................................ 7-315
7.9.3 Checking that the releases and latching blocks are affixed tightly ............................ 7-315
7.10
Checking the electronic circuit-breaker control................................................................... 7-317
7.10.1 Check anti-pump function ........................................................................................ 7-317
7.10.2
7.10.3
7.10.4
Checking the releases.............................................................................................. 7-317
Checking the double excitation ................................................................................ 7-318
Closing spring motor ................................................................................................ 7-318
7.11
Checking the control functions............................................................................................ 7-319
7.11.1 Checking the control and alarm circuits ................................................................... 7-319
7.11.2 Checking measuring, display and counting devices ................................................ 7-320
7.11.3 Checking the electric interlock ................................................................................. 7-320
7.11.4 Checking the anti-condensation heating units ......................................................... 7-321
7.12
Checking the current transformer ....................................................................................... 7-323
7.12.1 Visual inspection ...................................................................................................... 7-323
7.12.2 Polarity test .............................................................................................................. 7-323
7.12.3 Testing the secondary circuits ................................................................................. 7-324
7.13
Testing the voltage transformer .......................................................................................... 7-325
7.13.1 Visual inspection ...................................................................................................... 7-325
7.13.2 Insulation test ........................................................................................................... 7-325
7.13.3 Checking the secondary circuits .............................................................................. 7-326
7.14
Check RC divider ................................................................................................................ 7-327
7.14.1 Visual checks ........................................................................................................... 7-327
7.14.2 Preparation of the RC divider for high voltage test of the switchgear ...................... 7-327
7.14.3 Check secondary current circuits ............................................................................. 7-327
7.15
Check cable sealing end ..................................................................................................... 7-329
7.16
Testing the primary part ...................................................................................................... 7-331
7.16.1 Measuring voltage drop............................................................................................ 7-331
7.16.2 High voltage test ...................................................................................................... 7-332
7.17
Inserting / replacing filter material ....................................................................................... 7-335
7.17.1 Preparatory work ...................................................................................................... 7-336
7.17.2 Inserting filter material .............................................................................................. 7-337
7.17.3 Replacing filter material............................................................................................ 7-338
7.18
Fitting the rupture disks ...................................................................................................... 7-339
7.18.1 Unpacking the rupture disc ...................................................................................... 7-339
7.18.2 Fitting the rupture disk.............................................................................................. 7-340
7.19
Cleaning .............................................................................................................................. 7-343
7.19.1 Cleaning agents ....................................................................................................... 7-343
7.19.2 Cleaning equipment ................................................................................................. 7-345
7.19.3 Cleaning work .......................................................................................................... 7-346
7.19.4 Disposal ................................................................................................................... 7-347
7.20
Corrosion protection, greasing and oiling ........................................................................... 7-349
7.20.1 Application of anti-corrosion agent ........................................................................... 7-349
7.20.1.1 Overview of anti-corrosive measures to be taken ................................................. 7-349
7.20.1.2 Open-air and indoor with corrosive environmental conditions .............................. 7-350
7.20.1.3 Indoor conditions under normal conditions ........................................................... 7-353
7.20.2 Prescribed anti-corrosion and sealing agents .......................................................... 7-354
7.20.3 Prescribed paints ..................................................................................................... 7-355
7.20.4 Greasing and lubrication .......................................................................................... 7-357
7.20.4.1 For all lubricating points and non-hot-galvanized bolts ......................................... 7-357
7.20.4.2 For sealing rings and anti-friction bearings of the SF6 shaft seal ......................... 7-357
7.20.4.3 For the threads of all hot-galvanized bolts ............................................................ 7-357
7.20.4.4 For hinges, articulated joints, auxiliary switch shafts ............................................ 7-357
7.20.4.5 For contact surfaces of conducting connections ................................................... 7-358
7.20.4.6 For O-rings ............................................................................................................ 7-358
7.20.4.7
Disconnector and earthing switch pins ................................................................. 7-358
7.21
Remove the spring accumulator drive of the circuit breaker (Version G) ........................... 7-359
7.21.1 Structure of the blocking device ............................................................................... 7-360
7.21.2 Fitting the blocking device ........................................................................................ 7-361
7.22
Timing charts ...................................................................................................................... 7-363
7.23
Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6............................................................................... 7-367
7.24
Bolted joints, tightening torques, locking tabs .................................................................... 7-369
7.24.1 Assembling a bolted joint ......................................................................................... 7-369
7.24.2 Identifying the strength class ................................................................................... 7-371
7.24.3 Locking tabs ............................................................................................................. 7-372
7.24.4 Checking a bolted joint ............................................................................................. 7-373
7.25
Advice on handling SF6....................................................................................................... 7-375
7.25.1 Health hazards and general work-hygienic requirements........................................ 7-375
7.25.2 Environmental effects of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6)................................................ 7-376
7.25.3 Physical and chemical properties ............................................................................ 7-377
7.25.4 Equipment for handling SF6 ..................................................................................... 7-377
7.25.4.1 Carrying out gas-related work outside the gas compartment ............................... 7-377
7.25.4.2 Working inside gas compartments without SF6 decomposition products ............. 7-378
7.25.4.3 Working inside gas compartments with SF6 decomposition products .................. 7-378
7.25.5 Work in gas compartments ...................................................................................... 7-379
7.25.5.1 Basic requirements ............................................................................................... 7-379
7.25.5.2 Additional requirements in the case of heavy-duty switching operations ............. 7-380
7.25.6 Cleaning and disposing of used materials and equipment ...................................... 7-380
7.26
Cleanliness on site .............................................................................................................. 7-381
7.26.1 Completing work on the building .............................................................................. 7-381
7.26.2 Packing material ....................................................................................................... 7-381
7.26.3 Cleaning the switchgear room ................................................................................. 7-382
7.26.4 Cleanliness and order when working with open assemblies ................................... 7-382
7.26.5 Cleanliness of tools .................................................................................................. 7-383
7.26.6 Preventive measures for work likely to create dirt ................................................... 7-384
7.26.7 Person responsible for cleanliness and tidiness ...................................................... 7-384
7.27
Disposing of high-voltage switching devices and systems ................................................. 7-385
Pos : 1.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
Pos : 1.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-----------Abschnitts wechsel---------- @ 7\mod_1345787958892_0.doc x @ 52960 @ @ 1
Pos : 2.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Allgemeines/M odul e/0 Allgemeines @ 0\mod_1329903044120_18.doc x @ 2091 @ 1 @ 1
General
0 General
0-13
r
Pos : 2.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
0-14
General
General
Pos : 2.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Allgemeines/M odul e/0.1 Aufbau der Betri ebs anleitung @ 15\mod_1366104700101_18.doc x @ 111181 @ 2 @ 1
0.1
Manual structure
These operating instructions are valid for the type and version of the metal-enclosed gas-insulated
switchgear specified on the title page. They should familiarize the operating personnel with the design and
function of the switchgear. In addition, they contain notes for operation and provide information on
installation and maintenance
It is advisable for the operating personnel to familiarize themselves as early as possible with the instructions,
and with the aid of other documents supplied to gather any relevant further information on the switchgear
and its features.

Note
The manual contains instructions for the proper operation of the switchgear.
Safety precautions indicate existing residual hazards and the corresponding
measures to avoid them.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently in
the operating instructions, the matter should be referred to the local SIEMENS sales office.
The contents of these instructions shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement,
commitment or relationship.
The respective sales contract contains all the obligations of Siemens. The warranty contained in the sales
contract is the complete and sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained in these instructions
neither extend nor limit the warranty.
Pos : 2.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Allgemeines/M odul e/0.1.1 Gli ederung @ 15\mod_1366107183179_18.doc x @ 111251 @ 3 @ 1
ich
0.1.1
Sub-division
The operating instructions are organised as follows:
Chapter 0: General
Chapter 1: Technical Data
Chapter 2: Description
Chapter 3: Shipment and storage
Chapter 4: Erection and commissioning
Chapter 5: Operation
Chapter 6: Maintenance
Chapter 7: General considerations and instructions
In general:
- The chapters are subdivided into sections, each section dealing with one particular subject.

Note
Chapter 7 contains sections on topics affecting the whole manual.
0-15
r
General
This more detailed information is referred to in several sections of the chapters Erection and commissioning,
Operation and Maintenance. The sections of chapter 7should always be read in combination with that
particular section. For example, it only becomes clear in section “Servicing works” when Typical “Fit/Replace
Filter Material” is to be observed.
Pos : 2.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Allgemeines/M odul e/0.1.2 Querver weise @ 15\mod_1366107591819_18.doc x @ 111401 @ 3 @ 1
0.1.2
Cross references
Cross-references will be distinguished using the following pictogram:
- References to sections that are part of the operating instructions (e.g. for the section Electrical and
mechanical parameters in the chapter Technical data):
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
- References to documents that are not part of the operating instructions but are, however, part of the order
documentation:
Order documentation
Cross-references to designation of parts in illustrations are made in continuous text, stating the item number,
e.g. Lever [1].
The figures entered and annotations with *), 1), 2), 3) ... apply only to the section concerned or to a
illustration or table.
Pos : 2.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Allgemeines/M odul e/0.1.3 Nummerier ung der Teil e @ 24\mod_1383835961538_18.doc x @ 204603 @ 3 @ 1
0.1.3
Numbering of sub-parts
The parts are numbered in ascending order. The numbering always applies to the corresponding section in
the operating instructions only.
Pos : 2.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Allgemeines/M odul e/0.1.4 Verständigung mit Hilfe der Betriebs anl eitung @ 15\mod_1366111516821_18.doc x @ 111451 @ 3 @ 1
0.1.4
Communication by means of the operating instructions
In written or verbal communications, please provide a complete designation from the operating instructions
and use only designations and numbers for sub-parts as indicated in the chapter, the series number of the
section and the page number of the instructions (if applicable).
For clear identification of modules, modular assemblies or individual components, details of the switchgear
structure are required; these are given in the circuit diagram for the switchgear installed.
This will serve to avoid any misunderstandings.
Pos : 2.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
0-16
General
Pos : 2.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Allgemeines/M odul e/0.2 Sic herheits hinweise @ 15\mod_1366111585228_18.doc x @ 111501 @ 2 @ 1
0.2
Safety Instructions
The switchgear, together with the equipment and special tools also supplied, is in conformity with the
statutory laws, rules and standards applying at the time of delivery, especially those regulations concerning
health and safety.
Provided that the conditions specified in these operating instructions are applied and kept to (and the safety
instructions given in the operating instructions and/or on the product are followed) the switchgear will not
cause any danger to persons, property or the environment. This applies throughout its entire service life, i.e.
from supply (and during erection and operation) right up to the time of dismantling and disposal.
The quality assurance system assures a uniform high standard of quality, with particular regard to
compliance with specifications concerning health and safety.
Pos : 2.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/0 Allgemei nes/Module/0.2.1 Besti mmungsgemäße Ver wendung @ 15\mod_1366111950010_18.doc x @ 111551 @ 3 @ 1
0.2.1
Prescribed use
The switchgear is deemed properly used when
- it is operated in accordance with the agreed terms and conditions of supply and the technical data and
- the equipment and special tools supplied are used exclusively for their intended purpose and in
accordance with the provisions of these operating instructions.
Any other use is forbidden, unless the express consent of SIEMENS AG has been obtained.
If the above-mentioned conditions are not observed or the safety instructions are not followed, there can be
danger from
-
Voltage
gas systems under pressure
charged springs
SF6 gas and its decomposition products
falling and/or tilted parts, and also confined spaces as a result of moving parts.
This can result in death, serious injury, considerable material damage and damage to the
environment.
Pos : 2.11 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
0-17
r
General
Pos : 2.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/0 Allgemei nes/Module/0.2.2 Verantwortung des Betr eibers @ 15\mod_1366112368291_18.doc x @ 111601 @ 3 @ 1
0.2.2
Responsibility of the operator
In order to avoid accidents, faults, damage or impermissible adverse effects on the environment the party
responsible for transportation, erection, operation, maintenance and disposal of the switchgear or of parts
thereof must ensure
- that only qualified and instructed personnel are assigned to work,
- that before starting work, regularly thereafter and following any unusual occurrences, personnel are
instructed concerning the possible dangers and also the safety measures required to prevent such,
- that regulations and instructions for safety at work (together with instructions on action to be taken in the
event of accidents and/or fire) are at all times available to personnel and, if necessary, displayed at the
place of work,
- that the equipment and facilities required for work safety and also the personal protective clothing etc.
necessary for certain procedures are available and are used, and
- that the prescribed maintenance intervals are adhered to and that only those spare parts, lubricants etc.
approved by the manufacturer are used.
- In the event of any changes/damage to the coating systems/corrosion protection measures on the GIS
and its components in the framework of the IBS, maintenance or other work or environmental influences,
the technical restoration of the coating system/the corrosion protection in accordance with the details
given in Chapters 4 to 7 must be carried out. Otherwise, damage and malfunctions of the switchgear or its
components may result.
Pos : 2.13 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
0-18
General
Pos : 2.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/0 Allgemei nes/Module/0.2.3 Sic her heitshi nweis e i n der Betriebs anl eitung @ 15\mod_1366112641979_18.doc x @ 111651 @ 3 @ 1
0.2.3
Safety instructions in the operating instructions
These safety instructions shall form a part of these operating instructions, wherever this is necessary for
warding off any residual risks. These safety instructions are appended before the sections on installation,
operation and maintenance respectively. In these sections any necessary safety instructions are also given
prior to descriptions of the relevant actions / procedures.
With regard to the possible consequences of non-compliance with these safety instructions, the following
shall apply:
Caution
Potentially lethal voltage – DANGER TO LIFE!
Warning
This shall denote a possibly dangerous situation. If such a situation is not
avoided, death or severe injury can result.
Attention
This shall denote a possibly dangerous situation. If such a situation is not avoided,
minor injuries and/or property damage can result.

Note
This shall denote a possibly dangerous situation. If such a situation is not avoided,
the product or anything in its vicinity can be damaged.
In addition to the above-mentioned safety instructions, any information to which personnel should pay
special attention is denoted in italics.
Pos : 2.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
0-19
r
Pos : 2.16 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
0-20
General
Technical Data
Pos : 3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnisc he Daten/M odule/1 Technisc he Daten/1 T ec hnisc he D aten @ 15\mod_1366112870073_18.doc x @ 111676 @ 1 @ 1
1 Technical Data
1-21
r

Pos : 3.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
1-22
Technical Data
Note
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in part, from
the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track guiding, the
location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary equipment.
Technical Data
Pos : 3.3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Parameter/1.1 El ektrisc he und mechanisc he Parameter/1.1 El ektrisc he und mechanische Par ameter - Übersc hrift @ 15\mod_1366113024932_18.doc x @ 111701 @ 2 @ 1
1.1
Electrical and mechanical parameters
Pos : 3.3.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Parameter/1.1 El ektrisc he und mechanisc he Parameter/1.1 El ektrisc he und mechanische Par ameter 00 - T ext @ 24\mod_1391413023392_18.doc x @ 227560 @ @ 1
This section contains information about
The main identification data
Rated insulation level
Operating times of the circuit-breaker
Operating times of the disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch as well as the high-speed
earthing switch
- Notes on the identification data for current transformers and voltage transformers
- Data concerning the local control cabinet.
-
Basic information:
Motor drives [ 1.2]
Gas monitoring [ 1.3]
Nameplates [ 1.4]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
The figures entered and annotations with *) apply only to the table concerned.
Pos : 3.3.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.3.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Parameter/1.1.1 Hauptkenndaten/1.1.1 H auptkenndaten - Standard Tabelle ( 4 Bm-Spannungen/Spalten) 8DN 8 5 @ 0\mod_1330501108909_18.doc x @ 2441 @ 3 @ 1
1.1.1
Main identification data
Rated voltage
kV
72.5
100
123
Rated frequency
Hz
50/60
- Feeder (bay)
A
≤ 3150
- Busbar
A
≤ 3150
kA
≤ 40
s
≤3
50 Hz
kA
2.5 x 40 = 100
60 Hz
kA
2.6 x 40 = 104
- Indoor
°C
-30 … +40
- Outdoor
°C
-30 … +40
kA
40
50 Hz
kA
2.5 x 40 = 100
60 Hz
kA
2.6 x 40 = 104
- for effectively earthed mains
p.u.
1.3
- for non-effectively earthed mains
p.u.
1.5
145
Rated normal current
Rated short-time withstand current
Rated duration of short-circuit
Rated peak withstand current (IEC)
Ambient temperature (range)
Circuit-breakers: *)
Rated short-circuit breaking current
Rated short-circuit making current (IEC)
Pole factor *)
Operating sequence (IEC)
O - 0.3s - CO - 3min - CO
*) Pole factor according to IEC 62271.100
1-23
Technical Data
r
Pos : 3.3.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.3.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Parameter/1.1.2 Bemessungs-Is olationspegel /1.1.2 Bemes sungs-Isol ati onspegel 01 @ 0\mod_1330501111128_18.doc x @ 2446 @ 3 @ 1
1.1.2
Nominal insulation level
The nominal insulation level in accordance with IEC / VDE is ascertained by
- the clearance between high-voltage and earth potential, the mechanical rating and design of the highvoltage parts within the metal enclosure and by
- the pressure or the density of the insulating gas (SF6) inside the metal enclosure.
The figures in the table apply for +20 °C and minimum operating density of SF6.
Pos : 3.3.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Parameter/1.1.2 Bemessungs-Is olationspegel /1.1.2 Bemes sungs-Isol ati onspegel 02 - Standar d T abelle (4 Bm-Spannungen/Spalten) 8DN 8 5 @ 1\mod_1333351759643_18.doc x @ 13160 @ @ 1
Rated voltage
kV
72.5
100
123
145
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage
(1.2 / 50 μs), Peak value (max):
- Phase to earth
- between phases
kV
kV
325
325
450
450
550
550
650
650
kV
375
520
630
750
kV
kV
325+50
325
450+70
450
550+80
550
650+100
650
Rated power frequency withstand voltage
(1 min), rms value:
- Phase to earth
- between phases
kV
kV
140
140
185
185
230
230
275
275
- Across the isolating distance
- Across the open circuit-breaker
kV
kV
80+80
140
105+105
185
133+133
230
158+158
275
- Across the isolating distance
- Across the isolating distance at power frequency
voltage
- Across the open circuit-breaker
Pos : 3.3.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-24
Technical Data
Pos : 3.3.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Parameter/1.1.3 Sc haltz eiten/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten @ 0\mod_1330501112721_18.doc x @ 2451 @ 3 @ 1
1.1.3
Operating times
Pos : 3.3.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.1 Leistungsschalter 010 @ 0\mod_1330501114925_18.doc x @ 2456 @ 4 @ 1
1.1.3.1
Circuit-breaker
The terms used in the diagrams are used to describe the switching process.
Opening time
Arcing time
Break time/Interrupting time
Contacts touch
Current starts to flow in the
conducting path (preignition)
initiator of closing movement
Breaker open –
Extinction of arc
(galvanic separation) - start
of arc
Contact separation
apply auxiliary power to
activate the release
Breaker closed -
Pos : 3.3.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.1 Leistungsschalter 020 - Sc haltzeiten Grafi k mit Bildu @ 25\mod_1392888828361_18.doc x @ 230205 @ @ 1
Make time
Dead time
Re-make time
Closing time
Fig. 1-1
Break-Make operation with automatic reclosing (to IEC / VDE / ANSI)
Pos : 3.3.12 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.3.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.1 Leistungsschalter 030 - Einführung Schaltz eiten @ 0\mod_1330501120315_18.doc x @ 2471 @ @ 1
All values for these times (see table) refer to an ambient temperature of +20 °C, nominal supply voltage and
SF6 pressure. Data for the opening times apply to max. arcing time in the event of a triple-pole terminal short
circuit, measured at nominal values for SF6 pressure.
1-25
Technical Data
r
Pos : 3.3.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.1 Leistungsschalter 031 - 8DN 8 5 T abelle Sc haltz eiten G/E @ 30\mod_1433827639857_18.doc x @ 281801 @ @ 1
Version with common drive
Releases for closing operation
Operating times
Closing time
Unit
Instantaneous release (design A)
Normal release (design A)
ms
45 ± 5
55 ± 6
Instantaneous release (design A)
Normal release (design A)
Releases for opening operation
Operating times
Unit
Frequency
Hz
50
60
50
60
First-pole-to-clear
factor kpp
p.u.
1,3
1,5
1,3
1,5
1,3
1,5
1,3
1,5
Opening time
ms
24 ± 2
24 ± 2
24 ± 2
24 ± 2
32 ± 3
32 ± 3
32 ± 3
32 ± 3
Arcing time
ms
21,5
20,9
21,8
18,0
21,5
20,9
21,8
18,0
Rated break-time
ms
46,2
45,3
45,2
43,0
54,2
53,3
53,2
51,0
Version with single-pole drive
Releases for closing operation
Operating times
Closing time
Unit
Instantaneous release (design A)
Normal release (design A)
ms
50 ± 5
60 ± 6
Releases for opening operation
Operating times
Unit
Normal release (design B)
Frequency
Hz
First-pole-to-clear
factor kpp
p.u.
1,3
1,5
1,3
1,5
Opening time
ms
24 ± 2
24 ± 2
24 ± 2
24 ± 2
Arcing time
ms
21,5
20,9
21,8
18,0
Rated break-time
ms
46,2
45,3
45,2
43,0
Pos : 3.3.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-26
50
60
Technical Data
Pos : 3.3.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.2 Trenn- und Er dungssc halter-Baustein - 8DN 8 T abell e @ 1\mod_1333361527653_18.doc x @ 13201 @ 4 @ 1
1.1.3.2
Disconnector and earthing switch module
Movement time CLOSE
(Disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch)
s
≤6
Movement time OPEN
(Disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch)
s
≤6
Movement time CLOSE
s
≤5
Movement time OPEN
s
≤5
Closing time
ms
≤ 50
Opening time
s
≤8
Pos : 3.3.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.3 Ar bei tser dungssc hal ter - 8DN 8 T abelle @ 1\mod_1333367876530_18.doc x @ 13253 @ 4 @ 1
1.1.3.3
Work-in-progress earthing switch
Pos : 3.3.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.4 Schnell erdungss chalter - 8DN8 Tabell e @ 1\mod_1333368135402_18.doc x @ 13286 @ 4 @ 1
1.1.3.4
High-speed earthing switch
Pos : 3.3.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.4 Str omwandl er/1.1.4 Stromwandl er - 8DN 8 5 @ 1\mod_1333368561678_18.doc x @ 13297 @ 3 @ 1
1.1.4
Current transformers and voltage transformers
The weights of transformers are extremely dependent on the number and type of cores. Refer to drawings
for gas pressure / gas filling of the voltage transformer and special technical data.
The maximum load capacitance of the voltage trans-former (discharge strength) is:
145 kV: 12 µF
72.5 kV: 20 µF
at
at
Um • √ 2 / √ 3
Um • √ 2 / √ 3
This corresponds to a cable length of 40 up to 100 km or an overhead line length of 2000 up to 2600 km; 2
discharges in succession with subsequent pause of 5 hour prior to next discharge.
Pos : 3.3.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.5 Ortss teuers chr ank/1.1.5 Ortss teuerschr ank - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6, 8D N9 2 @ 0\mod_1330501133315_18.doc x @ 2506 @ 3 @ 1
1.1.5
Local control cabinet
The local control cabinet holds the equipment for protected actuation of the switching devices of a bay and
also the optical indications and signals/alarm for the bay. Details are shown in the drawings.
Pos : 3.3.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elektrische Par ameter/1.1.6 Anti kondens atheiz ungen/1.1.6 Anti kondensatheiz ungen @ 0\mod_1330501137159_18.doc x @ 2516 @ 3 @ 1
1.1.6
Anti-condensation heating units
For information on the anti-condensation heating units, refer to the Technical Data and the Order
Documentation.
Motor drives [ 1.2]
Order documentation
Pos : 3.3.22 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-27
r
Pos : 3.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
1-28
Technical Data
Technical Data
Pos : 3.5.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2 Motor antriebe @ 0\mod_1329829091110_18.doc x @ 1719 @ 2 @ 1
1.2
Motor drives
This section contains information about
- the identification data for the motor drives and
- the identification data for the auxiliary switches.
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
The identification data for the auxiliary switches are completed by the timing charts which show the switching
position of the individual auxiliary contacts in the course of switching the main interrupter on or off. This does
not contain time data. The time data are provided in the routine test records.
Timing charts [ 7.22]
Order documentation
Pos : 3.5.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-29
Technical Data
r
Pos : 3.5.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1 M otor für LS 010 @ 0\mod_1329829093376_18.doc x @ 1724 @ 3 @ 1
1.2.1
Motor drive for circuit-breaker
The motor drive for the circuit-breaker is an AC or DC motor excited via field winding. It drives the gear to
tension the closing spring. The motor drive can be operated by hand if its supply fails (manual operation).
Pos : 3.5.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1.1 M otor für LS 020 - 8DN 8 Gleic hstr om G T abelle @ 1\mod_1333445497488_18.doc x @ 13400 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.1.1
DC motor with common drive (G)
Rated motor voltage
V (DC)
48
110
220
permissible voltage deviation IEC
%
Max. load current
A
11.5
5.5
3.0
Starting current (±10%)
A
22.0
18.0
12.0
V (DC)
48
110
220
-15 ... +10
Pos : 3.5.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1.1 M otor für LS 030 - 8DN 8 Gleic hstr om E T abelle @ 1\mod_1333446161251_18.doc x @ 13410 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.1.2
DC motor with single pole drive (E)
Rated motor voltage
permissible voltage deviation IEC
%
Max. load current
A
14.0
6.5
3.5
Starting current (±10%)
A
21.5
17.5
10.0
-15 ... +10
Pos : 3.5.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1.1 M otor für LS 040 - 8DN 8 Wec hsels trom 50 HZ G T abell e @ 1\mod_1333446900053_18.doc x @ 13421 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.1.3
AC motor 50 Hz with common drive (G)
Rated motor voltage
V (AC)
120
127
133
220
230
240
Permissible voltage deviation
%
Max. load current
A
11.0
11.0
13.0
6.0
7.0
6.0
Starting current (±10%)
A
30.0
37.0
39.0
21.0
22.0
22.0
120
127
133
220
230
240
-15 ... +10
Pos : 3.5.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1.1 M otor für LS 050 - 8DN 8 Wec hsels trom 50 HZ E T abell e @ 1\mod_1333448331834_18.doc x @ 13443 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.1.4
AC motor 50 Hz with single pole drive (E)
Rated motor voltage
V (AC)
Permissible voltage deviation
%
Max. load current
A
14.5
13.0
13.0
7.0
7.0
7.5
Starting current (±10%)
A
21.5
18.5
19.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
Pos : 3.5.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-30
-15 ... +10
Technical Data
Pos : 3.5.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1.2 M otor für LS - 01 T ec hn Daten des Hilfssc halters - 8D N8, 8D Q1 6, 8DN9 6 Tabelle @ 0\mod_1329829103079_18.doc x @ 1744 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.1.5
Technical data for the auxiliary switch
One auxiliary switch per drive, mechanically driven. The available contacts are routed out; they are available
for the operator of the switchgear. See the circuit diagram / circuit documentation for details of the
connections and design.
Auxiliary switch type
3SV92
Rated voltage
- DC
- AC
V
V
250
240
Rated current
A
10
Contacts (freely assignable)
- NC contact
- NO contact
- Wipe contact
Switching capacity for control voltage and
time constant T = 20 ms
- Inductive load
- Ohmic load
Alternating current 40 to 60 HZ / 250 V
8
8
1
V
(DC)
48
60
110
125
220
250
A
A
9
10
7
9
4
5
3.5
5
2
2.5
2
2.5
W
2200
Pos : 3.5.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-31
Technical Data
r
Pos : 3.5.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.1 Motor antrieb für Leis tungssc halter/1.2.1.2 Motor für LS - T ec hn Daten Auslös er 010 - 8DN 8, 8DN9 2 @ 0\mod_1329908854262_18.doc x @ 2153 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.1.6
Opening and closing releases
The CLOSE and OPEN releases of the spring-stored-energy mechanism are of electromagnetic design.
For data concerning the version supplied and the relevant tolerances, see the schematics.
Pos : 3.5.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.1 Motor antrieb für Leis tungssc halter/1.2.1.2 Motor für LS - T ec hn Daten Auslös er 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Gemein G Tabelle @ 0\mod_1329829108766_18.doc x @ 1759 @ @ 1
Version common drive (G)
Design Type
Normal release CLOSE
(type A)
Fast release CLOSE
(type A)
Normal release OPEN
(type A)
Fast release OPEN
(type A)
Pos : 3.5.13 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-32
Rated Voltage (V)
Coil rating (W)
48
227
110
242
125
312
220
225
250
291
48
2306
110
1533
125
1488
220
1274
250
1645
48
227
110
242
125
313
220
225
250
291
48
2306
110
1533
125
1488
220
1274
250
1645
Technical Data
Pos : 3.5.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.1 Motor antrieb für Leis tungssc halter/1.2.1.2 Motor für LS - T ec hn Daten Auslös er 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 _Einzel pol. E Tabelle @ 4\mod_1337174431335_18.doc x @ 18170 @ @ 1
Version with single pole drive (E)
Design type
Normal release CLOSE
(type A)
Fast release CLOSE
(type A)
Normal release OPEN
(type B)
Tolerance control voltage:
Rated voltage (V)
Coil rating (W)
48
227
110
242
125
312
220
225
250
291
48
2306
110
1533
125
1488
220
1274
250
1645
48
186
110
204
125
211
220
202
250
211
-15 % to +10 %
Functioning range of releases IEC / VDE:
CLOSE release:
-15 % to +10 %
OPEN release:
-30 % to +10 %
Pos : 3.5.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-33
Technical Data
r
Pos : 3.5.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.2 Motor antrieb für Ar beitser dungssc halter, Trenn und Erdungss /1.2.2 M otor für Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter 8DN 8 (Dr eistellungs antrieb)1.2.2 M otor für Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter - 8DN8 @ 0\mod_1329915412017_18.doc x @ 2178 @ 3 @ 1
1.2.2
Motor drive for disconnector and earthing switch module
The motor drive for the disconnector and earthing switch module (three position switches device) is a
permanently magnetic excited DC motor. It drives the gear, which is a combination of planetary and spur
gearing. Output is achieved with gate leading for 3 switch positions. It locks itself automatically in every
position.
The motor drive can be operated by hand if its supply fails (manual operation).
Pos : 3.5.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.2 Motor antrieb für Ar beitser dungssc halter, Trenn und Erdungss /1.2.2 M otor für Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter 8DN 8 (Dr eistellungs antrieb)1.2.2.1 T abell e für Tr enn- und Erdungss ch. -Techn Daten des Antriebes - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 0\mod_1329829116219_18.doc x @ 1774 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.2.1
Technical data for the operating mechanism
Motor rated voltage
V
(DC)
48
110
125
220
250
Permissible deviation
%
Max. load current
A
≤ 13.0
≤ 3.2
≤ 3.2
≤ 1.8
≤ 1.8
Starting current
A
≤ 28
≤ 7.4
≤ 7.4
≤ 4.5
≤ 4.5
-15 ... +10 -15 ... +10 -28 ... +12 -15 ... +10 -28 ... +12
Gear transmission
243 : 1
Rated motor output
W
≤ 120
Rated torque (drive)
Nm
100
W
30 ... 40
mm²
1.5
Short-circuit protection:
(See Order Documentation)
Heater rating anti-condensation heating
Internal supply cables (multi-cable)
Protection rating interior space / open air
Weight approx.
IP 43 / 55
kg
20
Pos : 3.5.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.2 Motor antrieb für Ar beitser dungssc halter, Trenn und Erdungss /1.2.2 M otor für Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter 8DN 8 (Dr eistellungs antrieb)1.2.3.1 T abell e für Tr enn- und Erdungss ch. - T echn D aten d Hilfssc halters 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 4\mod_1338470887619_18.doc x @ 19000 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.2.2
Technical data for the auxiliary switch
Auxiliary switch type
3SV92
Rated voltage
- DC
- AC
V
V
250
240
Rated current
A
10
Contacts (freely assignable)
- NC contact
- NO contact
- NC contact, late break
- NO contact, early make
Switching capacity for control voltage and time
constant T = 20 ms
- Inductive load
- Ohmic load
Pos : 3.5.19 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-34
7
7
1
1
V
(DC)
48
110
125
220
250
A
A
9
10
4
5
3.52
5
2
2.5
2
2.5
Technical Data
Pos : 3.5.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.3 Motor für Arbeits- und Sc hnell erdungssc halter 8DN 8 (Z weistellungsantrieb)/1.2.3 M otor antr für Arbeits, Sc hneller dgssc h. 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 0\mod_1329915756595_18.doc x @ 2183 @ 3 @ 1
1.2.3
Motor drive for work-in-progress and high-speed earthing switches
The motor drive for the earthing for work and high-speed earthing switch is an electrically actuated drive for
two rotational directions for closing and opening earthing switches. It is self-locking in every position.
The motor drive can be operated by hand if its supply fails (manual operation).
Pos : 3.5.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.3 Motor für Arbeits- und Sc hnell erdungssc halter 8DN 8 (Z weistellungsantrieb)/1.2.3 M otor antr für Arbeits, Sc hneller dgssc h. 020 - 8DN 8 5 T abell e Antri eb @ 0\mod_1329916160298_18.doc x @ 2192 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.3.1
Technical data for the operating mechanism
Motor rated voltage
V
(DC)
48
110
125
220
250
Permissible deviation
%
Max. load current - Work-in-progress
earthing switch
A
≤ 2.1
≤ 2.1
≤ 2.2
≤ 1.2
≤ 1.2
Starting current - Work-in-progress
earthing switch
A
≤ 10.0
≤ 7.0
≤8
≤ 4.5
≤ 4.5
Max. load current - High-speed earthing
switch
A
≤ 5.0
≤ 4.4
≤ 4.4
≤ 2.8
≤ 2.8
Starting current - High-speed earthing
switch
A
< 16
≤9
≤9
≤5
≤5
-15 ... +10 -15 ... +10 -28 ... +12 -15 ... +10 -28 ... +12
Transformation ratio
867 : 1
Rated motor output
W
200
Rated torque (drive)
Nm
225
W
30 ... 52
mm²
1.5
Short-circuit protection:
(See Order Documentation)
Heater rating anti-condensation heating
Internal supply cables (multi-cable)
Degree of protection indoor / outdoor
Weight approx.
IP 43 / 55
kg
5.5
Pos : 3.5.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.3 Motor für Arbeits- und Sc hnell erdungssc halter 8DN 8 (Z weistellungsantrieb)/1.2.3 M otor antr für Arbeits, Sc hneller dgssc h. 030 - 8DN 8 5 T abell e Hilfssc halter @ 33\mod_1470137987377_18.doc x @ 340066 @ 4 @ 1
1.2.3.2
Technical data for the auxiliary switch
Auxiliary switch type
3SV92
Rated voltage
- DC
- AC
V
V
250
240
Rated current
A
10
Contacts (freely assignable)
- NC contact
- NO contact
- NC contact, late break
- NO contact, early make
Switching capacity for control voltage and time
constant T = 20ms
- inductive load
- ohmic load
7
7
1
1
V (DC)
48
110
125
220
250
A
A
9
10
4
5
3.52
5
2
2.5
2
2.5
Pos : 3.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
1-35
r
Pos : 3.7.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüber wac hung/1.3 Gas über wac hung - Übersc hrift @ 0\mod_1329829122516_18.doc x @ 1789 @ 2 @ 1
1-36
Technical Data
Technical Data
1.3
Gas monitoring
Pos : 3.7.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüber wac hung/1.3 Gas über wac hung 00 - T ext @ 24\mod_1391417456849_18.doc x @ 227581 @ @ 1
In this section
- the terms used are explained in the context in which they are used and
- the gas pressures and the operating values for the gas monitoring system are illustrated.
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Nameplates [ 1.4]
All pressure values stated in this section and elsewhere are gauge values, unless special reference
to absolute pressure is made.
Special gas monitoring drawings are produced for every switchgear installation supplied. These contain
details (for each gas compartment) on
-
the volume of the gas compartment,
the gas filling pressure referred to an ambient temperature of + 20 °C,
the gas weight (in kg),
the operating pressure of the rupture disk,
the operating values for the gas monitoring system.
Pos : 3.7.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-37
r
Technical Data
Pos : 3.7.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüber wac hung/1.3.1 Begriffe @ 0\mod_1329829124688_18.doc x @ 1794 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.1
Terms
The pressure-temperature diagram shows in context the gas pressure values used in the following tables.
Pos : 3.7.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüber wac hung/1.3.1 Begriffe - Bild @ 5\mod_1343796740902_0.doc x @ 35408 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.7.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüber wac hung/1.3.1 Begriffe - Bildu @ 5\mod_1343796699700_18.doc x @ 35384 @ @ 1
1
2
A
B
C
D
E
P
T
T min
T max
ΔT max
Fig. 1-2
max. service density (= filling density)
min. service density
filling pressure at +20°C
min. operating pressure at +20°C
(Dielectric test pressure)
max. operating pressure
Operating pressure range at +20°C
Service pressure range at permissible ambient temperature range
Pressure
Temperature
min. permissible ambient temperature
max. permissible ambient temperature
temperature increase in operation (increased temperature added to existing ambient
temperature)
SF6 Data – terms
Pos : 3.7.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-38
Technical Data
Pos : 3.7.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüber wac hung/1.3.2 Gas drüc ke und Ans prec hwerte @ 0\mod_1329829132204_18.doc x @ 1809 @ 3 @ 1
1.3.2
Gas pressures and operating values
Pos : 3.7.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüber wac hung/1.3.2.1 Gas drüc ke und Ans prec hw. LS - Standard Tabell e (4 Bm- Spanng) z.B. 8DN 8 5 @ 0\mod_1329829135938_18.doc x @ 1819 @ 4 @ 1
1.3.2.1
Gas pressures and the operating values of the circuit-breaker
Rated voltage
kV
Rated filling pressure at +20°C without Iprim
kPa
560
kg/m³
43.0
kPa
500
kg/m³
38.8
Max. service pressure
at +40°C + 40 K current temperature increase
(Iprim = max.; T = 80°C) and rated operating density
kPa
720
Operating pressure range at +20°C:
from min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 60°C)
kPa
500 ... 670
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:
from -5°C
from min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to +40°C
at rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
kPa
440 ... 720
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:
from -25°C
at min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to +40°C
at rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
kPa
390 ... 720
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:
from -30°C
at min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to +40°C
at rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
kPa
380 ... 720
Alarms / Danger alarms
"SF6 loss"
"General lockout SF6"
kPa
kPa
520
500
Structural pressure
kPa
800
Rupture disk operating pressure
kPa
940...1040
Rated operating density in the entire temperature
range
Min. operating pressure at +20°C without Iprim
Min. operating density in the entire temperature range
72.5
100
123
145
Pos : 3.7.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-39
Technical Data
r
Pos : 3.7.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.3 Gas über wac hung/1.3.2.2 Gas drüc ke und Anspr ec hw. Anlage (Text ohne Spwdl) - Standard Tab ( 4Bm- Spanng) z.B. 8DN 8 5 @ 0\mod_1329919307782_18.doc x @ 2222 @ 4 @ 1
1.3.2.2
Gas pressures and operating values of the system (without voltage transformer)
Rated voltage
kV
Rated filling pressure at +20°C without Iprim
kPa
450
kg/m³
35.3
kPa
400
kg/m³
31.9
Max. service pressure
at +40°C+ 40 K current temperature increase
(Iprim = max.; T = 80°C) and rated operating density
kPa
580
Operating pressure range at +20°C:
from min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 60°C)
kPa
400...540
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:
from -5°C
from min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to +40°C
at rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
kPa
350...580
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:
from -25°C
at min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to +40°C
at rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
kPa
310...580
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:
from -30°C
at min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to +40°C
at rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
kPa
300...580
Alarms / Danger alarms
*
"SF6-pressure rising" )
"SF6-loss"
"Min. Operating density SF6"
kPa
kPa
kPa
520
420
400
Structural pressure
kPa
600
Rupture disk operating pressure
kPa
845...935
Rated operating density in the entire temperature
range
Min. operating pressure at +20°Cwithout Iprim
Min. operating density in the entire temperature range
72.5
100
123
145
*) only for gas compartments into which SF6 can flow as a result of higher pressure in a neighbouring gas
compartment
Pos : 3.7.12 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-40
Technical Data
Pos : 3.7.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.3 Gas über wac hung/1.3.2.4 Gas drüc ke und Anspr ec hw. Spannungswandl er - Standar d T abell e (4 Bm-Spanng) z.B. 8DN 8 5 @ 0\mod_1329989757950_18.doc x @ 2245 @ 4 @ 1
1.3.2.3
Gas pressures and the operating values of the voltage transformer
Rated voltage
kV
Rated filling pressure at +20°C without Iprim
kPa
560
kg/m³
43.0
kPa
500
kg/m³
38.8
Max. service pressure
at +40°C + 40 K current temperature increase
(Iprim = max.; T = 80°C) and rated operating density
kPa
720
Operating pressure range at +20°C:
from min. operating density and Iprim= 0 A
to rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 60°C)
kPa
500 ... 670
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:
from -5°C
from min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to +40°C
at rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
kPa
440 ... 720
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:
from -25°C
at min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to +40 °C
at rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
kPa
390 ... 720
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:
from -30°C
at min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A
to +40°C
at rated filling density and + 40 K current temperature
increase (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
kPa
380 ... 720
Alarms / Danger alarms
"SF6 loss”
"Min. SF6 density"
kPa
kPa
520
500
Design pressure
kPa
800
Rupture disk operating pressure
kPa
940 ... 1040
Rated operating density in the entire temperature
range
Min. operating pressure at +20°C without Iprim
Min. operating density in the entire temperature range
72.5
100
123
145
Pos : 3.7.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-41
r
Pos : 3.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
1-42
Technical Data
Technical Data
Pos : 3.9.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 010 @ 0\mod_1329829185189_18.doc x @ 1929 @ 2 @ 1
1.4
Nameplates
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Motor drives [ 1.2]
Gas monitoring [ 1.3]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Pos : 3.9.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 015 - 8DN8 @ 14\mod_1353675892473_18.doc x @ 82775 @ @ 1
Each bay of the switchgear has its own rating plate. It is fixed outside the drive and control cabinet. Other
rating plates are attached to the outside of the housings of current and voltage transformers.
The works serial number (under "year of manufacture/ no."), the weight of the gas filling and the weight with
gas filling given on the rating plate apply to the entire bay.
A plate with information for gas monitoring is located inside the drive and control cabinet or on a separate
plate holder on the busbar.
Pos : 3.9.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-43
r
Pos : 3.9.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 020 - Bild1 Leis tungssc hild eines Fel des @ 5\mod_1343737511239_0.doc x @ 35260 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.9.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 020 - Bildu Leis tungssc hild eines Fel des @ 0\mod_1329835484392_18.doc x @ 2065 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-3
Nameplate of a bay with circuit-breaker (example)
Pos : 3.9.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-44
Technical Data
Technical Data
Pos : 3.9.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 030 - Bild Leistungssc hild ei nes Stromwandl ers @ 5\mod_1343798027484_0.doc x @ 35432 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.9.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 030 - Bildu Leis tungssc hild eines Str omwandlers @ 0\mod_1329829193907_18.doc x @ 1944 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Manufacturer
Year of manufacture 20. . / Serial No.
Rated thermal short-time current
Rated dynamic short-time current
Type designation
Insulation level
Rated frequency
Measuring range (additional details for special orders)
Secondary terminal markings
Accuracy class and overcurrent factor
Rated power
Transformation ratio
(Data for) Core No. 1
IEC regulations for current transformers
Module No.
Fig. 1-4
Nameplate of a current transformer (example)
Pos : 3.9.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 040 - Bild Leistungssc hild ei nes Spannungs wandlers @ 5\mod_1343798099515_0.doc x @ 35456 @ @ 1
1-45
r
Pos : 3.9.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder/1.4 Leistungsschil der 040 - Bil du Leistungsschil d eines Spannungswandl ers @ 0\mod_1329829197986_18.doc x @ 1954 @ @ 1
1
2
3
after weighting
Serial no.
Year of manufacture
Fig. 1-5
Nameplate of a voltage transformer (example)
Pos : 3.9.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder/1.4 Leistungsschil der 050 - Bil d Leis tungssc hild eines RC-Teilers @ 5\mod_1343798154390_0.doc x @ 35480 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.9.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder/1.4 Leistungsschil der 050 - Bil du Leistungsschil d eines RC-T eilers @ 1\mod_1333538095261_18.doc x @ 13504 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Serial no.
Year of manufacture
after weighting
Fig. 1-6
Nameplate for a RC divider (example)
Pos : 3.9.13 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
1-46
Technical Data
Technical Data
Pos : 3.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.11.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte von Anl agenbaus tei nen1.5 Ü bersc hrift: M aße + Gewic hte @ 0\mod_1329829199798_18.doc x @ 1959 @ 2 @ 1
1.5
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules
During the assembly of the switchgear as well as in the context of the maintenance modules must be
transported, put down and/or placed on supports. This section contains the required dimensions and
weights.
The weight information applies to the 3-pole version (as long as a single-pole version has not been specified
in the legend) and without SF6 filling.
Model-related deviations are possible.
For the measurements and weights of the shipping units, see the consignment notes.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Receipt and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Pos : 3.11.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte von Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DN 8 5/1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 010 - Bil d Leis tstungsschalter Gemei nsc hafts antrieb @ 5\mod_1343803646464_0.doc x @ 36104 @ @ 1
1522
2505
790
Pos : 3.11.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte von Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DN 8 5/1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 010 - Bil du @ 0\mod_1329994073131_18.doc x @ 2275 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-7
Circuit breaker with shared drive, 1.050 kg
Pos : 3.11.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte von Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DN 8 5/1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 020 - Bil d Leis tungssc hal ter Einzel pol antrieb @ 5\mod_1343803706840_0.doc x @ 36128 @ @ 1
1435
2505
1186
Pos : 3.11.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte von Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DN 8 5/1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 020 - Bil du @ 0\mod_1329994379194_18.doc x @ 2284 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-8
Circuit breaker with single pole drive, 1.300 kg
Pos : 3.11.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte von Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DN 8 5/1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 030 - Bil d Y-Baus tei n @ 5\mod_1343803769826_0.doc x @ 36152 @ @ 1
1-47
Technical Data
r
1565
730
Pos : 3.11.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte von Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DN 8 5/1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 030 - Bil du @ 0\mod_1329999560717_18.doc x @ 2299 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-9
Y component, 260 kg
Pos : 3.11.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte von Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DN 8 5/1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 040 - Bil d Kreuz baust, akti v @ 5\mod_1343803363931_0.doc x @ 36032 @ @ 1
718
730
935
Pos : 3.11.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte von Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DN 8 5/1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 040 - Bil du @ 0\mod_1329999811314_18.doc x @ 2308 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-10
Active cross module, 370 kg
Pos : 3.11.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 050 - Bild Kr euzbaust, passi v @ 6\mod_1343993614326_0.doc x @ 40680 @ @ 1
800
730
935
Pos : 3.11.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 050 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1330000032488_18.doc x @ 2318 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-11
Passive cross module, 275 kg
Pos : 3.11.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 060 - Bild Er dungssc hal ter @ 5\mod_1343800052690_0.doc x @ 35744 @ @ 1
675
574
588
Pos : 3.11.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 060 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1330000261755_18.doc x @ 2328 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-12
Earthing switch, 70 kg
Pos : 3.11.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 070 - Bild Stromwandler T yp 1 @ 5\mod_1343798710511_0.doc x @ 35600 @ @ 1
790
Pos : 3.11.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 070 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1330000810271_18.doc x @ 2348 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-13
Current transformer, 130 kg
in addition approx. 430 kg
Pos : 3.11.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 080 - Bild Stromwandler T yp 2 @ 5\mod_1343798759386_0.doc x @ 35624 @ @ 1
1-48
520
Technical Data
790
720
Pos : 3.11.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 080 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1330001009146_18.doc x @ 2358 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-14
Current transformer, 210 kg
in addition approx. 710 kg
Pos : 3.11.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 090 - Bild Stromwandler T yp 3 @ 5\mod_1343798812542_0.doc x @ 35648 @ @ 1
790
970
Pos : 3.11.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 090 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1330508195782_18.doc x @ 2553 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-15
Current transformer, 250 kg
in addition approx. 430 kg
Pos : 3.11.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 100 - Bild Stromwandler T yp 4 @ 5\mod_1343798861885_0.doc x @ 35672 @ @ 1
790
1170
Pos : 3.11.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 100 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1330508293628_18.doc x @ 2563 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-16
Current transformer, 330 kg
in addition approx. 710 kg
Pos : 3.11.22 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 102 - Bild Stromwandler T yp 5 @ 30\mod_1434092165549_0.doc x @ 282636 @ @ 1
790
970
Pos : 3.11.23 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 102 - Bildu @ 30\mod_1434092177000_18.doc x @ 282658 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-17
Current transformer, 675 kg
Pos : 3.11.24 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 103 - Bild Stromwandler T yp 6 @ 29\mod_1424093472436_0.doc x @ 273213 @ @ 1
790
1170
Pos : 3.11.25 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 103 - Bildu @ 29\mod_1424093473029_18.doc x @ 273235 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-18
Current transformer, 980 kg
Pos : 3.11.26 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 110 - Bild Spannungs wandler T yp 1 @ 5\mod_1343803877577_0.doc x @ 36176 @ @ 1
1-49
Technical Data
r
913
790
Pos : 3.11.27 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 110 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1330511114687_18.doc x @ 2573 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-19
Voltage transformer, 500 kg
Pos : 3.11.28 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 120 - Bild Spannungs wandler T yp 2 mit H andantrieb @ 5\mod_1343803933327_0.doc x @ 36200 @ @ 1
1212
790
Pos : 3.11.29 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 120 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1330511295499_18.doc x @ 2583 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-20
Voltage transformer with isolating distances and manual operation, 650 kg
Pos : 3.11.30 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 51.5 M aße + Gewic hte 130 - Bild Spannungs wandler T yp 3 @ 33\mod_1467641416001_0.doc x @ 337330 @ @ 1
1453
790
Pos : 3.11.31 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 51.5 M aße + Gewic hte 130 - Bildu @ 33\mod_1467641427904_18.doc x @ 337353 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-21
Voltage transformer with insulating distance and motor drive, 700 kg
Pos : 3.11.32 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 135 - Bild RC-Spannungsteiler @ 27\mod_1401888360718_0.doc x @ 246386 @ @ 1
770
564
Pos : 3.11.33 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 135 - Bildu @ 27\mod_1401888361670_18.doc x @ 246406 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-22
RC-voltage divider, 197 kg
Pos : 3.11.34 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 140 - Bild Kabel anschl uss-Baustein T yp 1 @ 5\mod_1343803081112_0.doc x @ 35936 @ @ 1
1416
778
Pos : 3.11.35 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 140 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1330511554202_18.doc x @ 2593 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-23
Cable connection module, 420 – 445 kg
Pos : 3.11.36 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 150 - Bild Kabel anschl uss-Baustein T yp 2 @ 5\mod_1343803132250_0.doc x @ 35960 @ @ 1
1-50
1070
Technical Data
650
790
Pos : 3.11.37 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 150 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331646832868_18.doc x @ 4727 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-24
Cable connection module, 250 kg
Pos : 3.11.38 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 160 - Bild Kabel anschl uss-Baustein T yp 3 @ 5\mod_1343803221496_0.doc x @ 35984 @ @ 1
879
1360
789
Pos : 3.11.39 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 160 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331649890535_18.doc x @ 4737 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-25
Cable connection module, 390 kg
Pos : 3.11.40 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 170 - Bild Kabeltr enneransc hl-Bst lang @ 5\mod_1343803283532_0.doc x @ 36008 @ @ 1
1070
1415
780
Pos : 3.11.41 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 170 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331649911036_18.doc x @ 4747 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-26
Cable disconnector, 470 – 495 kg
Pos : 3.11.42 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 171 - Bild Kabeltr enneransc hl-Bst kurz @ 28\mod_1414046461803_0.doc x @ 256200 @ @ 1
1070
1130
780
Pos : 3.11.43 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 171 - Bildu @ 28\mod_1414046573470_18.doc x @ 256240 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-27
Cable disconnector, 390 kg
1-51
Technical Data
r
Pos : 3.11.44 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 172 - Bild Kabeltr enneransc hl-Bst T yp 1 MCP @ 28\mod_1418980946531_0.doc x @ 270368 @ @ 1
1070
1223
720
Pos : 3.11.45 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 172 - Bildu @ 28\mod_1418980876671_18.doc x @ 270346 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-28
Cable disconnector, 400 kg
Pos : 3.11.46 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 180 - Bild Endbaustein T yp1 s epar ater Gasraum @ 5\mod_1343799064399_0.doc x @ 35696 @ @ 1
387
565
Pos : 3.11.47 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 180 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650449482_18.doc x @ 4837 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-29
End module, 85 kg
Pos : 3.11.48 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 190 - Bild Endbaustein T yp2 g emei nsamer Gasr aum @ 5\mod_1343799124618_0.doc x @ 35720 @ @ 1
564
143
Pos : 3.11.49 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 190 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650467670_18.doc x @ 4847 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-30
End module, 20 kg
Pos : 3.11.50 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 200 - Bild Li nk für Ausbauz wec ke T yp 1 @ 5\mod_1343803589604_0.doc x @ 36080 @ @ 1
562
240
Pos : 3.11.51 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 200 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650487936_18.doc x @ 4857 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-31
Link for expansion purposes, 26 kg
Pos : 3.11.52 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 201 - Bild Li nk für Ausbauz wec ke T yp 2 @ 32\mod_1462801075915_0.doc x @ 331854 @ @ 1
564
564
Pos : 3.11.53 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 201 - Bildu @ 32\mod_1462801076305_18.doc x @ 331877 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-32
Link for expansion purposes, 35 kg
Pos : 3.11.54 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen 210 - 8DN8 5 Bil d Sammelschi enenverl T yp1/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 210 - Bild Sammelsc hi enenverl T yp1/2 @ 5\mod_1343804112905_0.doc x @ 36248 @ @ 1
564
Pos : 3.11.55 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen 210 - 8DN8 5 Bil du Sammelsc hienenverl T yp1/1.5 Maße + Gewichte 210 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650505874_18.doc x @ 4867 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-33
Busbar extension, 80 – 110 kg
Pos : 3.11.56 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen 220 - 8DN8 5 Bil d Sammelschi enenverl T yp 3/1.5 Maß e + Gewi chte 220 - Bild Sammelsc hienenverl T yp 3/4 @ 5\mod_1343804159686_0.doc x @ 36272 @ @ 1
1-52
370 – 470
Technical Data
564
470 – 570
Pos : 3.11.57 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen 220 - 8DN8 5 Bil du Sammelsc hienenverl T yp 3/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 220 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650524702_18.doc x @ 4877 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-34
Busbar extension, 110 – 130 kg
Pos : 3.11.58 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 221 - Bild Sammel schi enenverl T yp 3 MCP @ 28\mod_1421743290331_0.doc x @ 271585 @ @ 1
580
470
564
500
564
600
Pos : 3.11.59 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 221 - Bildu @ 28\mod_1421743309476_18.doc x @ 271607 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-35
Busbar extension, 110 kg
Pos : 3.11.60 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen 230 - 8DN8 5 Bil d Sammelschi enenverl T yp 5/1.5 Maß e + Gewi chte 230 - Bild Sammelsc hienenverl T yp 5 @ 5\mod_1343809059258_0.doc x @ 36470 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.11.61 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen 230 - 8DN8 5 Bil du Sammelsc hienenverl T yp 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 230 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650548218_18.doc x @ 4887 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-36
Busbar extension, 180 – 200 kg
Pos : 3.11.62 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 231 - Bild Sammel schi enenverl T yp 6 @ 31\mod_1441095386417_0.doc x @ 290765 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.11.63 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 231 - Bildu @ 31\mod_1441095162265_18.doc x @ 290744 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-37
Busbar extension module, 200 kg
Pos : 3.11.64 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 232 - Bild Sammel schi enenverl T yp 7 @ 28\mod_1413972801275_0.doc x @ 256045 @ @ 1
564
410
Pos : 3.11.65 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 232 - Bildu @ 28\mod_1413972864784_18.doc x @ 256065 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-38
Extension component, 100 kg
Pos : 3.11.66 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 240 - Bild Verlänger ungs baustein T yp 1 @ 5\mod_1343804212154_0.doc x @ 36296 @ @ 1
564
400 – 2000
Pos : 3.11.67 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 240 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650740141_18.doc x @ 4897 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-39
Extension component, 45 – 126 kg
optionally with bushing, 50 kg
Pos : 3.11.68 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 241 - Bild Verlänger ungs baustein T yp2 @ 5\mod_1343804265419_0.doc x @ 36320 @ @ 1
1-53
Technical Data
r
900 – 7000
564
Pos : 3.11.69 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 241 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650759704_18.doc x @ 4907 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-40
Extension component, 45 – 475 kg
optionally with bushing, 50 kg
Pos : 3.11.70 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 260 - Bild Winkelbaustein @ 5\mod_1343804339705_0.doc x @ 36344 @ @ 1
566
648
716
Pos : 3.11.71 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 260 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331651153316_18.doc x @ 4917 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-41
Angle module, 117 kg
Pos : 3.11.72 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 271 - Bild Axi al kompensator T yp 1 @ 32\mod_1455694019758_0.doc x @ 325502 @ @ 1
740
470
Pos : 3.11.73 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 271 - Bildu @ 32\mod_1455694129658_18.doc x @ 325525 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-42
Axial expansion joint, 120 kg
Pos : 3.11.74 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 51.5 M aße + Gewic hte 272 - Bild Axi al kompens ator T yp 2 @ 31\mod_1441799703772_0.doc x @ 292048 @ @ 1
740
700
Pos : 3.11.75 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 272 - Bildu @ 31\mod_1441800431853_18.doc x @ 294294 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-43
Axial expansion joint, 265 kg
Pos : 3.11.76 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 275 - Bild Axi al kompensator T yp 5 @ 30\mod_1434092332018_0.doc x @ 282680 @ @ 1
740
470
Pos : 3.11.77 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 275 - Bildu @ 30\mod_1434092350302_18.doc x @ 282702 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-44
Lateral expansion joint, 294 kg
Pos : 3.11.78 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 280 - Bild Lateral kompens ator @ 5\mod_1343803512492_0.doc x @ 36056 @ @ 1
564
Pos : 3.11.79 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 280 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331649930349_18.doc x @ 4757 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-45
Lateral expansion joint, 270 kg
Pos : 3.11.80 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 281 - Bild Lateral kompens ator T yp 1 MCP @ 29\mod_1424335252476_0.doc x @ 273409 @ @ 1
1-54
1000
Technical Data
730
470
Pos : 3.11.81 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 281 - Bildu @ 29\mod_1424335313925_18.doc x @ 273431 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-46
Lateral expansion joint, 75 kg
Pos : 3.11.82 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 290 - Bild Aufteil ungs baustei n T yp1 @ 5\mod_1343798337217_0.doc x @ 35504 @ @ 1
1382
787
619
Pos : 3.11.83 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 290 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331651194316_18.doc x @ 4937 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-47
Distributing module, 230 kg
Pos : 3.11.84 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 300 - Bild Aufteil ungs baustei n T yp2 @ 5\mod_1343798466841_0.doc x @ 35528 @ @ 1
605
1113
619
800
1113
Pos : 3.11.85 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 300 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331651220332_18.doc x @ 4947 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-48
Distributing module, 189 kg
790
Pos : 3.11.86 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 310 - Bild Aufteil ungs baustei n T yp3 @ 5\mod_1343798520919_0.doc x @ 35552 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.11.87 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 310 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331651246582_18.doc x @ 4957 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-49
Distributing module, 198 kg
Pos : 3.11.88 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 320 - Bild Aufteil ungs baustei n T yp4 @ 5\mod_1343798577356_0.doc x @ 35576 @ @ 1
740
892
1113
Pos : 3.11.89 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 320 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331651269598_18.doc x @ 4967 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-50
Distributing module, 212 kg
Pos : 3.11.90 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 330 - Bild Ablei ter @ 5\mod_1343804428430_0.doc x @ 36368 @ @ 1
1212
676
887
Pos : 3.11.91 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 330 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331651295473_18.doc x @ 4977 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-51
Arrester, 350 kg
1-55
Technical Data
r
Pos : 3.11.92 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 340 - Bild Freil uftdurchführung Porzell an @ 5\mod_1343800125440_0.doc x @ 35768 @ @ 1
1679 – 1889
360
Pos : 3.11.93 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 340 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331651323207_18.doc x @ 4987 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-52
Outdoor bushing porcelain, 130 – 140 kg
Pos : 3.11.94 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 350 - Bild Freil uftdurchführung Verbundi @ 5\mod_1343800199037_0.doc x @ 35792 @ @ 1
1608 – 1739
360
Pos : 3.11.95 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 350 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331651351707_18.doc x @ 4997 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-53
Outdoor bushing composite insulator, 49 – 130 kg
Pos : 3.11.96 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 360 - Bild Übergangsbaustein 8DN 8 5 auf 8DN8 2/3 @ 5\mod_1343804485622_0.doc x @ 36392 @ @ 1
636
470
710
410
Pos : 3.11.97 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 360 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331651372879_18.doc x @ 5007 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-54
Transition module, 160 kg
Pos : 3.11.98 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 365 - KD Bild Übergangsbaustei n auf 8DN8 6 @ 27\mod_1401882330989_0.doc x @ 246306 @ @ 1
Pos : 3.11.99 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte von Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DN8 5/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 365 - KD Bildu @ 27\mod_1401882331598_18.doc x @ 246326 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-55
Transition module, 121 kg
Pos : 3.11.100 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 370 - Bild IOS kl ein Freiluft @ 5\mod_1343801897001_0.doc x @ 35816 @ @ 1
987
1135
780
Pos : 3.11.101 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 370 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331649947474_18.doc x @ 4767 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-56
1-56
Integrated local control cabinet outdoor version, 141 kg
Technical Data
Pos : 3.11.102 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 380 - Bild IOS kl ein Innenr aum @ 5\mod_1343802013094_0.doc x @ 35840 @ @ 1
950
1108
766
Pos : 3.11.103 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 380 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331649969521_18.doc x @ 4777 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-57
Integrated local control cabinet indoor version, 127 kg
Pos : 3.11.104 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 390 - Bild IOS groß Freiluft @ 5\mod_1343802077501_0.doc x @ 35864 @ @ 1
780
1735
987
Pos : 3.11.105 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 390 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331649988741_18.doc x @ 4787 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-58
Integrated local control cabinet outdoor version, 194 kg
Pos : 3.11.106 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 400 - Bild IOS groß Innenr aum @ 5\mod_1343802127235_0.doc x @ 35888 @ @ 1
950
1708
766
Pos : 3.11.107 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 400 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650008788_18.doc x @ 4797 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-59
Integrated local control cabinet indoor version, 180 kg
Pos : 3.11.108 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 410 - Bild Wandl er klemmenkas ten @ 5\mod_1343802244055_0.doc x @ 35912 @ @ 1
160
1010
520
Pos : 3.11.109 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN/1 T ec hnische D aten/Module/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte von Anl agenbausteinen/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte 8DN 8 5/1.5 M aße + Gewic hte 410 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331650023913_18.doc x @ 4807 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-60
Current transformer terminal box, 18 kg
Pos : 3.11.110 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopier vorlag en / Sei tenumbrüche-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
1-57
r
Pos : 4.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2 Besc hreibung/2 Besc hrei bung ( mit Hi nweis) @ 0\mod_1330597799972_18.doc x @ 2637 @ 1 @ 1
1-58
Technical Data
Description
2 Description
2-59
r

2-60
Description
Note
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in part, from
the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track guiding, the
location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary equipment.
Description
Pos : 4.2.1 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.2.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Schaltanlage/2.1 Allgemeine M er kmal e der Sc hal tanlag e 8DN8 5 @ 1\mod_1333025427435_18.doc x @ 12887 @ 2 @ 1
2.1
General features of switchgear 8DN8
This section provides information about the general features of a type 8DN8 switchgear.
Information regarding the specific implementation of a customer order should be shown in the order
documentation.
Order documentation
Switchgear of type 8DN8 are metal-enclosed, gas-insulated switchgear units for operating voltages up to 145
kV. They consist of compactly constructed individual bays. They are set up free-standing, either outdoors or
indoors.
The modular system makes it possible to set up all the usual switchgear circuit configurations. Switchgear of
the type 8DN8 is used both for new build and also for extension or replacement of air-insulated open-air and
indoor switchgear.
Pos : 4.2.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 1 Anlag enbaus tei ne - 8DN8 5, 8D N8 6 @ 0\mod_1331901366955_18.doc x @ 9450 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.1
Switchgear modules
- Space requirements are clearly reduced, due to the compact configuration from 3-pole system modules
and extremely small component dimensions.
- The equipment is usually supplied in the form of a bay assembled on a triple-pole basis and works-tested.
This reduces the on-site erection costs to a minimum.
- The casing with the cover and the expansion joints together form the pressure-tight encapsulation of the
switchgear. – After the tests, the housings are sand-blasted and painted on the inside and outside. Each
housing is subjected to pressure and leakage testing with helium gas.
- The conductor paths are connected via coupling contacts; the connection points are accessible where
necessary via manways in the enclosures of the modules.
Pos : 4.2.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-61
r
Description
Pos : 4.2.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 2 Gas, Gasräume, Gasüber wac hung @ 0\mod_1331902161112_18.doc x @ 9471 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.2
Gas, gas compartments, gas monitoring
- SF6 as a gaseous insulating and quenching medium is present inside the enclosure in mutually
independent gas compartments.
- Filters in the gas compartments absorb moisture and decomposition products.
- The switch motor operating shafts are supported and provided with lip seals against overpressure and
vacuum loss, so that no air can penetrate during evacuation – before commissioning – and no SF6 gas
can escape during operation (the leakage rate for the switchgear is < 0.5% per year and gas
compartment).
- All gas compartments are fitted with rupture discs and, where necessary, diverters. The diverters are
arranged in such a way that the flow of gas is directed away from personnel and machinery if a rupture
disk fails.
- Decentralised monitoring of the gas compartments.
Monitoring of the outdoor and transformer outgoing leads is single-phase, the monitoring of the other gas
compartments is triple-phase.
Monitoring is carried out by means of density monitors.
In addition, the indicator of the pressure gauge monitor display allows a precise assessment of the filling
status of the gas compartments.
Pos : 4.2.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 3 Leistungsschalter - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 0\mod_1331902595076_18.doc x @ 9481 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.3
Circuit-breaker
- The circuit-breaker forms the basis for the bay structure. The switching system of the circuit-breaker is
activated by a spring-stored-energy mechanism.
- The gas flow required for arc-quenching is produced in the switching system by means of selfcompression. The mechanical energies released are only slight due to the low level of drive forces
required. This minimises the load on the circuit-breaker, the enclosure and the foundations.
- The contactor equipment is located in the drive and control cabinet.
- The position indicator of the circuit-breakers is connected to the drive system via a flexion wave.
- In the single pole drive, the position indicator is connected with the OPEN connecting rod.
Pos : 4.2.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 4 Sammelschi enenbausteine - 8DN 8, 8DN 9 2 @ 0\mod_1331904015868_18.doc x @ 9514 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.4
Busbar modules
- 3-pole enclosed busbars. A distribution into several gas compartments using airtight bushing is possible.
- Busbar modules of adjoining bays are coupled together by expansion joints which take up design
tolerances and thermal expansion at right angles to and along the bus run.
- Busbar modules conductors are linked by coupling contacts or flexible connectors which take up the
horizontal thermal expansion.
Pos : 4.2.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-62
Description
Pos : 4.2.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 5 Trenn- Ar beits- und Schnellerdungssch. - 8DN8 (inkl. Er dungssc halter) @ 0\mod_1331904370130_18.doc x @ 9536 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.5
Disconnector and earthing switch module, work-in-progress earthing switches and
high-speed earthing switches.
- The disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch module incorporates three-phase encapsulation.
It combines the functions of the disconnector and the work-in-progress earthing switch. The two functions
are mutually interlocked as a result of its design as a three-position unit with a common drive.
Disconnector and earthing switch modules can be installed as outgoing modules, busbar modules or as bustie switch-disconnectors and can be equipped with additional work-in-progress or high-speed earthing
switches.
- Motor drives of the same design are used for high-speed and work-in-progress earthing switches.
In the case of the high-speed earthing switch, a motor drive charges the spring-snap mechanism.
- The alarm switch and the ON/OFF indicator are connected directly and securely to the operating
mechanism shaft.
- All disconnector and earthing switch modules, work-in-progress earthing switches and high-speed
earthing switches can be operated manually.
- Optional windows allow monitoring of the switching position of disconnectors and earthing switches.
- Electromechanical contactors facilitate control and monitoring.
Pos : 4.2.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Sc haltanl age/2.1. 6 Str omwandler 8DN8 @ 0\mod_1332232038614_18.doc x @ 9560 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.6
Current transformer
- The current transformer is designed as an inductive current transformer. The secondary windings are
fixed on toroidal cores. Secondary windings may have several taps for adaptation to various primary
currents. All secondary leads are provided in the terminal box in form of crimp or clamp contacts.
- There are various cores for instrument duty, metering or protection purposes.
- The current transformer is triple-phase encapsulated.
- As a separate current transformer, it has a two-part enclosure.
- As a current transformer integrated in the circuit breaker, it is executed as a one-piece housing. It forms a
common gas chamber with the circuit breaker.
- The current transformer forms a common SF6 gas compartment for itself or with several adjacent
modules.
Pos : 4.2.11 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-63
r
Description
Pos : 4.2.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Sc haltanl age/2.1. 7 Spannungs wandler - 8DN 8 @ 0\mod_1332232431755_18.doc x @ 9581 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.7
Voltage transformer
- The voltage transformer is an inductive voltage transformer. It consists of an iron core, the single-step
primary winding with the relevant HV electrode and the HV terminal. Switchover to the various
transmission ratios of the voltage transformer takes place in the terminal box.
- The voltage transformer is of triple-phase design.
- It has its own enclosure sealed by a sealed bushing.
- Electrical disconnection from live parts of the switchgear can be achieved in the isolated state by
removing a conductor connection and then inserting shielding components. Disconnection can also be
achieved using an isolator with a manual or motor drive.
Pos : 4.2.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Sc haltanl age/2.1. 8 RC- Spannungsteil er - 8DN8 @ 0\mod_1332232720177_18.doc x @ 9592 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.8
RC voltage divider
- RC dividers reduce the operating voltage of the switchgear corresponding with the divider voltage to
values which are suitable for measuring instruments and protective devices connected. RC dividers
provide this output value with a high precision to the overriding system as an analogue signal.
- The power output is low, but is more than sufficient for the requirements of modern protection and energy
counting systems.
- The divider ratio varies according to the different requirements of the connectible systems.
- RC dividers are each three-pole-encapsulated and form a gas compartment with the adjacent module.
Pos : 4.2.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Sc haltanl age/2.1. 9 Ableiter - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 0\mod_1332232818803_18.doc x @ 9603 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.9
Arresters
- To limit the occurring of overvoltages, a surge arrester can be connected upon request to limit the
occurrence of overvoltages.
- The active part of the encapsulated surge arrester is made of metal oxide discharge resistors. Upon
occurrence of a surge, they become conducting and thus limit the surge voltage to a value that does not
endanger the insulation of the switchgear.
- The surge arrester is in triple-pole design.
- It has its own enclosure sealed by a sealed bushing.
- Connections for equipment to monitor the arrester.
Pos : 4.2.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Sc haltanl age/2.1.10 Kabel anschl uss-Baustein - 8DN 8 @ 0\mod_1332233098563_18.doc x @ 9614 @ 3 @ 1
2-64
Description
2.1.10 Cable connection module
- The cable connection module allows the connection of all standard-type high-voltage cables with
conventional or plug-in cable fasteners. For the purpose of high-voltage testing, the primary conductor
connection can be removed between the cable sealing end and the adjacent outgoing module.
- The cable connection module is of triple-phase design.
- A multi-conductor cable can be connected if the cable connection modules are arranged accordingly.
Pos : 4.2.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Sc haltanl age/2.1.11 Kabeltr enner-Baus tei n - 8DN8 5 @ 31\mod_1441353994453_18.doc x @ 291607 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.11 Cable disconnection module
The cable disconnection module combines the function of a cable terminal, the outgoing feeder disconnector
and, where applicable, the earthing switch in a three-phase encapsulated gas compartment.
- The cable terminal can be used to connect all types of standard high-voltage cables with conventional or
pluggable connectors. The primary conductor connection between the cable end closing bush and the
outgoing feeder disconnector can be detached to perform high-voltage testing.
- The cable terminal is of three-phase design.
- Multiple cables can be connected with a corresponding configuration of the cable disconnection modules.
- The disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch module is designed as a three-position device
with a common drive. Both functions are always mutually interlocked.
- Signal switches and position indicators are mechanically safe and connected directly with the drive shaft.
- The disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch module can also be switched manually for a
temporary period.
- As an option, the position of the disconnector and earthing switches can also be monitored through sight
glasses.
- Control and monitoring is performed via electromechanical contactors.
Pos : 4.2.17 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.2.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Sc haltanl age/2.1.12 Ei npolige Ausleitung - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 4\mod_1338367500447_18.doc x @ 18250 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.12 Single-pole output line
- The transition module enables the transition to single-pole output lines, e.g. to connect transformers.
Pos : 4.2.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Sc haltanl age/2.1.12 Freil eitungsansc hl uss-Baustein - 8DN 8 @ 0\mod_1332235370768_18.doc x @ 9625 @ 3 @ 1
2.1.13 Overhead line connection module
- The overhead line connection module makes it possible to effect transfer to overhead lines, outdoor
bushings of outdoor transformers or inductance coils and to outdoor sealing ends of high-voltage cables.
- The splaying of the connection points of the three phases to the required air gap for conductor insulation
is achieved with the use of a distributing module.
Pos : 4.2.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Mer kmale der Sc haltanl age/2.1.14 Ortssteuersc hrank - 8DN 8 @ 0\mod_1332235810191_18.doc x @ 9636 @ 3 @ 1
2-65
r
Description
2.1.14 Local control cabinet
The integrated local control cabinet contains all the equipment necessary to control and monitor the
switchgear bay. The following characteristic bay level functions can be implemented:
- Full-locking local activation and position indication of all switching devices
- Display of all essential operation and monitoring messages and measured values
- Protection of all auxiliary current and transformer circuits.
If the local control cabinet is separate from the bay, an interchange terminator in the bay cabinet is the
central interface to the switchgear bay.
Pos : 4.2.21 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-66
Description
Pos : 4.3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2 Elektrische Steuerung - Ü bersc hrift @ 0\mod_1332236153251_18.doc x @ 9658 @ 2 @ 1
2.2
Electrical control
Pos : 4.3.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2 Elektrische Steuerung 000 - T ext @ 24\mod_1391420747384_18.doc x @ 227602 @ @ 1
Electrical control is achieved by the use of an electromechanical control system. This section describes
- the use of this control
- the design of the control
- the design of the installation.
Basic information:
Motor drives [ 1.2]
Order documentation
Pos : 4.3.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.1 Ver wendung 010 @ 4\mod_1340111383312_18.doc x @ 19322 @ 3 @ 1
2.2.1
Use
The components of the electromechanical control used at the bay level, together with the devices of the bay
substation control centre, carry out all control and monitoring tasks.
Pos : 4.3.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.1 Ver wendung 020 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9 2 @ 0\mod_1332236525195_18.doc x @ 9668 @ @ 1
Integration of all the electromechanical control components into the drive of each module and the standalone functionality this provides form the basis for the safe handling, installation and maintenance and
consequently for the high level of reliability of the complete system. The switchgear can easily be extended
at a later date.
Pos : 4.3.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-67
r
Pos : 4.3.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.2 Aufbau 010 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6, 8DN9 2 - mit- @ 0\mod_1332236655399_18.doc x @ 9678 @ 3 @ 1
2.2.2
Design
Relays monitor and control the active modules.
Pos : 4.3.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.2 Aufbau 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344095502152_0.doc x @ 40704 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.3.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.2 Aufbau 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu @ 0\mod_1332240859561_18.doc x @ 9761 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-1
Control system of the high-speed earthing switch drive
Earthing switches [ 2.8]
Pos : 4.3.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.2 Aufbau 030 - 8DN8 5 Bil d2 @ 6\mod_1344095612507_0.doc x @ 41938 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.3.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.2 Aufbau 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 1\mod_1334299882182_18.doc x @ 13861 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-2
Control of the disconnector and earthing switch drive
Disconnector and earthing switch module [ 2.6]
Pos : 4.3.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.2 Aufbau 040 - 8DN 8 Bild3 @ 6\mod_1344097952683_0.doc x @ 41970 @ @ 1
2-68
Description
Description
Pos : 4.3.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.2 Aufbau 040 - 8DN 8 Bildu @ 1\mod_1334314642867_18.doc x @ 13891 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-3
Circuit-breaker control, Version shared drive (G)
Pos : 4.3.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.2 Aufbau 050 - 8DN 8 5 Bild4 mit Ei nzel polantrieb @ 6\mod_1344098041023_0.doc x @ 41994 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.3.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.2 Aufbau 050 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu mit Einzel pol antrieb @ 1\mod_1334315620612_18.doc x @ 13924 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-4
Circuit-breaker control, Single pole drive (E)
Pos : 4.3.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.2 Aufbau 060 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6, 8DN 9 2 @ 5\mod_1343831134319_18.doc x @ 37506 @ @ 1
Circuit-breaker [ 2.5]
The exact design of the control as well as the motor protection can be found in the schematics.
Order documentation
Pos : 4.3.16 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-69
r
Description
Pos : 4.3.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 010 - GIS @ 0\mod_1332240524449_18.doc x @ 9730 @ 3 @ 1
2.2.3
Installation
The wiring to the drives of the high-voltage switching devices, to the density monitors and to the current and
voltage transformers is via flexible, screened control cables.
The control cables are clamped and routed out of the cubicles and housings via cable conduits or using plugin connections.
The shielding of the control cables is earthed to the cable conduits at both ends.
Pos : 4.3.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6, 8DN9 2 - mit- Bild5 @ 6\mod_1344098188377_0.doc x @ 42018 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.3.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6, 8DN9 2 - mit- Bildu @ 0\mod_1332248366324_18.doc x @ 9977 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-5
Cable conduits on the rear of the local control cabinet
Pos : 4.3.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 030 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6, 8DN9 2 - mit- Bild6 @ 7\mod_1345538882560_0.doc x @ 52230 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.3.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 030 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6, 8DN9 2 - mit- Bildu @ 0\mod_1332249060180_18.doc x @ 10021 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-6
Plug connectors on the rear of the local control cabinet
Pos : 4.3.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 040 @ 11\mod_1348559005299_18.doc x @ 67110 @ @ 1
Details regarding installation, particularly the design of the local control cabinet, can be found in the order
documentation.
Order documentation
Pos : 4.3.23 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-70
Description
Pos : 4.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3 Gas über wachung @ 0\mod_1332250752843_18.doc x @ 10032 @ 2 @ 1
2.3
Gas monitoring
This section
- defines the use of the gas monitoring
- describes the construction
- shows the illustration of the individual components in the gas monitoring diagram.
Basic information:
Gas monitoring [ 2.3]
Checking the gas monitoring system [ 7.3]
Order documentation
Pos : 4.4.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.1 Ver wendung - drei polig 8D N8 @ 0\mod_1332251565895_18.doc x @ 10042 @ 3 @ 1
2.3.1
Use
The task of the gas monitoring system is to ensure that gas compartments maintain the specified density and
to signal any impermissible deviations.
The gas compartments are separated from each other by gastight bushings. If a gas compartment consists
of several modules, these are connected using gar-permeable bushings.
The bushings are labelled as follows:
- gastight bushings with a black plate bearing the legend "gastight"
- gas-permeable bushings with a white plate bearing the legend “gas-permeable“.
The monitoring of the gas compartments is carried out with three poles, decentrally, this means, directly on
each gas compartment.
The density of the gas is determined by a density monitor.
Pos : 4.4.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-71
Description
r
Pos : 4.4.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.2 Aufbau 010 @ 0\mod_1332251824879_18.doc x @ 10052 @ 3 @ 1
2.3.2
Construction
The density monitor shows the trend of the filling status of the gas chamber.
Pos : 4.4.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.2 Aufbau 011 - Standar d Dic htewäc hter Ü bersic ht Bil d1 @ 24\mod_1390987697376_0.doc x @ 226940 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Pos : 4.4.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.2 Aufbau 011 - Standar d Dic htewäc hter Ü bersic ht Bil d1u @ 24\mod_1390989779767_18.doc x @ 226961 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-7
Density monitor
1) with trend indicator red/green
2) with scaled trend indicator red/yellow/green
3) with scaled trend indicator red/yellow/green and atmospheric pressure indicator
4) without Display
Pos : 4.4.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.2 Aufbau 030 - T ext - mi t Pr üfanschl uss @ 0\mod_1332252111410_18.doc x @ 10083 @ @ 1
The density monitor compares the density inside the gas compartment to be monitored with that of a
reference gas volume inside the gas monitor. Both gas volumes are subjected to the same ambient
temperature. The density comparison is therefore substituted by a pressure comparison in both systems (gas
compartment - reference space). The density monitor responds only to changes in pressure as a result of a
leak; pressure changes resulting from variations in temperature do not have any effect.
The density monitor is preset at the works to the required limit density. The limit density is defined by fixing
the pressure at a specific temperature. Subsequent adjustment is neither possible nor necessary.
The test connection allows testing of the density monitor in the fitted condition without changing the pressure
in the gas compartment.
The test connection is normally sealed by the insert and a union nut. A pin in the insert holds the non-return
valve open and establishes the connection between the density monitor and the gas compartment.
When a test is carried out the union nut must be removed. Now the connection between the density monitor
and the gas compartment is shut off. At the same time, the connection from the density monitor to the test
connection opens.
The maintenance unit to be connected can be used to slowly increase or reduce the pressure acting on the
density monitor. The pressure values applicable at the moment of triggering the messages is documented.
The signals as well as their operating values can be found in the technical data.
Gas pressures and operating values [ 1.3.2]
Pos : 4.4.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-72
Description
Pos : 4.4.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.3 Gas über wachungsplan @ 0\mod_1332252481441_18.doc x @ 10105 @ 3 @ 1
2.3.3
Gas monitoring diagram
The gas monitoring diagram lists:
-
the gas compartments and relevant gas monitoring
the maintenance connections and their nature
the non-return and coupling valves
the rupture disks.
Pos : 4.4.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.3 Gas über wachung/2.3.3.1 Symbol e 010 @ 0\mod_1332252555988_18.doc x @ 10115 @ 4 @ 1
2.3.3.1
Symbols
Pos : 4.4.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.3 Gas über wachung/2.3.3.1 Symbol e 020 - Bild3 @ 5\mod_1343820192415_0.doc x @ 36658 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.4.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.3 Gas über wachung/2.3.3.1 Symbol e 020 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1332252696738_18.doc x @ 10135 @ @ 1
a) Gas compartment of the circuit-breaker
b) Numbers of the remaining gas compartments of the bay (2 . . . n); voltage transformer housings are
additionally marked with index "a".
c) rupture disk
d) Maintenance connection W1 (DILO NW 20) with non-return valve
e) Density monitor with non-return valve
Pos : 4.4.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.3 Gas über wachung/2.3.3.2 Ausführ ungs beis pi el 010 @ 0\mod_1332252742738_18.doc x @ 10146 @ 4 @ 1
2.3.3.2
Example of various models
Pos : 4.4.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.3 Gas über wachung/2.3.3.2 Ausführ ungs beis pi el 020 - Bild4 Beis piel für ei ne Gasüber wac hung mit Dichtewäc hter @ 5\mod_1343820263212_0.doc x @ 36682 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.4.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.3 Gas über wachung/2.3.3.2 Ausführ ungs beis pi el 020 - Bildu Beis piel für ei ne Gasüber wac hung mit Dichtewäc hter @ 0\mod_1332252898629_18.doc x @ 10166 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-8
An example of gas monitoring by means of a density monitor
Pos : 4.4.16 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-73
r
Pos : 4.5.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hungs-, Prüf- und Diag noseanbauten/2.4 Ü ber wac hungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten @ 0\mod_1332254618778_18.doc x @ 10177 @ 2 @ 1
2-74
Description
Description
2.4
Monitoring, test and diagnostic attachments
This section describes
- where the monitoring, test and diagnostic attachments are located
and
- the type of monitoring, test and diagnostic attachment.
Pos : 4.5.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hungs-, Prüf- und Diag noseanbauten/2.4.1 Sichtfens ter ( optional) 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 0\mod_1332313913247_18.doc x @ 10280 @ 3 @ 1
2.4.1
View port (optional)
View port allow monitoring of
- the switching state, in addition to the mechanical position indicators
- the contact position of moving contacts, earthing moving contacts or earthing blades (depending on the
switchgear design).
The frame presses the view port against an O-ring and seals the connector gastight and pressure-resistant.
Outdoor view ports are additionally provided with a cover. It is sealed against the cover via a flat gasket
Pos : 4.5.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hungs-, Prüf- und Diag noseanbauten/2.4.1 Sichtfens ter ( optional) 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild1 @ 5\mod_1343820416884_0.doc x @ 36706 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hungs-, Prüf- und Diag noseanbauten/2.4.1 Sichtfens ter ( optional) 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 0\mod_1332319214838_18.doc x @ 10313 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Enclosure flange
Cover
Sight window
Ring
Sealing ring
Cover
Flat gasket
Fig. 2-9
View port
a) without cover
b) with cover
Pos : 4.5.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-75
Description
r
Pos : 4.5.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hungs-, Prüf- und Diag noseanbauten/2.4.2 Kameraanbau (opti onal) 010 @ 0\mod_1332319306104_18.doc x @ 10324 @ 3 @ 1
2.4.2
Camera mount (optional)
Temporary fitting of a camera set can improve the quality of visual checks. This allows comparison of the
current switch position with reference photographs, the unequivocal determination of the switch position and
perhaps their photographic documentation.
The use of a camera set requires the use of a laptop with installed software and an adapter mounted on the
sight window.
The fitting of the adapter can take place
- in the factory (only when installed indoors)
- by the maintenance personnel immediately before fitting the camera.
(For outdoor installation, the cover over the sight window must first be removed.)
The adapter [3] is bolted to the pressure ring with hexagon socket bolts.
The camera [1] is inserted into the adapter [3] and clicks in position but remains rotatable.
The thrust members mounted in the adapter [3] fix the camera [1] and position it optimally in front of the sight
window [4]. The switching position can be checked after the camera [1] has been positioned.
After use, the camera [1] can be removed from the adapter [3] by slight tensional pressure.
Pos : 4.5.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hungs-, Prüf- und Diag noseanbauten/2.4.2 Kameraanbau (opti onal) 020 - Bild @ 5\mod_1343820645431_0.doc x @ 36760 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hungs-, Prüf- und Diag noseanbauten2.4.2 Kameraanbau ( optional) 020 - Bil du @ 27\mod_1405485424413_18.doc x @ 250060 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Camera
Thrust member
Adapter
Sight window
Pressure ring
Housing flange
Fig. 2-10
View port with adapter and camera
Pos : 4.5.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hungs-, Prüf- und Diag noseanbauten2.4.2 Kameraanbau ( optional) 030 @ 27\mod_1405430114819_18.doc x @ 250011 @ @ 1
Warning!
The screw joint at the pressure ring [5] must not be loosen in any case!
The loosen of the screw joint of the pressure ring [5] leads loss of SF6 gas in
the respective gas compartment. Remove the camera head from the adapter
[3] after the temporary usage of the camera [1] and if the adapter [3] has
been fitted also temporary remove the adapter [3] from the pressure ring [5].
2-76
Description
Details of design, function and application of the camera set are available in the special
instruction manual.
Pos : 4.5.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü ber wachungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten/2.4.2 Lic htbogenaufnehmer (optional) 010 @ 0\mod_1332255209336_18.doc x @ 10229 @ 3 @ 1
2.4.3
Arc detector (optional)
Arc detectors are fitted to a connector on the module.
Optoelectronic light detection allows the location of arcs inside a gas compartment.
The optoelectronic light detection system consists of
- a light beam receiver (of different lengths, depending on the housing installation)
- a fibre-optic link, and
- an arc detection unit.
In the event of an arc the arc detector [3] carries the light from the gas compartment interior to the optical
waveguide [1]. This is connected front-sided at the end of the light sensor.
Any arcs occurring are signalled via the fibre-optic link to the arc detection unit. To avoid spurious alarms,
the arc detection unit is shut down (by the switchgear control system) during a switching operation.
Pos : 4.5.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü ber wachungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten/2.4.2 Lic htbogenaufnehmer (optional) 020 - 8DN8, 8DQ1 Bild1 @ 5\mod_1343820787181_0.doc x @ 36784 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü ber wachungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten/2.4.2 Lic htbogenaufnehmer (optional) 020 - 8DN8, 8DQ1 Bildu @ 0\mod_1332255496978_18.doc x @ 10261 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Optical waveguide
Sleeve
Arc detector
Sealing ring
Fig. 2-11
Arc detector
Pos : 4.5.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-77
Description
r
Pos : 4.5.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü ber wachungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten/2.4.4 Spannungs prüfanschl uß 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Standard @ 1\mod_1332916387642_18.doc x @ 11760 @ 3 @ 1
2.4.4
Voltage testing connection (optional)
The voltage testing connections integrated in the bushing are used:
- in connection with a test adapter and the voltage detector for a permanent determination of the deenergised state
- in connection with a PD-adapter for the PD-measurement.
The voltage testing connections of a bushing are assigned as follows:
- for the voltage detection with three test adapters or
- for the PD-measurement with a PD-adapter and two dust-proof blind covers.
Attention
Removing the test adapter, a PD-adapter or a blind cover, can cause personal
injury by touching live parts!
• Do not operate the switchgear without an adapter or blind cover!
Test adapter for voltage detection
A dust-proof coaxial lead is routed out of the test adapter and connected to the voltage detection device in
the local control cabinet. Thanks to a protective switch integrated in the test adapter, the test voltage poses
no threat whatsoever. If necessary, the voltage detection device may also be connected when the
switchgear is in operation.
Pos : 4.5.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü ber wachungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten/2.4.4 Spannungs prüfanschl uß 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 5\mod_1343820905493_0.doc x @ 36858 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü ber wachungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten/2.4.4 Spannungs prüfanschl uß 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 1\mod_1332916747787_18.doc x @ 11770 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-12
Test adapter for voltage detection
Pos : 4.5.18 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-78
Description
Pos : 4.5.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü ber wachungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten/2.4.4 Spannungs prüfanschl uß 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 T ext zu Bli nddec kel @ 1\mod_1334912304651_18.doc x @ 13950 @ @ 1
Blind cover
Not-assigned voltage detection connections are protected by a blind cover and electrically short-circuited.
The blind cover is screwed in with four hexagon socket bolts.
Pos : 4.5.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü ber wachungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten/2.4.4 Spannungs prüfanschl uß 040 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 5\mod_1343820987899_0.doc x @ 36882 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü ber wachungs-, Prüf- und Diagnos eanbauten/2.4.4 Spannungs prüfanschl uß 040 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 1\mod_1332916767365_18.doc x @ 11781 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-13
Blind cover
Pos : 4.5.22 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-79
r
Pos : 4.6.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter /2.5 Leistungssc halter /2.5 Leistungssc halter @ 1\mod_1332920361216_18.doc x @ 11824 @ 2 @ 1
2-80
Description
Description
2.5
Circuit-breaker
This section contains a description of
-
use of the circuit-breaker
the external design of the circuit-breaker
the internal design of the circuit-breaker
design and function of the drive mechanism.
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Electrical control [ 2.2]
Pos : 4.6.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter /2.5.1 Verwendung/2.5.1 Verwendung @ 1\mod_1332940530911_18.doc x @ 12406 @ 3 @ 1
2.5.1
Use
The circuit-breaker forms the central element of the gas-insulated switchgear. It activates electrical currents,
constantly controlling transmission and interruption. To increase the stability of the network, 3-pole autoreclosers can be implemented to provide time-specific and location-specific deactivation.
The circuit-breaker can be installed for the connection of overhead lines, feeders, transformers, reactors and
capacitors. In systems with multiple busbars, it works as a coupling to enable energy transport from one bus
bar to the other.
Pos : 4.6.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-81
r
Description
Pos : 4.6.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 1\mod_1332940597884_18.doc x @ 12417 @ 3 @ 1
2.5.2
External design
The 3-pole enclosed circuit-breaker forms the basis for the switchgear bay design.
The housing [4] mounted on the bay frame [3] has three flanges [2] where the bay connection and/or one or
two busbar modules are mounted.
The drive cabinet [1] is built onto the upper cover of the circuit-breaker
Pos : 4.6.4.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Gemei nschafts antrieb Bil d1 @ 5\mod_1343823180881_0.doc x @ 36906 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.4.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Gemei nschafts antrieb Bil du @ 1\mod_1334914731764_18.doc x @ 13961 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Drive cabinet
Flange
Bay frame
Housing
Position indicator
Fig. 2-14
Circuit-breaker, version shared drive (G)
Pos : 4.6.4.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbrüche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-82
Description
Pos : 4.6.4.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau 030 - 8DN 8 5 Einzel pol antrieb Bild2 @ 5\mod_1343823259901_0.doc x @ 36980 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.4.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau 030 - 8DN 8 5 Einzel pol antrieb Bildu @ 1\mod_1334914742607_18.doc x @ 13972 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Position indicator
Spring position indicator
Flange
Bay frame
Housing
Drive cabinet
Fig. 2-15
Circuit breaker with single pole drive (E)
Pos : 4.6.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-83
r
Description
Pos : 4.6.6.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau @ 1\mod_1332924075330_18.doc x @ 11930 @ 3 @ 1
2.5.3
Internal design
Pos : 4.6.6.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.1 Aufbau der Strombahn 01 - 8DN 8 @ 1\mod_1332924649690_18.doc x @ 11950 @ 4 @ 1
2.5.3.1
Design of conducting path
The conductor path consists of the switching system and the conductors. The conductor varies dependent
on the application of the circuit breaker.
Pos : 4.6.6.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wir kungs weis e des Sc halts ys tems 010 - 8DN8 5 @ 1\mod_1332926631073_18.doc x @ 12069 @ 4 @ 1
2.5.3.2
Design and function of the switching system
Switching system design
The switching system consists of a base [5], a moving contact [6] and a contact carrier [7] on each of three
poles.
The three bases are supported by an insulating plate [4] and electrically insulated from the housing. The
contact carriers are collectively support by the triple-support [8].
The spring-stored-energy mechanism switches the moving contact. The force is transmitted via the drive rod
[1], the lever [2] and the operating rod [3].
Pos : 4.6.6.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wir kungs weis e des Sc halts ys tems 020 - 8DN8 5 Bild @ 5\mod_1343823417968_0.doc x @ 37004 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.6.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wir kungs weis e des Sc halts ys tems 020 - 8DN8 5 Bildu @ 1\mod_1332928325687_18.doc x @ 12190 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Drive rod
Lever
Operating rod
Insulating plate
Base
Moving contact
Contact support
Triple-support
Fig. 2-16
Switching system 8DN8 5
Pos : 4.6.6.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbrüche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-84
Description
Pos : 4.6.6.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wir kungs weis e des Sc halts ys tems 025 - 8DN8 5 @ 1\mod_1332928328125_18.doc x @ 12201 @ @ 1
The main current path of the interrupter unit is created by the contact carrier [11], contact laminations [9]
arranged in a ring around the contact carrier, the heat cylinder [6] and the base [2].
Due to the self-sprung contact laminations [9], the required contact pressure on the heat cylinder [6] and the
contact carrier [11] is ensured in the switching position CLOSE.
Arranged parallel to the main current path is the arcing contact system which is made up of the pin [10]
located in the contact carrier [11] and the moving tube contact [7] located in the heat cylinder. The pin and
the tube contact are made of materials that produce only minimal contact erosion.
The tube contact [7], the piston [4] and the heat cylinder [6] are mechanically fixed to each other and coupled
to the operating rod [1]. They form the moving parts of the switching system.
The rear side of the piston [4] is equipped with a valve plate [5]. Together with the valve group [3], the valve
plate makes up the compression unit for arc quenching.
Pos : 4.6.6.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wir kungs weis e des Sc halts ys tems 026 - 8DN8 5 Bild @ 5\mod_1343823513908_0.doc x @ 37028 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.6.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wir kungs weis e des Sc halts ys tems 026 - 8DN8 5 Bildu @ 1\mod_1332928336672_18.doc x @ 12234 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Operating rod
Base
Valve group
Piston
Valve plate
Heat cylinder
Tube contact
Nozzle
Contact laminations
Pin
Contact support
Fig. 2-17
Interrupter unit (in switching position OPEN) 8DN8 5
Pos : 4.6.6.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-85
r
Description
Pos : 4.6.6.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wir kungs weise des Sc halts ystems 030 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9, 8D Q1 1 420kV, 8D Q1 6 @ 1\mod_1332932605959_18.doc x @ 12283 @ @ 1
Switching system method of operation
In the first step of the opening operation, the main contact, consisting of the contact laminations [6] and the
heat cylinder [3], is opened. The arcing contact, consisting of the pin [7] and the tube contact [4], is still
closed so that the current commutates to the arcing contact (Fig. b).
During the continued course of the opening operation, the arcing contact opens creating an arc (Fig. c/d). At
the same time, the heat cylinder [3] moves upward and compresses the quenching gas between the piston
[2] and valve group [1]. This causes the quenching gas to be forced in the opposite direction to the
movement of the moving contact components, through the valve plate [8] into the heat cylinder and through
the gap between the tube contact [5] and arc-quenching nozzle, thus quenching the arc.
In the case of large short-circuit currents, the quenching gas surrounding the pin [7] in the arcing chamber is
heated by the arc’s energy and driven into the heat cylinder [3] at high pressure. When the current passes
through zero, the gas flows back from the heat cylinder through the nozzle and quenches the arc. The valve
plate [8] in the heat cylinder [3] prevents the high pressure from entering the compression chamber between
piston [2] and the valve group [1].
Pos : 4.6.6.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wir kungs weise des Sc halts ystems 040 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9, 8D Q1 1 420kV, 8D Q1 6 Bil d6 @ 5\mod_1343823583347_0.doc x @ 37052 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.6.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wir kungs weise des Sc halts ystems 040 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9, 8D Q1 1 420kV, 8D Q1 6 Bil du @ 1\mod_1332932246020_18.doc x @ 12261 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Valve group
Piston
Heat cylinder
Tube contact
Nozzle
Contact laminations
Pin
Valve plate
Fig. 2-18
Schematics of opening operation
a) Switching position CLOSE
b) Interruption: Main contact in open position
c) Interruption: Arcing contact in open position
d) Switching position OPEN
Pos : 4.6.7.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebs ys temes/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebss ystems 010 - 8DN 8 @ 1\mod_1332932683178_18.doc x @ 12294 @ 3 @ 1
2-86
Description
2.5.4
Design and function of the drive system
The compact drive system is located in the drive cabinet. It performs the following functions:
-
charging of the closing spring,
closing,
opening,
operating sequence OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN.
Additionally installed in the drive cabinet are the heat resistors of the anti-condensation heating which
prevent the build-up of condensate on modules of the drive unit and the electromechanical control.
Pos : 4.6.7.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebs ys temes/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebss ystems 015 - 8DN 8 5 /Übersc hrift 2.5.4.1 Gemeins chaftsantri eb @ 8\mod_1346828635189_18.doc x @ 60774 @ 4 @ 1
2.5.4.1
Version with common drive (G)
Pos : 4.6.7.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebs ys temes/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebss ystems 016 - 8DN 8 @ 1\mod_1335336375136_18.doc x @ 14000 @ @ 1
The drive is a spring-stored-energy mechanism. When the drive cabinet is open, one can clearly see the
closing spring [4] and the opening spring [3] each with their connecting rod [8] or [2] and operating lever [7]
as well as the spring status indicator [5]. The switching system is actuated with the switch lever and the drive
rod [9].
Pos : 4.6.7.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebs ys temes/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebss ystems 020 - 8DN 8 Bild7 @ 5\mod_1343823774770_0.doc x @ 37076 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.7.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebs ys temes/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebss ystems 020 - 8DN 8 Bildu @ 1\mod_1335337218210_18.doc x @ 14011 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Electrical control
Connecting rod of the opening spring
Opening spring
Closing spring
Spring status indicators
Heat resistor for the anti-condensation heating
Switching lever
Connecting rod of the closing spring
Drive rod
Fig. 2-19
Opened drive cabinet
Pos : 4.6.7.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbrüche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.7.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebs ys temes/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebss ystems 025 - 8DN 8, 8D Q1 6 @ 5\mod_1343823881662_18.doc x @ 37100 @ @ 1
2-87
r
Description
The shafts are set into roller bearings.
Spring lifting for charging the closing spring is achieved with a tension motor [2] and maintenance-free, freerunning winding gear [1].
Pos : 4.6.7.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebs ys temes/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebss ystems 030 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9, 8D Q1 6 Bil d8 @ 5\mod_1343823967693_0.doc x @ 37124 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.7.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebs ys temes/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebss ystems 030 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9, 8D Q1 6 Bil du @ 1\mod_1335339551125_18.doc x @ 14022 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Charging mechanism
Charging motor
Spring status indicator
OPEN release
CLOSE release
Fig. 2-20
Rear view of spring-stored-energy mechanism (cover removed)
Pos : 4.6.7.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-88
Description
Pos : 4.6.7.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4 Aufbau und Funkti on des Antriebss ystems 040 @ 5\mod_1343824474646_18.doc x @ 37168 @ @ 1
The following function chart provides a first primary overview of the sequence of motions occurring during
charging of the closing spring (arrow A), closing (arrow B) and opening (arrow C) of the circuit-breaker using
a spring-stored energy mechanism.
Pos : 4.6.7.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4 Aufbau und Funkti on des Antriebss ystems 050 - Bild9 @ 5\mod_1343824520740_0.doc x @ 37192 @ @ 1
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
2
3
1
14
4
5
13
6
12
7
8
9
10
11
Pos : 4.6.7.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4 Aufbau und Funkti on des Antriebss ystems 050 - Bildu @ 1\mod_1335339562641_18.doc x @ 14033 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Drive rod
Cam
Backstop
Lever
Damper (for closing)
Operating shaft
Damper (for opening)
OPEN latch
OPEN release
Connecting rod of the opening spring
Opening spring
Closing spring
Switching lever
Connecting rod of the closing spring
Charging shaft
Cam disc
CLOSE latch
CLOSE release
Charging mechanism
Free-wheel (Free-wheel)
Charging motor
Fig. 2-21
Function diagram of the spring-stored energy mechanism
Pos : 4.6.7.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4 Aufbau und Funkti on des Antriebss ystems 055 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu @ 14\mod_1361185846506_18.doc x @ 97478 @ @ 1
Version common drive
Pos : 4.6.7.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.7.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4.2 Ausführung als Ei nzel polantrieb ( E) 010 - 8DN8 5 @ 1\mod_1335342458528_18.doc x @ 14055 @ 4 @ 1
2-89
Description
r
2.5.4.2
Version with single pole drive (E)
When the cabinet doors are open, the opening springs [2] and the spring status indicators [5] and the
position indicators [6] are visible. Even the OPEN release [3] and the CLOSE release [1] are visible.
The heat resistors of the anti-condensation heating [4] prevent the build-up of condensation on drive unit
components.
Pos : 4.6.7.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4.2 Ausführung als Ei nzel polantrieb ( E) 020 - 8DN8 5 Bild @ 5\mod_1343824639505_0.doc x @ 37216 @ @ 1
6
2
4
5
3
1
Pos : 4.6.7.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4.2 Ausführung als Ei nzel polantrieb ( E) 020 - 8DN8 5 Bildu offener Federspeicherantri ebschr ank E @ 1\mod_1335342742678_18.docx @ 14066 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
CLOSE release
Opening spring
OPEN release
Heat resistor of the anti-condensation heating
Spring status indicators
Position indicators
Fig. 2-22
Spring-stored-energy mechanism with open cabinet doors (8DN8 5)
Pos : 4.6.7.19 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-90
Description
Pos : 4.6.7.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4.2 Ausführung als Ei nzel polantrieb ( E) 030 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 5\mod_1343824709084_18.doc x @ 37240 @ @ 1
The shafts are set into roller bearings.
Spring lifting for charging the closing spring is achieved with a tension motor [2] and maintenance-free, freerunning winding gear [1].
Pos : 4.6.7.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4.2 Ausführung als Ei nzel polantrieb ( E) 030 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 5\mod_1343824783068_0.doc x @ 37264 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.6.7.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4.2 Ausführung als Ei nzel polantrieb ( E) 030 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 1\mod_1335342984611_18.doc x @ 14077 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Charging mechanism
Charging motor
Spring status indicator
OPEN release
CLOSE release
Fig. 2-23
Rear view of spring-stored-energy mechanism (cover removed)
Pos : 4.6.7.23 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-91
Description
r
Pos : 4.6.7.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4.2 Ausführung als Ei nzel polantrieb ( E) 040 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 5\mod_1343824900865_18.doc x @ 37288 @ @ 1
The following 3D-illustration offers an overview of the structural components and their cooperation.
Pos : 4.6.7.25 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4.2 Ausführung als Ei nzel polantrieb ( E) 040 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 5\mod_1343824955005_0.doc x @ 37312 @ @ 1
4
3
27
2
1
19
6
15
7
5
8
16
24 22
23 20
11
13
12
12
26
25
9
18
10
21
17
Pos : 4.6.7.26 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antri ebs ystemes/2.5.4.2 Ausführung als Ei nzel polantrieb ( E) 040 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 1\mod_1335345586860_18.doc x @ 14088 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
External lever
Coupling linkage
Isolator
Switching rod
Motor
Manual lifter
Charging mechanism
Free-wheel
Connecting rod (for closing spring)
Opening spring
Charging shaft
Damper (for opening)
CLOSE release
CLOSE latch
Fig. 2-24
Spring-stored-energy mechanism, Current transformer single pole drive
Pos : 4.6.7.27 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-92
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Cam
Operating shaft
Switching lever
Connecting rod (for opening spring)
Drive rod
Cam brake
Closing spring
Claw coupling
Cam disc
Lever
OPEN release
OPEN latch
Interrupter
Description
Pos : 4.7.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc halter/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter Baustein/2.6 Trenn- und Er dungssc halter-Baustein - 8DN 8 @ 1\mod_1333630846374_18.doc x @ 13651 @ 2 @ 1
2.6
Disconnector and earthing switch module
The following section will address:
-
The disconnector and earthing switch module in use
The external design of the disconnector and earthing switch module
the contact system
The various versions of the conducting path
Design and function of the motor drive.
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Motor drives [ 1.2]
Nameplates [ 1.4]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Pos : 4.7.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc halter/2.6.1 Ver wendung/2.6.1 Ver wendung - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 1\mod_1333630849562_18.doc x @ 13662 @ 3 @ 1
2.6.1
Use
The disconnector and earthing switch module unites the functions of disconnectors and work-in-progress
earthing switches. After isolating the appropriate switchgear parts, one can either establish an isolating
distance for secure work on electrical systems or create the earthing and short-circuiting.
As a result of the design of the three position switches device, both functions are interlocked back-to-back.
The disconnector and earthing switch module is also in operation without work-in-progress earthing
switches.
Disconnector and earthing switch modules can be installed as outgoing modules, busbar modules or as
bustie switch-disconnectors and can be equipped with additional work-in-progress or high-speed earthing
switches.
The insulated contact system version of the work-in-progress earthing switch is insulated against the
enclosure. This insulation is bridged via the earthing bar during operation. It may be removed for measuring
purposes after activating the corresponding part of the switchgear.
Pos : 4.7.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-93
r
Description
Pos : 4.7.4.1 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbrüche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.4.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau 010 - 8DN 8 5 @ 1\mod_1335346126184_18.doc x @ 14099 @ 3 @ 1
2.6.2
External design
The external design of the disconnector- and earthing switch-module consists of the housing [2], the
bushings [4] and the motor drive [1].
The gas-tight bushings and/or permeable bushing versions carry the current path with the contact systems.
The module is fitted with a rupture disk assembly [3].
Different kinds of testing and monitoring devices may be assembled with the provided flanges.
Pos : 4.7.4.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bild1 Äuß ere Ansic ht des Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter-Baus tei nes @ 6\mod_1343976532652_0.doc x @ 39460 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.4.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Äuß ere Ansic ht des Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter-Baus tei nes @ 1\mod_1335346548479_18.doc x @ 14110 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Motor drive
Housing
Rupture disk assembly
Bushing
Fig. 2-25
External view of the disconnector and earthing switch module
Pos : 4.7.4.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 1\mod_1335346761415_18.doc x @ 14121 @ @ 1
When using the disconnector and earthing switch module as a busbar module, depending on the version of
the busbar, different variants are used to compensate the thermal expansion and dislocation.
Busbar [ 2.13]
2-94
Description
The isolated 3-pole contacts leading out from the housing on the insulated earthing switch are connected to
each other with the earthing bar [1] and connected to the housing [3] with two contact points [2].
For measuring purposes, all screws that fixate the earthing bar must be unscrewed. Subsequently, the
earthing bar and contact pieces may be disassembled.
The outdoor version of the earthing bar is protected by a cover.
Pos : 4.7.4.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau 040 - 8DN 8 5 Bild2 Erdungssc hi ene des Ar beits erdungssc halters in is olier ter Aus @ 6\mod_1343984622721_0.doc x @ 40190 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.4.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau 040 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu Erdungssc hiene des Ar bei tser dungssc hal ters in is olie @ 1\mod_1335347044130_18.doc x @ 14132 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Earthing bar
Contact piece
Housing
Fig. 2-26
Earthing bar of the work-in-progress earthing switch, insulated version (illustration
without cover)
Pos : 4.7.4.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbrüche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-95
r
Description
Pos : 4.7.5.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau @ 1\mod_1335348791832_18.doc x @ 14154 @ 3 @ 1
2.6.3
Internal design
Pos : 4.7.5.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.1 Str ombahn 010 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 1\mod_1335353508608_18.doc x @ 14165 @ 4 @ 1
2.6.3.1
Conducting path
The disconnector and earthing switch module may be placed universally in any switchgear design. This
results in multiple possibilities for current path leads.
The conductors are fixed to the bushing at flange A. Flange B, C and D may be assigned variably, for
example with
-
a bushing that has a fixed conductor connection
the bushing of the adjacent module and a conductor plug connection
a high-speed earthing switch module or a work-in-progress earthing switch module
a cover, although the conductor ending in the module is closed by a shield.
The contact systems are identical on all designs.
The bushings can be sealed or unsealed.
Pos : 4.7.5.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.1 Str ombahn 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild3 Aus wahl möglicher Str ombahnführungen an den Flans chen A @ 6\mod_1343985505566_0.doc x @ 40214 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.5.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.1 Str ombahn 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu Aus wahl möglicher Str ombahnführungen an den Flans chen A @ 1\mod_1335353861740_18.doc x @ 14176 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-27
Selection of possible circuit path leads at the flanges A, B, C and D
Pos : 4.7.5.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbrüche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-96
Description
Pos : 4.7.5.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.2 Varianten des Arbeits erdungss chalters 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 1\mod_1335354765748_18.doc x @ 14187 @ 4 @ 1
2.6.3.2
Work-in-progress earthing switch variants
The fixed contact of the work-in-progress earthing switch module can be insulated or non-insulated.
If the work-in-progress earthing switch function can be dispensed with, the contact system is reduced
accordingly. The housing is sealed by a cover.
Pos : 4.7.5.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.2 Varianten des Arbeits erdungss chalters 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil d @ 6\mod_1343985800132_0.doc x @ 40238 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.5.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.2 Varianten des Arbeits erdungss chalters 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du @ 1\mod_1335356042493_18.doc x @ 14198 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-28
Work-in-progress earthing switch
a) insulated version
b) non-insulated version
c) without work-in-progress earthing switch function
Pos : 4.7.5.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.3 Funkti on des Trenn- und Er dungssc halter-Bausteines 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 1\mod_1335356737510_18.doc x @ 14209 @ 4 @ 1
2.6.3.3
Function of the disconnector and earthing switch module
The disconnector and earthing switch module links the contact systems of the disconnector and the work-inprogress earthing switch.
If the module version does not include the earthing switch module, the contact system is reduced by the part
of the earthing switch.
The structure of the contact system for the disconnector and earthing switch module creates contradirectional motion: while one moving contact is moved in the CLOSE direction, the other is lead to the OPEN
position.
This leads unavoidably to three switch positions:
Pos : 4.7.5.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.3 F unktion des Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter-Baus tei nes 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil d @ 6\mod_1343985886260_0.doc x @ 40262 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.5.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.3 F unktion des Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter-Baus tei nes 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu Sc haltstell ung @ 1\mod_1335357380174_18.doc x @ 14220 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-29
Switching positions of the disconnector and earthing switch module
a) disconnector OPEN, earthing switch OPEN (neutral position)
b) disconnector CLOSE, earthing switch OPEN
c) disconnector OPEN, earthing switch CLOSE
Pos : 4.7.5.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.3 F unktion des Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter-Baus tei nes 030 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 1\mod_1335357682102_18.doc x @ 14231 @ @ 1
2-97
r
Description
The rotational movement of the insulating shaft that leads over three poles creates a corresponding rotation
of the three drive levers [6]. Each drive lever is connected to two coupling rods. Coupling rod [5] moves the
contact pin of the earthing switch. Coupling rod [7] moves the contact pin of the disconnector.
Activating the earthing switch module pushes the moving contact [3] that surrounds the contact pin [4], into
the fixed contact [2], thereby earthing the current path.
Activating the disconnector module moves the moving contact [9] that surrounds the contact pin [8], into the
fixed contact [10], thereby closing the current path.
Pos : 4.7.5.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.3 F unktion des Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter-Baus tei nes 040 - 8DN8 5 Bil d @ 6\mod_1343986307202_0.doc x @ 40286 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.5.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem /2.6.3.3 F unktion des Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter-Baus tei nes 040 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu Kontakts ysteme @ 1\mod_1335358114854_18.doc x @ 14242 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Earth bushing (is substituted by the earth cover in the non-insulated version)
Opposing contact of the work-in-progress earthing switch
Guiding contact of the work-in-progress earthing switch
Contact pin of the work-in-progress earthing switch
Coupling rod of the work-in-progress earthing switch
Operating lever
Coupling rod of the disconnector
Contact pin of the disconnector
Guiding contact of the disconnector
Opposing contact of the disconnector
Fig. 2-30
Contact systems of the disconnector and earthing switch module (example of an
insulated version)
Pos : 4.7.5.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-98
Description
Pos : 4.7.6.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Aufbau und Funktion des Antri ebes 010 - 8DN 8 5 @ 1\mod_1335358383470_18.doc x @ 14253 @ 3 @ 1
2.6.4
Design and function of the drive
The drive and its housing is integrated in the housing of the disconnector and earthing switch module
housing, but is isolated from the high-voltage section in a gas-tight and pressure-tight manner.
On the front of the drive, there are the position indicators for the disconnector [2], for the earthing switch [3]
and the shutter [1], which provides access to the manual switching device.
Depending on the installation location and current path leads of the disconnector and earthing switch
module, the position indicators may also be arranged in a inverted manner.
46-pole plugs [4] are used for the supply of the control voltage, motor voltage and the control commands as
well as for the outgoing line of the auxiliary switch position indicators.
Ventilation ducts [5] in the drive housing ensure air exchange.
Pos : 4.7.6.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Aufbau und Funktion des Antri ebes 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Antrieb äuß er e Ansic ht @ 6\mod_1343986439494_0.doc x @ 40310 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.6.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Aufbau und Funktion des Antri ebes 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Antrieb äuß ere Ansicht @ 1\mod_1335359006263_18.doc x @ 14264 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Cover
Position indicator disconnector
Position indicator work-in-progress earthing switch
Plug
Ventilation ducts
Fig. 2-31
Drive, external view
Pos : 4.7.6.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbrüche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
2-99
r
Description
Pos : 4.7.6.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Aufbau und Funktion des Antri ebes 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 1\mod_1335359369392_18.doc x @ 14275 @ @ 1
A permanently magnetically excited DC motor [8] drives the gears [5].
The driver [4] transfers this movement to the gear rack [3] running in the guide. The gear rack drives the two
gear wheels which drive the drive shaft [2].
The drive can start up the three positively interlocked switch positions of the disconnector and earthing
switch module.
Per each disconnector and earthing switch function, an auxiliary switch [6] is integrated. These are used to
electronically and optically indicate the switch position. A kinematic chain drives them.
The electromechanical control [1] is integrated into the drive.
Two anti-condensation heatings [7] are installed in the drive housing.
Pos : 4.7.6.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Aufbau und Funktion des Antri ebes 040 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Antrieb bei abgenommener H aube @ 6\mod_1343986538443_0.doc x @ 40334 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.6.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Aufbau und Funktion des Antri ebes 040 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Antrieb bei abg enommener H aube @ 1\mod_1335360416515_18.doc x @ 14286 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Electrical control
Drive shaft
Gear rack
Driver
Gearbox
Auxiliary switch
Anti-condensation heating
Drive motor
Fig. 2-32
Drive with cowl removed
Pos : 4.7.6.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbrüche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
2-100
Description
Pos : 4.7.6.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Aufbau und Funktion des Antri ebes 050 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 1\mod_1335361124195_18.doc x @ 14297 @ @ 1
Devices for manual operation
For each function, the drive has a shaft for manual switching. A mechanical lock secures the shafts against
improper operation.
Removing the cover provides access to the opening [1] for inserting the two-way key.
By turning the two-way key, either shaft cover 1 [2] or shaft cover 2 [3] will be released.
Now the proper lever can be inserted and the disconnecting switch or the earthing switch can be manually
switched.
Pos : 4.7.6.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.4 Antri eb/2.6.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebes 060 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil d Vorrichtung z um behel fs mäßig en Sc h @ 6\mod_1343986648051_0.doc x @ 40358 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.7.6.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.4 Antri eb/2.6.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebes 060 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du Vorrichtung zum behelfs mäßigen Sc @ 1\mod_1335362342969_18.doc x @ 14308 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Opening for two-way key.
Shaft 1
Shaft 2
Fig. 2-33
Devices for manual operation
Manual operation [ 5.2]
Pos : 4.7.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-101
r
Pos : 4.8.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Kabeltrenner ( nur 8DN 8 5)2.7 Kabeltr enner - 8DN8 5 @ 1\mod_1335347852363_18.doc x @ 14143 @ 2 @ 1
2-102
Description
Description
2.7
Cable disconnector
This section describes
- application and
- design of the cable disconnector
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Motor drives [ 1.2]
Nameplates [ 1.4]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Disconnector and earthing switch module [ 2.6]
Pos : 4.8.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Kabeltrenner ( nur 8DN 8 5)2.7.1 Ver wendung - 8DN8 5 @ 1\mod_1335428563404_18.doc x @ 14320 @ 3 @ 1
2.7.1
Use
The cable disconnector connects the bay with the three high-voltage cables. Cable connections as per IEC
62271-209 Clause 7.1/7.2 or other cable plug systems are suitable.
The cable disconnector has disconnector and earthing switch functions or just a disconnector function.
Pos : 4.8.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-103
r
Description
Pos : 4.8.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Kabeltrenner ( nur 8DN 8 5)2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 010 - 8DN8 5 @ 1\mod_1335428837364_18.doc x @ 14331 @ 3 @ 1
2.7.2
External design
The cable disconnector is enclosed by a one-piece housing [2]. There is a bushing [6] on flange A.
The drive [5] is integrated in the housing.
The rupture disc device [3] is mounted on the housing.
Connection of the cable is effected by plug connection of the cable sockets [4].
Pos : 4.8.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Kabeltrenner ( nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Kabeltrenner l ang @ 6\mod_1343986852350_0.doc x @ 40382 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.8.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Kabeltrenner ( nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Kabel trenner lang @ 1\mod_1335429083189_18.doc x @ 14342 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Conductor
Housing
Rupture disk assembly
Cable socket
Drive
Bushing on flange A
Fig. 2-34
Cable disconnector
Pos : 4.8.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Kabeltrenner ( nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 025 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Kabeltrenner kurz @ 28\mod_1414051668044_0.doc x @ 256261 @ @ 1
2-104
Description
1
2
6
3
5
4
Pos : 4.8.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Kabeltrenner ( nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 025 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Kabel trenner kurz @ 28\mod_1414051784310_18.doc x @ 256281 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Conductor
Housing
Rupture disk assembly
Cable socket
Drive
Bushing on flange A
Fig. 2-35
Cable disconnector
Pos : 4.8.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Kabeltrenner ( nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 030 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Kabeltrenner MC P @ 29\mod_1427451571728_0.doc x @ 275413 @ @ 1
1
2
6
5
3
4
Pos : 4.8.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Kabel trenner (nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 030 - 8DN8 5 Bil du Kabeltr enner MCP @ 29\mod_1427451633735_18.doc x @ 275435 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Conductor
Housing
Rupture disk assembly
Cable socket
Drive
Bushing on flange A
Fig. 2-36
Cable disconnector
Pos : 4.8.11 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-105
r
Description
Pos : 4.8.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Kabel trenner (nur 8DN 8 5)2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 010 - 8DN8 5 @ 1\mod_1335429599013_18.doc x @ 14353 @ 3 @ 1
2.7.3
Internal design
The enclosure apertures of the cable end connectors are sealed gastight by pressure rings [5].
The connection of the cable socket with the conductor [2] is carried out via the intermediate piece [3] and the
connector [6].
Pos : 4.8.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Kabel trenner (nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Kabeltrenner l ang @ 6\mod_1343986953287_0.doc x @ 40406 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.8.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Kabel trenner (nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Kabeltr enner lang @ 1\mod_1335429860559_18.doc x @ 14364 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Support plate
Conductor
Intermediate piece
Cable socket
Pressure ring
Connection piece
Disconnector and earthing switch module
Fig. 2-37
Cable disconnector
Pos : 4.8.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Kabel trenner (nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 025 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Kabeltrenner kurz @ 28\mod_1414051982452_0.doc x @ 256301 @ @ 1
2-106
Description
1
7
2
3
6
4
5
Pos : 4.8.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Kabel trenner (nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 025 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Kabeltr enner kurz @ 28\mod_1414051982998_18.doc x @ 256321 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Support plate
Conductor
Intermediate piece
Cable socket
Pressure ring
Connection piece
Disconnector and earthing switch module
Fig. 2-38
Cable disconnector
2-107
Description
r
Pos : 4.8.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Kabel trenner (nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 027 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Kabeltrenner MC P @ 29\mod_1427451722510_0.doc x @ 275457 @ @ 1
1
7
2
6
3
5
4
Pos : 4.8.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Kabel trenner (nur 8DN 8 5)/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 027 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Kabeltr enner MCP @ 29\mod_1427451792676_18.doc x @ 275479 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Support plate
Conductor
Intermediate piece
Cable socket
Pressure ring
Connection piece
Disconnector and earthing switch module
Fig. 2-39
Cable disconnector
Pos : 4.8.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Kabel trenner (nur 8DN 8 5)2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 030 - 8DN8 5 @ 1\mod_1335429989790_18.doc x @ 14375 @ @ 1
Structure and function of the disconnector and earthing switch module are described in detail in the "Section
Disconnectors and Earthing Switches".
Disconnector and earthing switch module [ 2.6]
Pos : 4.8.20 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-108
Description
Pos : 4.9.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8 Er dungssc hal ter - 8DN 8 52.8 Er dungssc halter - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 1\mod_1335430197549_18.doc x @ 14386 @ 2 @ 1
2.8
Earthing switches
The section contains a description of
- use of the earthing switch
- the external design of the earthing switch
- the internal design of the earthing switch.
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Pos : 4.9.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8 Er dungssc hal ter - 8DN 8 52.8.1 Verwendung - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 1\mod_1335430354809_18.doc x @ 14397 @ 3 @ 1
2.8.1
Use
Earthing switches are used for earthing and short-circuiting system components after prior isolation (e.g.
overhead lines, cables and transformers).
High-speed earthing switches are make-proof. They achieve high-speed action (made possible by a springsnap mechanism) and the specially designed contact system ensures that the conducting path is reliably
earthed even if it is inadvertently switched into connection with live equipment.
Work-in-progress earthing switches are not closing resistant.
In the insulated version, earthing switches can be used for measurement purposes.
Pos : 4.9.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8 Er dungssc hal ter - 8DN 8 52.8.2 Äußer er Aufbau 010 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 1\mod_1335431297298_18.doc x @ 14408 @ 3 @ 1
2-109
r
2.8.2
Description
External design
The earthing switch is of triple-phase design.
The drive [1] is integrated in the housing, but is isolated from the high-voltage section in a gas-tight and
pressure-tight manner. The cover [3] closes off the access to the manual actuation of the drive.
Connection of the motor and control voltage is via the equipment plugs [2].
Pos : 4.9.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 5 / 8DN8 6/2.8.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 015 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 - isoli ert @ 2\mod_1335432373093_18.doc x @ 14430 @ @ 1
In the case of insulated earthing switches, the insulated contacts of each of the three poles of the earthing
switch leading out from the housing are connected to the housing via a busbar [4].
Pos : 4.9.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8 Er dungssc hal ter - 8DN 8 52.8.2 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8DN8 5 Bild - nic ht isoli ert @ 6\mod_1344158426937_0.doc x @ 43206 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8 Er dungssc hal ter - 8DN 8 52.8.2 Äußer er Aufbau 025 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu - nic ht is oliert @ 1\mod_1335431919855_18.doc x @ 14419 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Drive
Equipment plug
Cover over manual actuation
Position indicator
Fig. 2-40
Earthing switch, uninsulated
Pos : 4.9.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8 Er dungssc hal ter - 8DN 8 52.8.2 Äußer er Aufbau 030 - 8DN8 5 Bild - isoli ert @ 6\mod_1344158319425_0.doc x @ 43182 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8 Er dungssc hal ter - 8DN 8 52.8.2 Äußer er Aufbau 035 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu - is oliert @ 2\mod_1335432677291_18.doc x @ 14441 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Drive
Equipment plug
Cover over manual actuation
Conductor
Position indicator
Fig. 2-41
Earthing switch, insulated
2-110
Description
Pos : 4.9.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 010 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335432905354_18.doc x @ 14452 @ 3 @ 1
2.8.3
Internal design
The drive shaft [9] is guided into the chamber gas-tight and connected with the earthing moving contacts [7]
via the fork lever [1] and contact carrier [4]. The contact carrier is guided by the guide rods [2] and [3].
The earthing pins [7] carried in insulating bushes [5] are connected with the earthing connections on the
housing, and thus with the earth potential via the current straps [6].
Pos : 4.9.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 020 - 8DN8 5 Bild @ 6\mod_1344158503324_0.doc x @ 43230 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 025 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 2\mod_1335432909057_18.doc x @ 14463 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fork lever
First guide rod
Second guide rod
Contact carrier
Insulating sleeve
Flexible connection
Earthing moving contact
Opposing contact
Drive shaft
Fig. 2-42
Earthing switch, non-insulated and insulated version
Pos : 4.9.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-111
Description
r
Pos : 4.9.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 030 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 - is olier t @ 2\mod_1335432914462_18.doc x @ 14474 @ @ 1
In the insulated execution of the earthing switch the connection of the individual earthing pins to the housing
[5] is executed via the individual current strap [1], the insulated set-in earthing switch bushing [3], the
earthing bar [2] and the contact pieces [4].
Pos : 4.9.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 040 - 8DN8 5 Bild - isoli ert @ 6\mod_1344158616726_0.doc x @ 43254 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 045 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu - is oliert @ 2\mod_1335432918274_18.doc x @ 14485 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Flexible connection
Earthing bar
Earth bushing
Contact piece
Housing of the earthing switch
Fig. 2-43
Earthing bar mounting
Pos : 4.9.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 050 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 - is olier t @ 2\mod_1335437808445_18.doc x @ 14496 @ @ 1
• The power bus should be removed for the purpose of taking measurements.
Warning
Releasing vessel bolts on switchgear in operation leads to dangerous gas
loss.
• To remove the power bus, just the seven M12 bolts which fix these in immediately vicinity
must be released.
Pos : 4.9.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Erdungssc halter - 8DN 8 5 / 8DN 8 6/2.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 060 - 8DN8 5 Bild - is oliert @ 19\mod_1374579847509_0.doc x @ 169621 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 065 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu - is oliert @ 2\mod_1335438176090_18.doc x @ 14507 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-44
Preparation of the earthing switch for measurement
Pos : 4.9.21 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 070 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 - is olier t @ 2\mod_1335438350072_18.doc x @ 14518 @ @ 1
2-112
Description
Caution
When the earthing bar is removed, the operation of the earthing switch is
cancelled.
Hazardous voltage – DANGER TO LIFE!
• Remove the earthing bar only if necessary and only for the duration of taking
measurements!
Pos : 4.9.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Erdungssc halter - 8DN 8 5 / 8DN 8 6/2.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 075 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 15\mod_1365058481539_18.doc x @ 110143 @ @ 1
In the opposing contact, spring-loaded contact fingers [3] are arranged all round the cage [4]. These are
fixed in position by the erosion-resistant ring [1], the housing [2] and the base [5].
Pos : 4.9.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 080 - 8DN8 5 Bild @ 6\mod_1344158700676_0.doc x @ 43278 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.25 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 085 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 2\mod_1335439090266_18.doc x @ 14529 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Ring
Housing
Contact finger
Cage
Base
Fig. 2-45
Opposing contact
Pos : 4.9.26 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-113
r
Description
Pos : 4.9.27 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 010 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 2\mod_1335439356521_18.doc x @ 14540 @ 3 @ 1
2.8.4
Drive
The drive consists of motor [8], gearbox with friction clutch [10], drive rod [3] and drive lever [1].
End position switches [4] detect the switching position of the earthing switch and switches the motor when
the end position is reached.
The coupling rod [2] connected to the drive lever actuates the auxiliary switch [6].
Together with the end position switches and the auxiliary switch, the electromagnetic contactor [7] forms the
electrical control system of the earthing switch.
Anti-condensation heating [5] prevents the formation of condensation.
After removing the cover [9] the drive can be activated in an emergency.
Manual operation [ 5.2]
Pos : 4.9.28 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 020 - 8DN8 5 Bil d @ 6\mod_1344158781314_0.doc x @ 43302 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.29 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 025 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du @ 2\mod_1335440098436_18.doc x @ 14551 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operating lever
Coupling rod
Drive rod
End position switches
Anti-condensation heating
Auxiliary switch
Electromagnetic protections
Motor
Cover over manual actuation
Gears with friction clutch
Fig. 2-46
Work-in-progress earthing switch drive in position OPEN
Pos : 4.9.30 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-114
Description
Pos : 4.9.31 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 030 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 2\mod_1335440748450_18.doc x @ 14562 @ @ 1
During closing, the linear movement of the drive rod [2] is converted to a rotational movement of the
operating lever [1].
The operating lever, which is rigidly connected to the drive shaft, passes this rotational movement on to the
fork lever that moves the earthing moving contacts into the fixed contacts. The earthing switch is switched
on.
Pos : 4.9.32 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 040 - 8DN8 5 Bil d @ 6\mod_1344158852795_0.doc x @ 43326 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.33 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 045 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du @ 2\mod_1335441146426_18.doc x @ 14573 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Operating lever
Drive rod
Motor
Gears with friction clutch
Fig. 2-47
Work-in-progress earthing switch drive in position CLOSE
Pos : 4.9.34 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-115
r
Description
Pos : 4.9.35 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 050 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 2\mod_1335441942334_18.doc x @ 14584 @ @ 1
In addition, the high-speed earthing switch has a spring-snap mechanism. It consists of the charging lever
[13] and the tension spring [14]. The charging lever [13] is (as opposed to the drive lever [2]) permanently
fixed to the drive shaft.
In switching position OPEN, the tension spring is charged.
Pos : 4.9.36 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 060 - 8DN8 5 Bil d @ 6\mod_1344158932995_0.doc x @ 43350 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.37 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 065 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du @ 2\mod_1335442699687_18.doc x @ 14595 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Opening spring
Operating lever
Coupling rod
Drive rod
Anti-condensation heating
End position switches
Auxiliary switch
Closing cams
Electromagnetic protections
Cover over manual actuation
Motor
Gears with friction clutch
Charging lever
Tension spring (charged)
Fig. 2-48
High-speed earthing switch drive in position OPEN
Pos : 4.9.38 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-116
Description
Pos : 4.9.39 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 070 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 2\mod_1335443090030_18.doc x @ 14606 @ @ 1
During closing, the linear movement of the drive rod [2] is converted to a rotational movement of the
operating lever [1].
The closing cams [5] of the drive lever include the charging lever. When the dead centre position has been
passed, the tension spring relaxes instantly.
The charging lever that is connected to the tension spring turns drive shaft with an accordingly high speed.
The operating lever passes the rotational movement on to the fork lever that moves the earthing moving
contacts into the fixed contacts. The earthing switch is switched on.
Pos : 4.9.40 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 080 - 8DN8 5 Bil d @ 6\mod_1344158994868_0.doc x @ 43374 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.9.41 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 085 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du @ 2\mod_1335443336625_18.doc x @ 14617 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operating lever
Drive rod
Motor
Gears with friction clutch
Closing cams
Tension spring(relaxed)
Charging lever
Opening spring
Fig. 2-49
High-speed earthing switch drive in position CLOSE
Pos : 4.9.42 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8 Erdungsschalter - 8DN8 52.8.4 Antrieb 090 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 2\mod_1335443722474_18.doc x @ 14628 @ @ 1
On opening, the opening cam [8] moves the charging lever back into the initial position while charging the
tension spring again.
Pos : 4.9.43 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-117
r
Pos : 4.10.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11 Stromwandl er 000 - Ü bersc hrift @ 2\mod_1335512791563_18.doc x @ 14651 @ 2 @ 1
2-118
Description
Description
2.9
Current transformer
Pos : 4.10.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11 Stromwandl er 010 - 8DN8, 8D Q1 1, 8DN9 2 @ 25\mod_1391499129388_18.doc x @ 227733 @ @ 1
This section presents:
-
use of the current transformer
external design
internal design
terminal designations.
Basic information
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Order documentation
Pos : 4.10.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.1 Ver wendung @ 2\mod_1335513130469_18.doc x @ 14662 @ 3 @ 1
2.9.1
Use
Inductive current transformers (CT) step the operating currents and short-circuit currents down to values
which are suitable for measuring instruments and protective devices connected.
Inductive current transformers have been installed in the switchgear. The conductor which is run straight
through the module assumes the function of the primary winding. The built-in components on the secondary
side are summarised below as “core-and-coil assembly“.
The function units in the core-and-coil assembly, which consist of the iron cores and the associated
secondary winding, are called “cores“ in the following. A distinction is made between
- measuring and metering cores and
- protection cores.
Measuring and metering cores ensure a low transmission error in the rated current range and protect meters
and instruments from overloading.
Protection cores have a larger measuring error in the rated current range than measuring and metering
cores. But fault currents are measured up to the rated accuracy limit current (accuracy limit factor x primary
rated current) in approximate proportion.
Depending on the different demands made on current transformers, there are variations in
- the type, number and dimensions of the cores
- the design of the secondary windings and the number of secondary taps
- the length of the housing.
Pos : 4.10.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-119
r
Description
Pos : 4.10.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 010 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9 2, 8DQ1 1 @ 12\mod_1351070517662_18.doc x @ 72435 @ 3 @ 1
2.9.2
External design
Pos : 4.10.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 015 - 8DN 8 5 @ 2\mod_1335513468641_18.doc x @ 14673 @ @ 1
Current transformer model, integrated into circuit breaker
The current transformer with its core-and-coil assembly [1] and the current conductors [2] is not a separate
component and does not have its own bushing. The housing [3] only encapsulates the current transformer.
The secondary terminal panels, which are integrated into the sides of the housing, are closed off by the
secondary terminal housing [4].
The rating plate is affixed to the housing.
Pos : 4.10.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d Stromwandl er kurz T yp1 @ 6\mod_1344159111801_0.doc x @ 43398 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du Stromwandler kurz T yp1 @ 2\mod_1335513819250_18.doc x @ 14684 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Core-and-coil assembly
Conductor
Housing
Secondary terminal
Bushing
Fig. 2-50
External view of an integrated current transformer, short version
Pos : 4.10.9 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-120
Description
Pos : 4.10.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 030 - 8DN8 5 Bild Stromwandler l ang T yp2 @ 6\mod_1344159299997_0.doc x @ 43422 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 030 - 8DN8 5 Bildu Str omwandl er l ang T yp2 @ 2\mod_1335513982907_18.doc x @ 14695 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Core-and-coil assembly
Conductor
Housing
Secondary terminal
Bushing
Fig. 2-51
External view of an integrated current transformer, long version
Pos : 4.10.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 050 - 8DN8 5 Bild Stromwandler D oppel T yp 3 & 4 @ 6\mod_1344159527301_0.doc x @ 43446 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 051 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu Str omwandl er D oppel T yp 3 & 4 @ 2\mod_1335514249652_18.doc x @ 14717 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Core-and-coil assembly
Conductor
Housing
Secondary terminal
Bushing
Fig. 2-52
Section of a separate current transformer, double version
Pos : 4.10.14 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-121
Description
r
Pos : 4.10.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 040 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335514095192_18.doc x @ 14706 @ @ 1
Current transformer version, separate
The current transformer is a separate module with its own bushing [5] and two-piece housing [3].
The secondary terminal panels, which are integrated into the sides of the housing, are closed off by the
secondary terminal housing [4].
The rating plate is affixed to the housing.
Pos : 4.10.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 060 - 8DN8 5 Bild Stromwandler -D oppel T yp 5 & 6 @ 6\mod_1344159572002_0.doc x @ 43470 @ @ 1
1
2
5
4
3
Pos : 4.10.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 060 - 8DN8 5 Bildu Str omwandl er - D oppel T yp 5 & 6 @ 2\mod_1335514253840_18.doc x @ 14728 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Core-and-coil assembly
Conductor
Housing
Secondary terminal
Bushing
Fig. 2-53
Section of a separate current transformer, double version
Pos : 4.10.18 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-122
Description
Pos : 4.10.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 010 @ 2\mod_1335514457520_18.doc x @ 14739 @ 3 @ 1
2.9.3
Internal design
Pos : 4.10.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335514612502_18.doc x @ 14750 @ 4 @ 1
2.9.3.1
Conductor and core-and-coil assembly
The current transformer includes the current conductor [1] (primary side) and the core-and-coil assembly
(secondary side).
The core-and-coil assembly of the current transformer consists of a base plate [5], inner electrodes [2],
grading electrodes [3] and ring cores with secondary winding [4].
The cores are wound tape. Every core has a secondary coil. The secondary winding consists of a ring coil
with layer winding and winding isolation. The layers are isolated from one another by foil. The wound cores
are glued to the internal electrode.
The base plate [5] is screwed to the housing and thereby earthed.
Pos : 4.10.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 015 - 8DN 8 5 T ext Ausführung als integrierter Stromwandler i m LS @ 14\mod_1359639008514_18.doc x @ 92865 @ @ 1
Current transformer model, integrated into circuit breaker
The conductors [1] as well as the housing of the current transformer are attached to the bushing of the
adjacent module, e.g. to the disconnector and earthing switch module. The conductors and core-and-coil
assembly both project into the circuit breaker. Plug-in leads establish the conductor connection to the current
path.
Pos : 4.10.22 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Sc hni tt Stromwandl er kurz T yp1 @ 6\mod_1344159811493_0.doc x @ 43494 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.23 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Schnitt Stromwandler kurz T yp1 @ 2\mod_1335514881408_18.doc x @ 14761 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Conductor
Inner electrode
Grading electrodes
Core with the secondary windings
Baseplate
Bushing
Fig. 2-54
Section of an integrated current transformer, short version
Pos : 4.10.24 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 030 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Sc hni tt Stromwandl er lang T yp2 @ 6\mod_1344159854866_0.doc x @ 43518 @ @ 1
2-123
r
Description
Pos : 4.10.25 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 030 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Schnitt Stromwandler lang T yp2 @ 2\mod_1335515077401_18.doc x @ 14772 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Conductor
Inner electrode
Grading electrodes
Core with the secondary windings
Baseplate
Bushing
Fig. 2-55
Section of an integrated current transformer, long version
Pos : 4.10.26 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 040 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 T ext Ausführ ung als separater Stromwandl er @ 2\mod_1335515709559_18.doc x @ 14783 @ @ 1
Current transformer separate version
The conductors [1] are screwed in at the bushing end [6]. At the other end, the conductors are connected to
the bushing of the adjacent module, mostly the disconnector and earthing switch module of the busbar, via a
plug connector.
Pos : 4.10.27 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 060 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Sc hni tt Stromwandl er D oppel T yp 3 & 4 @ 6\mod_1344159898255_0.doc x @ 43542 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.28 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 060 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Schnitt Stromwandler Doppel T yp 3 & 4 @ 2\mod_1335516251244_18.doc x @ 14794 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Conductor
Inner electrode
Grading electrodes
Core with the secondary windings
Baseplate
Bushing
Fig. 2-56
Section of a separate current transformer, double-long version
2-124
Description
Pos : 4.10.29 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 050 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Sc hni tt Stromwandl er D oppel T yp 5 & 6 @ 6\mod_1344159939207_0.doc x @ 43566 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.30 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.1 Str omleiter und Akti vteil 050 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu Schnitt Stromwandler Doppel T yp 5 & 6 @ 2\mod_1335516256525_18.doc x @ 14805 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Conductor
Inner electrode
Grading electrodes
Core with the secondary windings
Baseplate
Bushing
Fig. 2-57
Section of a separate current transformer, double-short version
Pos : 4.10.31 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-125
r
Description
Pos : 4.10.32 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.2 Sekundär anschl uß 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335516708519_18.doc x @ 14816 @ 4 @ 1
2.9.3.2
Secondary terminal
The secondary leads are cast in the secondary terminal panel in a pressure-proof, gas-tight manner and lead
out of the gas compartment.
If required by the customer, the connection of the secondary leads with the measuring leads vie crimp or
clamp connections will be carried out.
Pos : 4.10.33 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.2 Sekundär anschl uß 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 6\mod_1344159996876_0.doc x @ 43590 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.34 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.2 Sekundär anschl uß 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 2\mod_1335517408990_18.doc x @ 14827 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Housing
Secondary leads
Secondary terminal panels
Fig. 2-58
Secondary terminal with crimp connection
Pos : 4.10.35 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.2 Sekundär anschl uß 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335517765344_18.doc x @ 14838 @ @ 1
Terminal connection
The secondary leads are guided to the terminal strip where they are connected to the measuring leads.
Pos : 4.10.36 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.2 Sekundär anschl uß 040 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 6\mod_1344160033375_0.doc x @ 43614 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.37 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.2 Sekundär anschl uß 040 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 2\mod_1335518264339_18.doc x @ 14849 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Terminal strip
Anti-condensation heating
Secondary terminal panels
Secondary leads
Housing
Fig. 2-59
Secondary terminal with terminal connection
Pos : 4.10.38 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-126
Description
Pos : 4.10.39 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3.2 Sekundär anschl uß 050 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335518685140_18.doc x @ 14860 @ @ 1
Attention
Current transformers operate under almost short-circuit conditions The CT may be
damaged if the terminal strip is not properly connected, i.e. no open circuits.
Voltage peaks of several 10 kV may occur!
• Do not operate the current transformer with open secondary circuit!
Pos : 4.10.40 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 01 @ 24\mod_1390814123765_18.doc x @ 226503 @ 3 @ 1
2.9.4
Terminal designations
With reference to current transformers, IEC 61869 prescribes the use of "P1” and "P2”, for the primary
conductor, for the secondary leads "1S1" and "1S2" for the first core,"2S1" and "2S2" for the second core,
etc.
Pos : 4.10.41 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 02 - Bil d4 @ 6\mod_1344154761380_0.doc x @ 42244 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.42 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 02 - Bil du @ 24\mod_1390811620830_18.doc x @ 226440 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-60
Terminal designations to IEC 61869 of a current transformer with three secondary
windings (each secondary winding with its own core)
Pos : 4.10.43 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 03 @ 2\mod_1335519738954_18.doc x @ 14893 @ @ 1
The characters “P1” and “P2” also mark the mounting position with reference to the circuit-breaker as shown
on the switchgear overview diagram. These characters are punched into the outer flange of the housing.
Pos : 4.10.44 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 04 - Bil d5 @ 6\mod_1344154925264_0.doc x @ 42338 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.45 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 04 - Bil du @ 2\mod_1335519921232_18.doc x @ 14904 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-61
Identification of CT mounting position referred to the circuit-breaker to IEC
Pos : 4.10.46 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.47 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 05 @ 2\mod_1335521075425_18.doc x @ 14915 @ @ 1
2-127
r
Description
For detecting varying primary currents, the secondary windings of current transformers are provided with
taps.
The numbers on the winding between the taps indicate the ratios. A current transformer with reconnectable
ratios can be recognized from the way in which the ratio is written, e.g. 1200-800-500 / 1A, the maximum
primary current always being at the beginning.
Pos : 4.10.48 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 06 - Bil d6 @ 6\mod_1344155070071_0.doc x @ 42362 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.10.49 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 06 - Bil du @ 24\mod_1390815029541_18.doc x @ 226524 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-62
Terminal designation to IEC 61869 of a current transformer with secondary winding tap
(ratios entered)
Other regulations may stipulate other terminal designations.
Pos : 4.10.50 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-128
Description
Pos : 4.11.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungs wandler/2.12 Spannungs wandler @ 2\mod_1335524288830_18.doc x @ 14937 @ 2 @ 1
2.10 Voltage transformer
This section describes:
-
use of voltage transformers
external design
internal design
the terminal box
terminal designations.
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Nameplates [ 1.4]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Order documentation
Pos : 4.11.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungs wandler/2.12.1 Ver wendung - 8D alle - allgemei ner Text @ 2\mod_1335524511805_18.doc x @ 14948 @ 3 @ 1
2.10.1 Use
Voltage transformers step the operating voltage down to values which are suitable for measuring instruments
and protective devices connected and also for earth fault detection.
Inductive voltage transformers are used in the switchgear installation.
Depending on the different demands made on voltage transformers, there are variations in
- the outer dimensions
- the design and number of secondary windings
- the number of secondary taps.
The gas compartment of the voltage transformer is monitored separately.
The voltage transformer is evacuated in the factory and provided with an SF6 transport filling.
The voltage transformer can be mounted in any location, the actual location being determined by the
switchgear configuration in hand.
Pos : 4.11.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-129
r
Description
Pos : 4.11.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungs wandler/2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 010 - 8D alle - allgemeiner T ext @ 29\mod_1422967532786_18.doc x @ 272675 @ 3 @ 1
2.10.2 External design
The housing [1], bushing [2] and cover [3] form the enclosure of the voltage transformer. After assembly by
the manufacturer, these parts are interconnected gas-tight and pressure-proof.
The cast-resin bushing corresponds in design to the other gas-proof bushing used elsewhere in the
switchgear installation.
The terminal box [4], the nameplate and the Rupture disk assembly [5] are located at the cover.
The housing has multiple flanges that are, depending on the installation location and other operating
conditions, furnished with gas maintenance points and a valve block.
The gas monitoring system is mounted to the valve block after the voltage transformer has been delivered to
the construction site.
Pos : 4.11.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungs wandler 2.12.2 Äußer er Aufbau 025 - 8DN8 5 Bild Spannungs wandler ohne Tr ennstr ec ke @ 28\mod_1422883828248_0.doc x @ 272188 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.11.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungs wandler 2.12.2 Äußer er Aufbau 025 - Bil du Spannungs wandler ohne Tr enns trec ke Allg. @ 28\mod_1422959076046_18.doc x @ 272565 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Housing
Bushing
Cover
Terminal box
Rupture disk assembly
Fig. 2-63
Voltage transformer without integrated insulating section.
Pos : 4.11.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-130
Description
Pos : 4.11.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungs wandler/2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 030 - Spannungswandl er mit i ntegrierter Trenns trec ke - Hinweistext @ 2\mod_1335526545960_18.doc x @ 14981 @ @ 1
Voltage transformer with integrated isolating distance
The voltage transformer is furnished with an integrated insulating section.
Attention
The insulating section is not suitable for switching the transformer under voltage.
If the insulating section of the transformer under voltage is actuated, the
transformer will be severely damaged.
• Switch off the voltage to the transformer before actuating the insulating section.
Pos : 4.11.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungs wandler 2.12.2 Äußer er Aufbau 040 - 8DN8 5 Bild Spannungs wandler mit integrierter T S (Hand) @ 28\mod_1422869142374_0.doc x @ 272166 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.11.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 041 - Bildu Spannungs wandl er mit i ntegrierter TS (Hand) Allg. @ 29\mod_1422960014018_18.doc x @ 272587 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Housing
Bushing
Cover
Terminal box
Rupture disk assembly
Manual drive of the integrated insulating section
Fig. 2-64
Voltage transformer with integrated insulating section (manual drive)
Pos : 4.11.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 050 - 8DN 8 5 Bild Spannungs wandl er mit i ntegrierter TS (Motor) @ 33\mod_1467641289219_0.doc x @ 337054 @ @ 1
2-131
r
Description
Pos : 4.11.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 051 - Bildu Spannungs wandl er mit i ntegrierter TS (Motor) Allg. @ 28\mod_1422957788577_18.doc x @ 272467 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Housing
Bushing
Cover
Terminal box
Rupture disk assembly
Motor drive of the integrated insulating section
Fig. 2-65
Voltage transformer with integrated insulating section (motor drive)
Pos : 4.11.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.3 Innerer Aufbau 010 - 8DN8 - Akti vteile @ 29\mod_1422972088045_18.doc x @ 272719 @ 3 @ 1
2.10.3 Core-and-coil assembly
The heart of the voltage transformer are the core-and-coil assemblies.
The core-and-coil assemblies are attached to the cover. They consist of iron cores with secondary windings,
and a single-stage primary winding with high-voltage electrodes and terminals.
The cores are of nested limb-type design. To hinder ferroresonances, the cores have been configured over
an air gap.
Primary windings sit on secondary windings which sit on the cores. All windings are of multi-layer winding
design, with plastic foil isolating the layers.
High-voltage electrodes control the electrical field.
High-voltage terminals of the core-and-coil assemblies are connected with the bushing using flexible
elements.
The ends of the primary winding (rated for 3 kV insulation voltage) are lead into the terminal box where they
are earthed.
Owing to the non-linear behaviour of inductances and the high thermal time constants of the primary coils,
there are maximum load capacitances with which the transformers may be thermally and dynamically
stressed in the disconnection of cables and overhead lines.
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Pos : 4.11.14 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.11.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.4 Klemmenkasten 01 - 8D alle @ 2\mod_1335528102891_18.doc x @ 15036 @ 3 @ 1
2-132
Description
2.10.4 Terminal box
In the terminal box, secondary terminal boards and the earth connection of the primary winding are lead out
(gas-tight and insulated) over bushing wires which enter the bushing plate [1]. The bushing plate closes off
the housing gas-tight and pressure-proof.
The secondary leads and the measuring leads which extend to the terminal board [2] are attached to
bushing wires with crimped connectors.
The terminal strip, which is located in the terminal box, accommodates the control cables for connecting the
protection and measuring devices. The control cables are routed out of the terminal box via cable conduits.
Warning
On energized substations, the earth connection terminal block accessible in
the terminal box will have full operating voltage if the jumper between the
earth terminal and the earth connection terminal block is removed.
• Open the bridge only when voltage transformers are isolated and only for the duration of
the measurements!
Voltage transformers operate at almost no load.
The voltage transformer would be destroyed if the secondary windings short-circuit.
• Do not short-circuit secondary windings of voltage transformers!
Pos : 4.11.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.4 Klemmenkasten 02 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bild @ 6\mod_1344161842884_0.doc x @ 43710 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.11.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.4 Klemmenkasten 03 - Bildu allg @ 2\mod_1335528530389_18.doc x @ 15047 @ @ 1
1
2
Terminal strip
Bushing plate
Fig. 2-66
Terminal box, cover removed
Pos : 4.11.18 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-133
r
Description
Pos : 4.11.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 01 @ 24\mod_1390812471489_18.doc x @ 226482 @ 3 @ 1
2.10.5 Terminal designations
In accordance with IEC 61869 the ends of the primary winding of voltage transformers are designated with
“A” (high-voltage connection) and “N” (earth connection) and the ends of the secondary winding with “a” and
“n”.
Secondary windings with several taps are numbered consecutively, e.g. “1a1”, “1a2”, “1n” for winding 1 and
“2a1”, “2a2”, “2n” for winding 2.
Pos : 4.11.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 02 - Bil d @ 6\mod_1344155245564_0.doc x @ 42386 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.11.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 02 - Bil du @ 24\mod_1390811683539_18.doc x @ 226461 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-67
Terminal designations of a voltage transformer with one secondary winding with tap to
IEC 61869
Other regulations may stipulate other terminal designations.
Pos : 4.11.22 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-134
Description
Pos : 4.12.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13 RC-Spannungsteil er @ 2\mod_1335530242567_18.doc x @ 15080 @ 2 @ 1
2.11 RC divider
This section describes:
-
the use of the RC divider
the external design
the internal design
the connection.
Basic information:
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Order documentation
Pos : 4.12.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.1 Verwendung @ 2\mod_1335531204604_18.doc x @ 15091 @ 3 @ 1
2.11.1 Use
RC voltage dividers reduce the operating voltage of the switchgear corresponding with the divider voltage to
values which are suitable for measuring instruments and protective devices connected. RC voltage dividers
provide this output value with a high precision to the overriding system as an analogue signal.
The power output is low, but is more than sufficient for the demands of modern protection and energy
counting systems.
The divider ratio varies according to the different demands of the connectible systems.
RC voltage divider are single-pole or triple-pole encapsulated and form a common gas compartment with the
adjacent module. A version as an enclosed gas chamber is available.
Pos : 4.12.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-135
r
Description
Pos : 4.12.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.2 Äußer er Aufbau 01 - 8DN 8 5 @ 2\mod_1335531321407_18.doc x @ 15102 @ 3 @ 1
2.11.2 External design
The RC divider is supported by the cover [1]. The housing [2] is connected with the switchgear module via
the flange A in a gas-tight and pressure-proof manner.
Pos : 4.12.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.2 Äußer er Aufbau 02 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d1 @ 7\mod_1345625272195_0.doc x @ 52650 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.12.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.2 Äußer er Aufbau 02 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du @ 2\mod_1335531946263_18.doc x @ 15113 @ @ 1
A
Flange
1
2
3
4
Cover
Housing
Secondary box
Coaxial cable
Fig. 2-68
External view of the RC divider
Pos : 4.12.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-136
Description
Pos : 4.12.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.3 Innerer Aufbau 01 - 8DN 8 5 @ 2\mod_1335532487221_18.doc x @ 15124 @ 3 @ 1
2.11.3 Internal design
The RC divider is of triple-phase design. Each one of these dividers consists of a high and low-voltage unit.
High and low-voltage units consist of parallel connected resistors and capacitors.
The high-voltage unit (primary part) is installed with 70 % of the secondary capacity of the low-voltage unit in
the main insulator [3]. The rest of the secondary capacity is located with the secondary resistor in the
secondary box [1].
The electrical components in the main insulator are surrounded by oil.
The low-voltage is lead out of the secondary box via a coaxial cable [2].
Pos : 4.12.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.3 Innerer Aufbau 02 - 8DN 8 5 Bild @ 7\mod_1345626574513_0.doc x @ 52674 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.12.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.13 RC- Spannungs teil er/2.13.3 Inner er Aufbau 02 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du @ 7\mod_1345627788052_18.doc x @ 52698 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Secondary box
Coaxial cable
Main isolator
Fig. 2-69
Section of a RC divider
Pos : 4.12.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.13 RC- Spannungs teil er/2.13.4 Ans chl uß @ 5\mod_1340275793575_18.doc x @ 20274 @ 3 @ 1
2.11.4 Connection
The Secondary cables that are guided out of the secondary box are connected unabridged with the
measuring instruments and protective devices. The identification of the secondary cables corresponds with
the conductor identification of the switchgear.
Pos : 4.12.12 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-137
r
Pos : 4.13.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/3.12 /2.14 Kompens atoren @ 2\mod_1335533011962_18.doc x @ 15146 @ 2 @ 1
2-138
Description
Description
2.12 Expansion joints
This section presents:
- the use of the expansion joints
- the design of the expansion joints
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Pos : 4.13.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/3.12.1 /2.14.1 Ver wendung 010 @ 2\mod_1335533720314_18.doc x @ 15157 @ 3 @ 1
2.12.1 Use
Expansion joints compensate for changes in the length of the housings caused by temperature changes,
permissible module design tolerances and, to a certain extent, axial, lateral and angular inaccuracies of the
erection site.
Due to their flexibility, the expansion joints can also support the removal of adjacent modules.
Pos : 4.13.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.1 Ver wendung 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild1 @ 5\mod_1341564438171_0.doc x @ 35170 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.13.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.1 Ver wendung 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 2\mod_1335534040665_18.doc x @ 15168 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-70
a) axial
b) lateral
c) angular
Subjections of the expansion joints
Pos : 4.13.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-139
r
Description
Pos : 4.13.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.2 Bauarten - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335534208730_18.doc x @ 15179 @ 3 @ 1
2.12.2 Types of structure
Pos : 4.13.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en2.14.2.1 Druc kausgeglichener Sc hiebekompens ator 010 - 8DN 8 5 @ 32\mod_1459758719565_18.doc x @ 329562 @ 4 @ 1
2.12.2.1 Pressure-balanced sliding expansion joint
The pressure-balanced sliding expansion joint is based on the principle of a sliding double seal. In addition, it
also takes up axial movements and is used to compensate for fitting tolerances and thermally influenced
length changes.
The expansion joint is pressure-balanced and thus will not release any reaction forces, even under gas
pressure.
The expansion joint has a gas connection and two ventilation connections. One of the two ventilation
connections is located at the lowest position so that condensing moisture can flow away without hindrance.
In the largest version, the expansion joint forms its own gas chamber with rupture disc device and filter
holder. The current track can be split.
Due to their flexibility, pressure-balanced sliding expansion joints can also support the removal of adjacent
modules.
Pos : 4.13.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.2.1 Dr uc kausg eglichener Schi ebekompensator 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bild @ 6\mod_1344155486586_0.doc x @ 42410 @ @ 1
c)
Pos : 4.13.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.2.1 Dr uc kausg eglichener Schi ebekompensator 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu @ 2\mod_1335534866930_18.doc x @ 15201 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-71
Pressure-balanced sliding expansion joint
a) c) Version with common gas chamber
b) Version with separate gas chamber and split current track
Pos : 4.13.10 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.13.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kompens atoren/2.14.2.2 Aus bau- Link 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335535003108_18.doc x @ 15212 @ 4 @ 1
2-140
Description
2.12.2.2 Removal link
The removal link is a corrugated tube expansion joint held in position with a tie-rod. It cannot compensate for
any operational movements.
The expansion joint also does not compensate for lateral or angular tolerances.
Furthermore, it supports fitting and removal of adjacent disconnector and earthing switch modules in the
common rail, for example. To do this, the tie-rod thread is tensioned axially, thus creating a 10 mm wide gap.
Pos : 4.13.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kompens atoren/2.14.2.2 Aus bau- Link 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bild @ 6\mod_1344155559271_0.doc x @ 42434 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.13.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kompens atoren/2.14.2.2 Aus bau- Link 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 2\mod_1335535221077_18.doc x @ 15223 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-72
Removal link
Pos : 4.13.14 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-141
r
Description
Pos : 4.13.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kompens atoren/2.14.2.3 Lateral kompens ator 010 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 2\mod_1335535423281_18.doc x @ 15234 @ 4 @ 1
2.12.2.3 Lateral expansion joint
The lateral expansion joint consists of an intermediate housing and two angular-acting corrugated tube
expansion joints. It can be used:
- for compensation of fitting tolerances by pre-tensioning the tie-rods axially, laterally and in an angular
direction
- for compensation of operational movements after fixing the tie-rods exclusively laterally.
Since the movement of the lateral expansion joint is also limited by the internal line connections, the relevant
instructions in this operating instruction manual should be taken into account during fitting and dismantling.
Assembling the switchgear [4.3]
Pos : 4.13.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kompens atoren/2.14.2.3 Lateral kompens ator 020 - 8DN8 5 Bil d @ 6\mod_1344155634393_0.doc x @ 42458 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.13.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kompens atoren/2.14.2.3 Lateral kompens ator 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu @ 2\mod_1335535589580_18.doc x @ 15245 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-73
Lateral expansion joint
Pos : 4.13.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kompens atoren/2.14.2.3 Lateral kompens ator 021 - 8DN8 5 Bil d MCP @ 29\mod_1424342365280_0.doc x @ 273497 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.13.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kompens atoren/2.14.2.3 Lateral kompens ator 021 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu MC P @ 29\mod_1424342419959_18.doc x @ 273519 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-74
Lateral expansion joint
Pos : 4.13.20 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-142
Description
Pos : 4.14.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15 Sammels chi ene @ 2\mod_1335535810048_18.doc x @ 15256 @ 2 @ 1
2.13 Busbar
This section describes
- the use and
- design of the busbar.
Basic information:
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Housing and conductor connections [ 2.18]
Pos : 4.14.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.1 Ver wendung - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335535922227_18.doc x @ 15267 @ 3 @ 1
2.13.1 Use
The busbar connects the bays of the switchgear. Its phasing is segregated bay-by-bay.
The busbar is of active design. Integrated disconnector and earthing switch modules can be used to switch
current paths on or off and/or to earth them.
Pos : 4.14.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-143
r
Description
Pos : 4.14.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 2\mod_1335776054001_18.doc x @ 15280 @ 3 @ 1
2.13.2 Construction
The busbars are triple-pole encapsulated.
Two adjacent bays are firmly connected to the disconnector-earthing-module.
Removal links facilitate the disassembly of the disconnector and earthing switch modules.
Expansion joints axially compensate the temperature-related changes in length in the busbar run.
Pos : 4.14.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bild1 Sammelsc hiene ausgeführt mi t Sammellink und Kompensator en @ 7\mod_1345637526547_0.doc x @ 52723 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.14.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu Sammelsc hiene ausgeführt mit Sammelli nk und Kompensator en @ 2\mod_1335781117120_18.doc x @ 15302 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Expansion joint
Removal link
Tie-rod
Disconnector and earthing switch module
Fig. 2-75
Busbar, designed with removal link and expansion joints
a) External view
b) Sectional view
Pos : 4.14.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-144
Description
Pos : 4.14.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 T ext z u Verlänger ungs baustei n z wisc hen den Doppelfel der n @ 2\mod_1335778016274_18.doc x @ 15291 @ @ 1
For an easier access to the bay component, an extension module increases the distance between the
double-bays.
Pos : 4.14.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 040 - 8DN 8 5 Bild2 Sammelsc hiene, mit Ausbaulink, Verlänger ungs baustei n und Kompens ato @ 7\mod_1345637961598_0.doc x @ 52747 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.14.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Sammelsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 040 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du Sammelschi ene, mit Aus bauli nk, Verlängerungsbaustein und Kompens ato @ 2\mod_1335785506044_18.doc x @ 15320 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Expansion joint
Extension module 300 mm
Removal link
Tie-rod
Disconnector and earthing switch module
Fig. 2-76
Busbar, designed with removal link and expansion joints
a) External view
b) Sectional view
Pos : 4.14.11 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-145
r
Description
Pos : 4.14.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Sammelsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 050 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d3 Sammelschi enen-Längs trennung, Li nk, Trenn- und Er dungssc hal ter @ 7\mod_1345638417667_0.doc x @ 52771 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.14.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Sammelsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 051 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bil du Sammels chi enen-Längstr ennung, Li nk, Trenn- und Er dungssc hal @ 2\mod_1335786773781_18.doc x @ 15331 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Removal link
Disconnector and earthing switch module
Passive disconnector and earthing switch module
Fig. 2-77
Busbar slitting, designed with removal link and passive disconnector and earthing
switch module
a) External view
b) Sectional view
Pos : 4.14.14 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-146
Description
Pos : 4.14.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Sammelsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 060 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d4 Sammelschi enen-Längs kuppl ung, ausgeführt mit Kompens ator und Verlän @ 7\mod_1345639595252_0.doc x @ 52795 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.14.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Sammelsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 061- 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu Sammelsc hienen- Längs kupplung, ausgeführt mit Kompensator u @ 2\mod_1335788008412_18.doc x @ 15342 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Earthing switches
Expansion joint
Disconnector and earthing switch module
Fig. 2-78
Busbar-longitudinal clutch, designed with expansion joints and extension module
a) External view
b) Sectional view
Pos : 4.14.17 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-147
r
Pos : 4.15.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.16 Drei polige Verbi ndungs baus tei ne/2.14 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine 010 - 8DN 8 @ 2\mod_1335941530587_18.doc x @ 15360 @ 2 @ 1
2-148
Description
Description
2.14 Three-pole connection modules
This section describes the 3-pole connection module of the switchgear.
Basic information:
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Housing and conductor connections [ 2.18]
3-pole connection modules join the bays of the switchgear based on their operating requirements for, among
other reasons, the anticipated availability of the system and its link to the electrical power supply network .
Pos : 4.15.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.16 Drei polige Verbi ndungs baus tei ne/2.14 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bild SS-Verläng erungsbaustein T yp 1 @ 6\mod_1344155872662_0.doc x @ 42482 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.16 Drei polige Verbi ndungs baus tei ne/2.14 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu SS-Verlänger ungs baustei n T yp 1 @ 2\mod_1335942188896_18.doc x @ 15371 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-79
Extension module
Pos : 4.15.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.16 Drei polige Verbi ndungs baus tei ne/2.14 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine 030 - 8DN 8 5 Bild SS-Verläng erungsbs T yp2+ 3 400mm eins chl Link @ 6\mod_1344155927595_0.doc x @ 42506 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.16 Drei polige Verbi ndungs baus tei ne/2.14 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine 030 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu SS- Verlänger ungs bs T yp2+3 400mm ei nsc hl Link @ 2\mod_1335944630688_18.doc x @ 15382 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-80
Extension module 400 mm, including removal link
Pos : 4.15.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.16 Drei polige Verbi ndungs baus tei ne/2.14 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine 036 - 8DN 8 5 Bild SS-Verläng erungsbs T yp 3 MCP @ 28\mod_1421748002238_0.doc x @ 271629 @ @ 1
2-149
r
Pos : 4.15.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.16 Drei polige Verbi ndungs baus tei ne/2.14 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine 036 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu SS- Verlänger ungs bs T yp 3 MC P @ 28\mod_1421748017054_18.doc x @ 271673 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-81
Extension module 400 mm, including removal link
Pos : 4.15.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.16 Drei polige Verbi ndungs baus tei ne/2.14 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine 040 - 8DN 8 5 Bild SS-Verläng erungsbs T yp4+ 5 500mm für s ep Gasr m @ 6\mod_1344155980386_0.doc x @ 42530 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.16 Drei polige Verbi ndungs baus tei ne/2.14 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine 041 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu SS-Verlänger ung T yp 4+ 5, 3, 500mm @ 2\mod_1335944654594_18.doc x @ 15393 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-82
Extension module 500 mm for separate gas chamber
Pos : 4.15.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 060 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d SS- Verl.bst T yp 6 600mm Li nk für sep Gas @ 6\mod_1344156034585_0.doc x @ 42554 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 060 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du SS-Verl.bs T yp 6 600mm Link für s ep Gas @ 2\mod_1335944751057_18.doc x @ 15492 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-83
Extension module 600 mm with removal link for separate gas chamber
Pos : 4.15.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 062 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d SS- Verl.bst T yp 7 340 mm @ 29\mod_1427452714980_0.doc x @ 275501 @ @ 1
2-150
Description
Description
Pos : 4.15.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 062 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du SS-Verl.bs T yp 7 340 mm @ 29\mod_1427452839806_18.doc x @ 275523 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-84
Extension module, 340 mm
Pos : 4.15.14 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 065 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d Schnitt Verlänger ungs baustei n T yp1 @ 6\mod_1344156101629_0.doc x @ 42578 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 065 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du Sc hnitt Verlängerungsbaustein T yp1 @ 2\mod_1335944754478_18.doc x @ 15503 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-85
Extension module, 400 ... 2.000 mm
Pos : 4.15.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 070 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d Schnitt Verlänger ungs baustei n T yp 2 @ 6\mod_1344156174329_0.doc x @ 42602 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 070 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du Sc hnitt Verlängerungsbaustein T yp 2 @ 2\mod_1335944669625_18.doc x @ 15404 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-86
Extension module, 900 ... 7,000 mm
Pos : 4.15.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 080 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d Schnitt Ü bergangsbaustein 8DN 8 5 auf 8DN8 2 @ 6\mod_1344156218753_0.doc x @ 42626 @ @ 1
2-151
r
Pos : 4.15.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 080 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du Sc hnitt Ü bergangs baus tei n auf 8DN8 2 @ 2\mod_1335944678172_18.doc x @ 15415 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-87
Reducer module
Pos : 4.15.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 090 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d Schnitt Winkelbaustein 90° @ 6\mod_1344156258599_0.doc x @ 42670 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.22 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 090 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du Sc hnitt Wi nkelbaustein 90° @ 2\mod_1335944697875_18.doc x @ 15426 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-88
Angle module, 90°
Pos : 4.15.23 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 100 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d Endbaustein s ep. Gasraum @ 6\mod_1344156317523_0.doc x @ 42694 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.24 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 102 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du Endbaus tei n s ep. Gasraum @ 2\mod_1335944703578_18.doc x @ 15437 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-89
End module for separate gas chamber
Pos : 4.15.25 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 110 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d Endbaustein gemeins amer Gasraum @ 6\mod_1344156368869_0.doc x @ 42748 @ @ 1
2-152
Description
Description
Pos : 4.15.26 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 112 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du Endbaus tei n g emei nsamer Gasr aum @ 2\mod_1335944707530_18.doc x @ 15448 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-90
End module for common gas chamber
Pos : 4.15.27 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 130 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d Schnitt Kr eubaustei n passi v @ 6\mod_1344157120987_0.doc x @ 42772 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.28 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 130 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du Sc hnitt Kreuz baus tei n pas si v @ 2\mod_1335944716842_18.doc x @ 15470 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-91
Cross module, passive
Pos : 4.15.29 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 140 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d Schnitt Y- Baustei n @ 6\mod_1344157166001_0.doc x @ 42866 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.15.30 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.16 Dr eipolige Ver bindungs bausteine/2.14 Drei polige Verbi ndungsbausteine 140 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du Sc hnitt Y-Baustein @ 2\mod_1335944745511_18.doc x @ 15481 @ @ 1
Fig. 2-92
Y component
Pos : 4.15.31 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-153
r
Pos : 4.16.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17 Freil eitungs ansc hl uß-Baus tei n @ 2\mod_1335946380153_18.doc x @ 15514 @ 2 @ 1
2-154
Description
Description
2.15 Overhead line connection module
This section describes:
- the use of the overhead line connection module
- the external design of the overhead connection module
- the internal design of the overhead line connection module
Basic information:
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Housing and conductor connections [ 2.18]
Pos : 4.16.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.1 Ver wendung @ 2\mod_1335946616682_18.doc x @ 15525 @ 3 @ 1
2.15.1 Use
The conductors are routed out of the bay gas compartments via the overhead line connector modules so that
bare conductors can be connected to them. The three outdoor bushings per bay are normally of the same
design.
Pos : 4.16.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 2\mod_1335947141659_18.doc x @ 15540 @ 3 @ 1
2.15.2 External design
The overhead connection module consists of the outdoor bushing [1] and the angle module [2].
Pos : 4.16.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d1 Freilei tungsansc hluß mit Aufteilungsbaustein T yp 2 @ 6\mod_1344157375696_0.doc x @ 42910 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.16.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du Freilei tungsansc hluß mit Aufteilungsbaustein T yp 2 @ 2\mod_1335947853941_18.doc x @ 15551 @ @ 1
1
2
Outdoor bushing
Distribution module
Fig. 2-93
Overhead line connection with distribution module
Pos : 4.16.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 021 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d2 Freilei tungsansc hluß mit Aufteilungsbaustein T yp 3 @ 6\mod_1344157431897_0.doc x @ 42934 @ @ 1
2-155
r
Pos : 4.16.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 021 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du Freilei tungsansc hluß mit Aufteilungsbaustein T yp 3 @ 2\mod_1335948012296_18.doc x @ 15562 @ @ 1
1
2
Outdoor bushing
Distribution module
Fig. 2-94
Overhead line connection with distribution module
Pos : 4.16.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 022 - 8DN 8 5 Bil d3 Freilei tungsansc hluß mit Aufteilungsbaustein T yp 4 @ 6\mod_1344157478270_0.doc x @ 42988 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.16.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 022 - 8DN 8 5 Bil du Freilei tungsansc hluß mit Aufteilungsbaustein T yp 4 @ 2\mod_1335948537569_18.doc x @ 15580 @ @ 1
1
2
Outdoor bushing
Distribution module
Fig. 2-95
Overhead line connection with distribution module
Pos : 4.16.10 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-156
Description
Description
Pos : 4.16.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.17 Fr eileitungsansc hluss- Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 010 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 2\mod_1335948703194_18.doc x @ 15591 @ 3 @ 1
2.15.3 Internal design
The outdoor bushing [1] is connected gastight and pressure-resistant to the distribution module [2]. Coupling
contacts [3] connect the conductors of the open-air bushings with the conductors of the distribution module.
Pos : 4.16.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.17 Fr eileitungsansc hluss- Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 020 - 8DN8 5 Bil d4 Freilei tungsansc hluß , Schnitt (Aufteilungs bst. T yp2) @ 6\mod_1344157563751_0.doc x @ 43012 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.16.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.17 Fr eileitungsansc hluss- Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 020 - 8DN8 5 Bil du Freilei tungsansc hluß , Schnitt (Aufteilungs bst. T yp2) @ 2\mod_1335948932945_18.doc x @ 15602 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Outdoor bushing
Distributing module Typ 2
Coupling contact
Fig. 2-96
Open-air connection, sectional view
Pos : 4.16.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.17 Fr eileitungsansc hluss- Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 021 - 8DN8 5 Bil d5 Freilei tungsansc hluß , Schnitt (Aufteilungs bst. T yp3) @ 6\mod_1344157609484_0.doc x @ 43036 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.16.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.17 Fr eileitungsansc hluss- Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 021 - 8DN8 5 Bil du Freilei tungsansc hluß , Schnitt (Aufteilungs bst. T yp3) @ 2\mod_1335949051390_18.doc x @ 15613 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Outdoor bushing
Distributing module Typ 3
Coupling contact
Fig. 2-97
Open-air connection, sectional view
Pos : 4.16.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.17 Fr eileitungsansc hluss- Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 022 - 8DN8 5 Bil d6 Freilei tungsansc hluß , Schnitt (Aufteilungs bst. T yp4) @ 6\mod_1344157709574_0.doc x @ 43080 @ @ 1
2-157
r
Pos : 4.16.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.17 Fr eileitungsansc hluss- Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 025 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du Freileitungsansc hluß , Schnitt (Aufteilungsbst. T yp4 @ 2\mod_1335949193419_18.doc x @ 15624 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Outdoor bushing
Distributing module Typ 4
Coupling contact
Fig. 2-98
Open-air connection, sectional view
Pos : 4.16.18 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-158
Description
Description
Pos : 4.17.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18 Kabel ansc hluß-Baustein @ 2\mod_1335949316248_18.doc x @ 15635 @ 2 @ 1
2.16 Cable connection module
This section describes
- application and
- the structure of a cable connection module.
Basic information:
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Housing and conductor connections [ 2.18]
Prerequisites [ 6.1]
Pos : 4.17.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.1 Ver wendung - 8DN8 5 @ 2\mod_1335950264495_18.doc x @ 15646 @ 3 @ 1
2.16.1 Range of application
The cable connection module connects the bay with the three high-voltage cables. Cable connections as per
IEC 62271-209 Clause 7.1/7.2 or other cable plug systems are suitable.
The cable connection module is normally mounted on the disconnector and earthing switch module.
A cable connection can also be realised with a cable disconnector.
Cable disconnector [ 2.7]
Pos : 4.17.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-159
Description
r
Pos : 4.17.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.2 Aufbau 010 - 8DN8 5 @ 2\mod_1335950440925_18.doc x @ 15657 @ 3 @ 1
2.16.2 Construction
The three cable sealing ends [3] are fed in via the apertures in the lower part of the enclosure. The enclosure
apertures are sealed gastight by pressure rings [4].
There is a bushing on flange A.
The rupture disk assembly [5], an optional PD-Coupler fitting [6] and/or another filter housing [7] are
connected to the housing [1].
Pos : 4.17.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.2 Aufbau 020 - 8DN8 5 Kabel ans chl ußbaustein T yp1 Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344194244613_0.doc x @ 43734 @ @ 1
A
5
6
1
2
3
7
4
Pos : 4.17.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.2 Aufbau 020 - 8DN8 5 Kabel ans chl ußbaustein T yp1 Bild1u @ 2\mod_1335950708743_18.doc x @ 15668 @ @ 1
A
Flange A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Housing
Conductor
Cable end closure
Bushing
Rupture disc assembly
PD-Coupler fitting (optional)
Filter housing (optional)
Fig. 2-99
Cable connection module, type 1
Pos : 4.17.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-160
Description
Pos : 4.17.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.2 Aufbau 040 - 8DN8 5 Hinweistext zu Kabel ans chl ußbaustein T yp2 @ 3\mod_1335951153535_18.doc x @ 15690 @ @ 1
The three cable plug-in bushings [3] are fed in via the openings in the lower part of the housing. The
enclosure apertures are sealed gas-tight by pressure rings [4].
The connection of the cable plug-in bushing [3] with the conductor [2] is carried out via the connector [10].

Note
Cable plugs shall only be mounted, inserted and screwed in by trained personnel.
Pos : 4.17.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.2 Aufbau 050 - 8DN8 5 Bild3 Kabelansc hlußbaustein T yp2 @ 6\mod_1344194356968_0.doc x @ 43782 @ @ 1
2
1
10
9
3
4
Pos : 4.17.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.18 Kabelansc hlus s-Baus tei n/2.18.2 Aufbau 050 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Kabelansc hluß baus tei n T yp 2 @ 3\mod_1335951833231_18.doc x @ 15701 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Housing
Conductor
Cable plug-in bushing
Pressure ring
9
10
Hand hole with cover
Connection piece
Fig. 2-100
Cable connection module, type 2
Pos : 4.17.11 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-161
Description
r
Pos : 4.17.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.18 Kabelansc hlus s-Baus tei n/2.18.2 Aufbau 025 - 8DN 8 5 D as H andl oc h ermöglicht di e D emontage.... @ 11\mod_1348134665030_18.doc x @ 66890 @ @ 1
The handhole [9] is provided for the purpose of assembly and dismantling.
Pos : 4.17.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.18 Kabelansc hlus s-Baus tei n/2.18.2 Aufbau 030 - 8DN 8 5 Bild2 Kabelansc hluß baus tei n T yp3 @ 6\mod_1344194302829_0.doc x @ 43758 @ @ 1
A
1
9
2
8
6
10
5
3
4
Pos : 4.17.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.18 Kabelansc hlus s-Baus tei n/2.18.2 Aufbau 030 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu Kabelansc hluß baus tei n T yp3 @ 2\mod_1335950889550_18.doc x @ 15679 @ @ 1
A
Flange A
1
2
3
4
5
6
Housing
Conductor
Cable sealing end / plug in bushing
Pressure ring
Rupture disk assembly
PD-Coupler fitting (optional)
8
9
10
Adapter
Hand hole with cover
Connection piece
Fig. 2-101
Cable connection module type 3 (example with inserted cable)
Pos : 4.17.15 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-162
Description
Pos : 4.17.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.18 Kabelansc hlus s-Baus tei n/2.18.2 Aufbau 025 - 8DN 8 5 Kabelansc hluß baus tei n T yp MC P Bild1 @ 27\mod_1404717639930_0.doc x @ 248530 @ @ 1
A
1
6
2
3
4
7
5
Pos : 4.17.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.18 Kabelansc hlus s-Baus tei n/2.18.2 Aufbau 025 - 8DN 8 5 Kabelansc hlus sbaustein T yp MCP Bild1u @ 27\mod_1405433546814_18.doc x @ 250031 @ @ 1
A
Flange A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Housing
Conductor
Cable end closure
Bushing
Rupture disc assembly
PD-Coupler fitting (optional)
Filter housing (optional)
Fig. 2-102
Cable connection module
Pos : 4.17.18 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-163
r
Pos : 4.18.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20 D ec kel, Filterhalterungen, Bers tsc hei benanbauten @ 3\mod_1335952063123_18.doc x @ 15712 @ 2 @ 1
2-164
Description
Description
2.17 Covers, filter mounts, rupture disk assemblies
This section presents:
- the use of covers, filter mounts and rupture disk assemblies
- the structure of covers, filter mounts and rupture disk assemblies.
Basic information:
Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Pos : 4.18.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.1 Ver wendung von Dec kel n, Filter hal ter ungen, Bersts cheiben D ec kel vers chli eßen 010 @ 3\mod_1335953368634_18.doc x @ 15734 @ 3 @ 1
2.17.1 Use of cover and filter holders
Covers are needed to seal the following gastight and pressure-resistant.
- Modules
- Manway openings
- Connections for monitoring, testing and diagnostic equipment.
Pos : 4.18.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.1 Ver wendung von Dec kel n, Filter hal ter ungen, Bersts cheiben D ec kel vers chli eßen 020 - 8DN 8 @ 5\mod_1340280160366_18.doc x @ 20515 @ @ 1
- Filter mounts hold the filter material present in the gas compartment.
Rupture disks function as rupture joints. In the event of a fault in the switchgear operation, e.g. caused by
stray light arcing, the gas pressure in the gas compartment increases. The rupture disk ruptures before the
pressure becomes too high for the gas compartment.
If the rupture disk bursts, diverters guide the gas flow away in a direction not hazardous to either personnel
or equipment. The direction of flow is shown in the switchgear drawings provided.
Pos : 4.18.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-165
r
Pos : 4.18.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.2 Aufbau - 8DN 8 @ 3\mod_1335952384993_18.doc x @ 15723 @ 3 @ 1
2.17.2 Design
Pos : 4.18.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.2.1 D ec kel und Filterhalterungen ohne Berstsc heibenanbauten 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 3\mod_1335953614546_18.doc x @ 15745 @ 4 @ 1
2.17.2.1 Covers and filter holders without rupture disc devices
There are several kinds of cover:
- Cover without attachments,
- Cover with internal filter holder
- Cover with external filter housing
There is at least one filter mount or filter housing for every gas compartment.
Pos : 4.18.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.2.1 D ec kel und Filterhalterungen ohne Berstsc heibenanbauten 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 6\mod_1344157880051_0.doc x @ 43104 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.18.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.2.1 D ec kel und Filterhalterungen ohne Berstsc heibenanbauten 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 3\mod_1335956326389_18.doc x @ 15756 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Cover
Sealing ring
Filter holder
Filter housing
Cover with A4 earthing connection
Fig. 2-103 Cover versions without rupture disc device
a) without attachments
b) with internal filter holder (for 8 or 14 filter bags)
c) with external filter housing (for 4 or 8 filter bags)
Inserting / replacing filter material [ 7.17]
Pos : 4.18.9 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-166
Description
Description
Pos : 4.18.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.20 D ec kel und Filterhalterungen/2.20.2.2 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ungen mi t Bersts cheibenanbauten 010 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 3\mod_1335956535473_18.doc x @ 15767 @ 4 @ 1
2.17.2.2 Covers and filter holders with rupture disc devices
Pos : 4.18.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.20 D ec kel und Filterhalterungen/2.20.2.2 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ungen mi t Bersts cheibenanbauten 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bild @ 6\mod_1344194492103_0.doc x @ 43806 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.18.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.20 D ec kel und Filterhalterungen/2.20.2.2 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ungen mi t Bersts cheibenanbauten 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu @ 3\mod_1335956678835_18.doc x @ 15778 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
Cover
Guard plate
Rupture disk
Diverter
Filter holder
Fig. 2-104 Cover versions with rupture disc device
a) Cover with rupture disc without diverting hood
b) Cover with rupture disc and diverter hood
c) Cover with rupture disc and diverting hood and filter holder
Fitting the rupture disks [ 7.18]
Pos : 4.18.13 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-167
r
Pos : 4.19.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiter ver bindungen/2.21 Gehäus e- und Lei ter verbi ndungen @ 3\mod_1335957137353_18.doc x @ 15789 @ 2 @ 1
2-168
Description
Description
2.18 Housing and conductor connections
This section contains a description of
- housing and housing connections
- conductor connections installed in the switchgear.
Basic information:
Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections [ 7.6]
Corrosion protection, greasing and oiling [ 7.20]
Bolted joints, tightening torques, locking tabs [ 7.24]
Pos : 4.19.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiter ver bindungen/2.21.1 Gehäus e- und Gehäus everbi ndung en @ 3\mod_1335957414713_18.doc x @ 15800 @ 3 @ 1
2.18.1 Housing and housing connections
Pos : 4.19.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiter ver bindungen/2.21.1.1 Hers tell ung und Pr üfung der Gehäuse - 8DN 8, 8DN 9 @ 3\mod_1335957741194_18.doc x @ 15822 @ 4 @ 1
2.18.1.1 Housing manufacture and testing
The chambers are manufactured and tested according to the latest state of the art.
The chambers are of cast aluminium.
Each housing is subjected to pressure and leakage testing with helium gas.
After the tests, the housings are sand-blasted and painted on the inside and outside.
Enclosures and/or covers made of steel for outdoor use are given a protective coating on the outside, e.g. a
layer of sprayed zinc or zinc dust paint, and the varnish layer is applied on top of this.
Pos : 4.19.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-169
r
Description
Pos : 4.19.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiter ver bindungen/2.21.1.2 Flansc he 010 @ 3\mod_1335957924276_18.doc x @ 15833 @ 4 @ 1
2.18.1.2 Flanges
Flanges are located at connecting points with other housing components, on assembly openings which are
fitted with covers and on connections for monitoring, testing and diagnosis fixtures.
One flange has a groove in which an O-ring is placed; the connecting flange has a sealing surface with only
a minor scallop height.
Approved pressure vessel bolts are used to secure the flanges.
Pos : 4.19.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiter ver bindungen/2.21.1.2 Flansc he 020 - Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344158004172_0.doc x @ 43158 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.19.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiter ver bindungen/2.21.1.2 Flansc he 020 - Bildu @ 3\mod_1335958268467_18.doc x @ 15844 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Sealing surface
Casing
Flange without groove, with sealing surface
Bolt hole
Sealing ring
Flange with groove
Fig. 2-105
Parts of a gastight and pressure-resistant joint prior to being bolted together
Pos : 4.19.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-170
Description
Pos : 4.19.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiter ver bindungen/2.21.1.3 Durc hführungen 010 @ 3\mod_1335958596214_18.doc x @ 15855 @ 4 @ 1
2.18.1.3 Bushings
Gastight and gas-permeable bushings are used in the switchgear.
Gastight bushings separate adjacent gas compartments.
Gas-permeable bushings join two adjacent modules by means of apertures arranged in a circle.
The bushing consists of a flange ring [1], cast-resin body [2] and electrode [3]. The cast-resin body is in the
aluminium flange ring, the electrode encapsulated in the cast-resin body.
Pos : 4.19.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.1.3 D urc hführ ung en 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild2 @ 6\mod_1344194527946_0.doc x @ 43830 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.19.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.1.3 D urc hführ ung en 020 - 8DN8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 3\mod_1335958601744_18.doc x @ 15866 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Flange ring
Cast resin body
Electrode
Fig. 2-106 3-pole bushings
a) gas-tight
b) gas-permeable
Pos : 4.19.12 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-171
r
Description
Pos : 4.19.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.2 Leiter ver bindungen 010 @ 3\mod_1335959006613_18.doc x @ 15877 @ 3 @ 1
2.18.2 Conductor connections
Rigid and flexible conductor connections are used in the switchgear.
Rigid conductor connections fix the inner structures in the cast resin bushings.
Flexible conductor connections compensate for manufacturing and installation tolerances and absorb the
thermal expansion of the conductors.
Pos : 4.19.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.2 Leiter ver bindungen 015 - 8DN 8 @ 5\mod_1340281371277_18.doc x @ 20536 @ @ 1
The following illustrations show the important connecting points for the building site assembly.
Pos : 4.19.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.2 Leiter ver bindungen 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 6\mod_1344194589724_0.doc x @ 43854 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.19.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.2 Leiter ver bindungen 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 3\mod_1335959016566_18.doc x @ 15888 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Screw
Connection piece
Conductor contact
Fig. 2-107
Coupling contact
Pos : 4.19.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.2 Leiter ver bindungen 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 6\mod_1344194628739_0.doc x @ 43878 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.19.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.2 Leiter ver bindungen 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 3\mod_1335959040876_18.doc x @ 15899 @ @ 1
1
Screw
Fig. 2-108
Fixed screw connection (1 x M16)
Pos : 4.19.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.2 Leiter ver bindungen 040 - 8DN 8 5 Bild @ 6\mod_1344194676549_0.doc x @ 43902 @ @ 1
2-172
Description
Pos : 4.19.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiter verbi ndungen/2.21.2 Leiter ver bindungen 040 - 8DN 8 5 Bildu @ 3\mod_1335959064921_18.doc x @ 15910 @ @ 1
1
Screw
Fig. 2-109
Fixed screw connection (1 x M12)
Pos : 4.19.21 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
2-173
r
Pos : 5.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3 Trans por t und Lag erung @ 0\mod_1330677580559_18.doc x @ 2691 @ 1 @ 1
2-174
Description
Shipment and storage
3 Shipment and storage
3-175
r

Pos : 5.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-176
Shipment and storage
Note
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in part, from
the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track guiding, the
location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary equipment.
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1 Verpac kung @ 0\mod_1330679722682_18.doc x @ 2713 @ 2 @ 1
3.1
Packaging
This section contains a description of
- use of packaging
- packaging design and manufacture.
Basic information:
Markings [ 3.2]
Receipt and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Handling of sealed packages [ 3.4]
Pos : 5.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.1 Ver wendung @ 27\mod_1409640506787_18.doc x @ 253220 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.1
Range of application
The packing is intended to protect the goods both in transit and when loading and unloading, as well as
during storage periods, to prevent any form of deterioration. The packing must protect the goods against
admissible strains of transportation, such as vibration, jolts, moisture (seawater, rain, snow, condensate). If
necessary, the packing must also keep the goods from inadmissibly changing their original position inside.
To permit the goods to be shipped safely, economically and in accordance with regulations, they must be
prepared ready for shipment prior to actual packing.
Taking into account the various influences on the goods (climate conditions, duration of transport and
storage, method of transport), several different types of packaging are used. The type of packaging is noted
on the packing slip and subsequently described.
Drawings on the packaging give information on the nature and arrangement of transport devices
Order documentation
Basic packaging
Partially suitable for shipment by road within Europe including ferries. During truck transport, the equipment
is protected by the tarpaulin of the truck.
Not suitable for outdoor storage.
Description
- module assemblies ready for transport on transport rack or wooden boles.
- Protection by tarpaulin of truck.

Note
The equipment does not have an own weather protection and no protection
against mechanical stresses, especially jolts.
Not suitable for outdoor storage!
3-177
Shipment and storage
r
Sealed packaging A 12
Suitable for all types of shipment and all climatic conditions, for a total shipping and storage period of up to
12 months.
Suitable for outdoor storage.
Ambient temperature +55 °C (+131 °F) to -40 °C (-40 °F).
2
2
Stacking capacity 1000 kg/m / 23730 lbs/ft . top area
Description
- Group of modules in basic packing (wooden case, weather-proof).
- Goods enclosed airtight in plastic foil, with desiccant added.

Note
Suitable for outdoor storage!
Sealed packaging A 24
Suitable for all types of shipment and all climatic conditions, for a total shipping and storage period of up to
24 months.
Suitable for outdoor storage.
Ambient temperature +55 °C (+131 °F) to -50 °C (-58 °F).
2
2
Stacking capacity 1000 kg/m / 23730 lbs/ft top area
Description
- Group of modules in basic packing (wooden case, weather-proof).
- Goods vacuum-sealed in an aluminum-plastic foil with added desiccant.

Note
Suitable for outdoor storage!
Designation on packages
The sealed packages are labelled as follows:
Time-limited storage of shipments [ 3.3.4.1]
Pos : 5.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-178
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.2 Aufbau und Hers tell ung 010 @ 27\mod_1410162819169_18.doc x @ 253730 @ 3 @ 1
3.1.2
Design and manufacture
The basic packing guarantees that modules and assemblies remain secure during transport and will not be
disturbed by surfaces of the transport vehicle or storage area. To this extent, wood and/or steel racks are
used.
The accessory items are delivered on wooden pallets, in open crates or sturdy corrugated-cardboard boxes.
The sealed packaging surrounds the contents on all sides with a barrier layer. The quantity of drying agent
contained in this barrier layer limits the relative humidity to a level of < 60%, a level which can cause no
damage to the contents of the packaging for the duration of their storage life. The amount of desiccant
depends on the crate surface area, the type of barrier (vapour permeability), the climatic conditions and
active life in months.
The factory-tested assemblies or bays are mounted on the transport elements. The transport elements
ensures secure standing during transport and storage.
Air-blister foil or PE foam plastic widths is used to cushion all sharp corners and edges of the goods, making
sure that they do not damage the foil applied in the next step.
Then the packaged goods is wrapped in foil and welded after inserting the desiccant. The air inside the
barrier has been evacuated; this is indicated by the clinging effect of the foil.
The crates for attachments consist of a solid wooden floor and also of boarding (with timbering) made
likewise of solid wood, plywood or other wood composite.
Pos : 5.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.2 Aufbau und Hers tell ung 020 - Bild @ 6\mod_1344157178138_0.doc x @ 42846 @ @ 1
Pos : 5.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.2 Aufbau und Hers tell ung 020 - Bildu @ 3\mod_1335961544650_18.doc x @ 15921 @ @ 1
1
2
3
PE foil
Air evacuator (partially)
Manual welder
Fig. 3-1
Welding the PE sheeting
Pos : 5.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.2 Aufbau und Hers tell ung 030 @ 6\mod_1344433172955_18.doc x @ 45847 @ @ 1
The side walls and a lid bracer made of squared timbers are attached to the crate floor of the sealed-packed
module and the crate closed off with its lid.
Pos : 5.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-179
r
Pos : 5.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2 M ar kier ungen @ 0\mod_1330681184830_18.doc x @ 2744 @ 2 @ 1
3-180
Shipment and storage
Shipment and storage
3.2
Markings
This section
- shows and explains the symbols used to mark individual packages
- describes the identification of shipping assemblies.
Basic information:
Packaging [ 3.1]
Receipt and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Pos : 5.12 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-181
Shipment and storage
r
Pos : 5.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.1 Bildz eic hen auf Pac kstüc ken 01 @ 26\mod_1399369000506_18.doc x @ 238870 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.1
Symbols on packages
The packing crates bear symbols which give instructions for safe transport and proper storage.
For the dispatch of non-hazardous goods, the symbols to DIN EN ISO 780 apply, and must be strictly
observed.

Note
In addition to the following symbols, further notices may appear as text or
illustrations.
Pos : 5.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.1 Bildz eic hen auf Pac kstüc ken 02 - Bild1 @ 26\mod_1399368083323_0.doc x @ 238830 @ @ 1
Pos : 5.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.1 Bildz eic hen auf Pac kstüc ken 02 - Bildu @ 26\mod_1399368203008_18.doc x @ 238850 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
This way up
Fragile
Keep dry
Keep away from heat
Centre of gravity
Slinglift point
Sealed packing
Do not stack
Stacking limit by mass
Use no forks on this side
Fig. 3-2
Symbols according to DIN EN ISO 780; Marking for shipping of packages
Pos : 5.16 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-182
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.1 Bildz eic hen auf Pac kstüc ken 03 - Bild2 @ 6\mod_1344494763209_0.doc x @ 45880 @ @ 1
Pos : 5.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.1 Bildz eic hen auf Pac kstüc ken 03 - Bildu @ 6\mod_1344494764318_18.doc x @ 45905 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Written details – by customer
Symbols
Symbols for sealed packing
Instructions for handling (centre of gravity)
Fig. 3-3
Crate with boards attached, showing symbols and written instructions (example)
Pos : 5.19 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-183
r
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.2 Kennz eichnung der Versandbaugruppen 01 @ 0\mod_1330957787464_18.doc x @ 2810 @ 3 @ 1
3.2.2
Identification of the shipping assemblies
In order to clearly organise the location of assembly for the switch gear, shipping assemblies are specifically
labelled. These labels have been placed on the protective covers on the joints of the assembly.
Pos : 5.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.2 Kennz eichnung der Versandbaugruppen 02 - Bild3 @ 6\mod_1344157681316_0.doc x @ 42964 @ @ 1
Pos : 5.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.2 Kennz eichnung der Versandbaugruppen 02 - Bildu @ 3\mod_1335962357968_18.doc x @ 15943 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Works no.:
Bay designation
Position and bay designation (see HAS drawings and delivery note)
Dimensions and weight
Batch no.
Contents of accessory pack
Serial no.
Password
Switchgear type
Fig. 3-4
Label on packing accessory (example)
Pos : 5.23 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-184
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3 Empfang und Behandl ung von Sendungen @ 0\mod_1330958368781_18.doc x @ 2828 @ 2 @ 1
3.3
Receipt and handling of shipments
This section describes
-
Basic requirements of transport
Receiving and external control of goods
Unpacking the goods and checking for damage incurred during transport
Storage of goods
Procedures in case of damage and loss due to fire, natural disasters, theft or accident.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Packaging [ 3.1]
Markings [ 3.2]
Pos : 5.25 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.1 Transport @ 0\mod_1330958525923_18.doc x @ 2832 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.1
Shipment
Warning
Risk to life from tipping or falling loads! – MORTAL DANGER!
• Do not stand under suspended load.
• Do not exceed the carrying capacity of transport equipment and hoisting gear.
• Assemblies or bays with basic packing are strictly not to be stacked.
• Folding boxes are not to be stacked.
• Do not exced the load-bearing capacity of the case(s).
• Remove transport plates of the basic packaging and transport frame at the location of
assembly only after the load has been firmly secured against tipping over.
Pos : 5.26 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-185
Shipment and storage
r
Pos : 5.27 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.1.1 Tr ansport zur Baus tell e 01 @ 23\mod_1382700713763_18.doc x @ 194770 @ 4 @ 1
3.3.1.1
Transport to the site
The goods must be transported from the manufacturer to the site by experienced forwarding agents only
(shipping companies, carriers, railway freight companies). Erection personnel of Siemens AG may act only in
an advisory and supervisory capacity. Transportation remains exclusively the responsibility of the forwarding
agents.
In addition to vibration and shock stresses during transport there may be impacts as a result of dropping,
tipping, falling or collision. So as to avoid damage, the following values must not be exceeded (extract from
DIN EN 24180):
Vertical impact
Method of transport:
permissible stress:
road / air / water
Amplitude 200 up to 300 m/s² (= 20 up to 30 G),
656 up to 984 ft/s² (= 20 up to 30 G),
determined from individual modular assemblies excluding packing
crates.
Free fall
transport on road:
transport by air:
transport by ship:
Vibrations (natural frequency)
transport on road:
< 9 Hz,
air + water:
> 200 Hz,
Horizontal velocity of impact
transport on road:
air + water:
height of fall max. 100 mm (3.9 in.)
height of fall max. 100 mm (3.9 in.)
height of fall max. 300 mm (11.8 in.)
max. 7.5 mm (0.3 in.) amplitude
2
max. 40 m/s (= 4 G)
2
max. 131 ft/ s (= 4 G)
2
< 2.7 m/s (<8.9 ft/s²)
not applicable
The cases are marked with instructions for safe handling and proper storage.
If a case falls from a certain height (e.g. is dropped as a result of a snapped lifting rope), damage is to be
expected independently of the case weight. This applies in particular if the drop heights given are exceeded.
Pos : 5.28 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-186
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.29 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module3.3.1.2 Tr ans port auf der Baus tell e 02 @ 29\mod_1430118812013_18.doc x @ 278241 @ 4 @ 1
3.3.1.2
On-site transport
On-site transport means the moving of packed or unpacked goods before or during erection. Devices used
for moving include:
-
Trucks or other vehicles
Fork-lift trucks
Mobile and/or stationary cranes
Transport roller systems, specially for complete switchgear bays
Hydraulic jacks
Winches (rope winches, rack-and-pinion jacks)
Rollers
Crowbars with and without rollers
Various ropes

Note
Ensure that all tools are capable of bearing the load.
Warning
When loading and unloading heavy goods, especially if using winches,
jacks and crowbars, etc., there is a risk of load tipping – DANGER TO LIFE!
• Prop up top-heavy or side-heavy loads and secure them by ropes during handling.
• Stabilise the transport vehicle with support frames or jacks during loading and unloading,
in order to avoid tipping or springing of the loading platform. The brakes must always be
applied.
• Heavy parts should be secured so that they cannot shift when handled.
• With steel ropes, use wooden blocks to prevent them from rubbing against the cases or
cutting into them.
• Use labelled slinglift points.

Note
The load must always be suspended from all slinglift points / crane hook eyes
Pay attention to the positionof center!
3-187
Shipment and storage
r

Note for the transport of voltage transformer
Voltage transformer are to be transported and stored in a vertical position
A shipment cover plate for protection is screwed to the bushing. The cover plate
must not be removed during transport and storage period.

Note for the transport of RC Divider
RC Divider are to be transported and stored in a vertical position with insulator
bushing downward
A shipment cover plate for protection is screwed to the primary resin bushing
insulator. The cover plate must not be removed during transport and storage
period.
The secondary cable is included in the packaging of each RC divider and every
cable is identified by a label with the serial number of the destination RC divider.
Pos : 5.30 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2 Empfang der Sendung @ 1\mod_1332483916302_18.doc x @ 10790 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.2
Receipt of goods
Before being officially received (signing of receipt), all goods delivered must be checked by the recipient for
• Completeness with regard to the dispatch note
• External damage of all kinds
Pos : 5.31 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2.1 Vollständigkeit der Li eferung kontrollier en 01 @ 0\mod_1330958807958_18.doc x @ 2849 @ 4 @ 1
3.3.2.1
Make sure the delivery is complete
Use the packing slip to check completeness of delivery.
The dispatch note includes the following information:
-
Customer order item
Manufacturer order item
Contents in German and in an appropriate foreign language
Case no.
Gross weight
Net weight
Dimensions
Pos : 5.32 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2.1 Vollständigkeit der Li eferung kontrollier en 02 - Bild @ 6\mod_1344157836923_0.doc x @ 43108 @ @ 1
3-188
Shipment and storage
1
3-189
r
Shipment and storage
1
2
3
4
Pos : 5.33 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2.1 Vollständigkeit der Li eferung kontrollier en 02 - Bildu @ 3\mod_1335963069043_18.doc x @ 15954 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Packing slip no.
Designation of case contents
Order item
Type of packaging
Fig. 3-5
Excerpt from a delivery note (different designs possible)
Pos : 5.34 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-190
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.35 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2.2 Sendung auf äuß ere Besc hädigungen kontrollier en @ 0\mod_1330959207104_18.doc x @ 2867 @ 4 @ 1
3.3.2.2
Check the goods against external damage
Carry out the checks after unloading when each case is accessible from all sides. Carry out the check at that
place where the goods are transferred from the forwarding agents to the recipient named in the dispatch
papers, e.g. on site, at the port or at the railway station.
If on receipt of goods damage resulting from transport is externally visible, the recipient must attend to the
following:
• Enter the damage discovered immediately in the freight papers and have them
countersigned by the deliverer.
• If damage is serious or involves total loss and high damage costs, the manufacturer must
be informed immediately.
• Do not tamper with the damage after it has been discovered and keep packing material
until a decision has been made concerning inspection by the forwarding agents or by the
transport insurance company.
• Call for the carrier concerned (forwarding agents, railway, post office) in order to make a
statement of facts (or list of damage) on the spot. This is essential for a damages claim.
• Consult the average adjuster immediately in accordance with the stipulations of the
transport insurance companies.
• If possible, photograph damage caused to the packing and the contents. This also
applies to any evidence of corrosion to the packed goods as a result of moisture entering
(rain, snow, seawater, condensation).
• Open the damaged case(s) sufficiently to ascertain the total extent of the damage.
• Name the damaged parts according to the operating instructions; if necessary refer to
illustrations in the instructions showing the parts concerned. This makes identification of
the parts easier for the manufacturer.
• Ensure that the manufacturer receives the statement of facts (or a list of damage) as
quickly as possible. Contact the on-site Siemens representative or the appropriate
Siemens office.
Should hidden damage to the goods occur, i.e. damage which is only discovered after receipt during
unpacking, proceed as follows:
• Hold the party concerned for causing the damage liable as quickly as possible by
telephone and in writing and apply for a statement of facts or a list of damage.
• Observe the deadlines prevailing in the various countries for this; establish these as soon
as possible.
It is unavoidable that some damage is not discovered until considerably later on site, i.e. after receipt and
after very short deadlines have been passed. There is hardly any recourse against the carrier (or whoever
was responsible for causing the damage) as far as this hidden damage is concerned.
Damage discovered under such circumstances has prospects of successfully being covered by insurance
only if storage insurance (extension of transport cover) or an erection insurance policy exists.
3-191
r
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.36 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2.3 Kontrolle von Dic htver pac kungen @ 0\mod_1330959273870_18.doc x @ 2871 @ 4 @ 1
3.3.2.3
Checking sealed packing
Sealed packing can be identified from the outside by appropriate markings.
Markings [ 3.2]
Handling of sealed packages [ 3.4]
Pos : 5.37 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.3 Sendungen auspac ken und auf Tr ans portsc häden kontr ollieren @ 0\mod_1330959335043_18.doc x @ 2875 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.3
Unpack goods and check for damage incurred during transport
Do not yet remove the transport cover, which closes the openings during the time of transport and storage.
Also leave in place any parts guarding porcelain pieces (e.g. outdoor bushings, insulators, etc.).
• Wherever possible, the packages must be transported to the location where erection is to
take place.
In exceptional cases, the crate can be unpacked in a special room or, given appropriate weather, unpakked
outside and then brought to the point of assembly.
• When unpacking the goods, check their condition; check that all accessories are
complete with the aid of delivery notes and lists of accessories.
Do not unpack related small components which are packaged together in marked bags!
• Store the goods carefully in accordance with the directives in the following section. Store
spare parts separately.
Specially preserve small components if the storage room is unable to maintain required storage conditions or
if the storage time is expected to be particularly long.
Do not remove labels or other markings.
Pos : 5.38 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-192
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.39 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.4 Einl ager n von Sendung en @ 0\mod_1330959410950_18.doc x @ 2879 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.4
Storage of goods
Attention
Avoid damage to modular assemblies during storage – Damage can affect
subsequent operation.
• Pay attention to the carrying capacity of the floor.
• Do not place heavy goods on top of one other. Do not overload any goods by excessive
stacking
• The cases should be arranged so that the case number is clearly visible. Related parts
should be stored in line with the sequence in which they are to be erected.
• Store machines with rolling-contact bearings (or assemblies containing machines) on
vibration-free floors (the bearings may otherwise be damaged).
Distinguish between
- the time limit on goods for the preparation of switchgear assembly or with spare parts for their final
storage, as well as
- the unlimited storage time of spare parts.
Pos : 5.40 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-193
Shipment and storage
r
Pos : 5.41 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.4.1 Z eitlic h begrenz tes Ei nlager n von Sendungen @ 27\mod_1410944985872_18.doc x @ 253970 @ 4 @ 1
3.3.4.1
Time-limited storage of shipments
Limited storage period for packaged goods in sealed packaging
Goods packed in intact sealed packaging can be stored in the open if the following conditions are met.
Attention
Highly flammable materials – fire hazard.
•
•
•
•
Smoking is forbidden!
Observe fire prevention regulations.
Fire engines must have unhindered access in the event of fire.
Ensure that extinguishers are available adequately protected from adverse weather
conditions.
When choosing and preparing storage areas, the following requirements should be met:
- Protect stored goods against moisture (flooding, run-off from melting snow and ice), dirt, destructive
creatures such as rats, mice and termites, and unauthorised access.
- Place crates on boles or squared timber to protect them against ground moisture and for better
ventilation.
- Determine the loading capacity of the area.
- Arrange the storage area based on packing slip information, symbols and details on the packages.
- Prepare a plan showing clearly where the cases are stored.
- Store cases according to the assembly sequence so that they can subsequently be removed in the
correct order. Markings should be clearly visible.
- Keep access routes free.
- Stored goods should be inspected at regular intervals. After storms, heavy rain or snow, appropriate
additional measures should be taken.

Note
If erection of the installation or duration of storage does not take place until after
the intended life of the package seals, appropriate steps must be taken in good
time.
Appropriate steps are:
- Proper reconditioning of the sealed packaging.
Repair of sealed packing [ 3.4.4]
- Unpacking of goods and storage in an appropriate storage room.
When necessary, qualified personnel can be consulted through the appropriate Siemens office.
3-194
Shipment and storage
Time-limited storage in sealed packaging that is exclusively designed for transport.
Storage must take place:
- in closed rooms
- outdoors after applying a folding box.
Limited storage period for packaged goods in basic packaging
Store in closed rooms:
- unpacked parts
- parts which are for transport largely unpacked (only on wooden skids in open wooden frames)
- parts in normal cases, i.e. non-seaworthy crates (indicated on the dispatch note by “I”, “Z” or “N”).
The storerooms must be dry, well ventilated and as far as possible free of dust. Relative humidity must be
kept below approx. 50%. Heat storerooms, if necessary, and maintain the temperature of the storerooms 10
°C above the outside air temperature, to prevent the formation of condensation. If closed storerooms are
heated, ensure adequate ventilation.
The size of the rooms must allow the goods to be stored so that they stand firm in an orderly arrangement.
Switchgear intended for use in the open can only be considered to be adequately protected against the
elements when the shipping unit has been completely assembled and additional measures have been taken
to prevent corrosion.

Note
Shipping units in the basic packaging may only be stored in the open if it is certain
that they are adequately protected from the elements, particularly from moisture.
The protection can be considered sufficient if
- the requirements outlined in this section with regard to the selection of and conditions in a site for the
storage of seaworthy crates are met,
- the case of tents and tarpaulins, it is ensured that they are secured properly and that water cannot
accumulate (such canopies must cover the goods far enough to prevent the penetration of rain driven
from the side, snow etc.),
- there is adequate ventilation underneath the weather protection (covers must not lie directly against the
cases. Use a frame of slats or boards to ensure that there is an air gap of approx. 30 cm.)
- the supply voltage to the anti-condensation heating is connected and the heating is in operation if the
unpacked assembly is to be stored in the open for more than 2 weeks.
Checking the control functions [ 7.11]
Pos : 5.42 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.4.2 Einl ager n von Ers atz teil en @ 27\mod_1410942629846_18.doc x @ 253950 @ 4 @ 1
3-195
Shipment and storage
r
3.3.4.2
Storing of spare parts
The storage room should be well-ventilated, as dustfree as possible and dry. It should have a constant
temperature of between +15 °C and +25 °C. The relative humidity should be maintained at less than approx.
50%. Should relative humidity exceed 70%, the anti-condensation heaters provided in various plant
components (e.g. in the control cubicle) must be switched on.
Storage rooms should be large enough to permit a stable and clear arrangement of the stored parts. Access
to and transport of the individual assemblies and parts must be assured at all times without the risk of
damage to these parts.
Wherever possible, spare parts should be stored on shelves according to size and weight. Measures should
be taken to prevent adjacent parts from moving or rolling when a spare part is removed from the shelf.
Whenever storage rooms are set up it is advisable to draft a list of stored parts. Identification tags provided
on each assembly, subassembly and part will facilitate the keeping of such a list and accelerate spare part
retrieval.

Note
Do not remove identifications or other markings.
A visual inspection of the spare parts and a check of the storage area is recommended continously, but at
least after 5 years
The following details apply to the various spare parts:
Plant components and assemblies
Attention
The risk of contamination of plant components and assemblies during storage is
a risk to safe operation.
• Do not open the assembly. Leave the protective cover and transport fixtures on the
assembly.
The plant components and assemblies are to be stored in as-delivered condition, i. e. complete with
protective cover and transport fixtures.
It is advisable to cover these parts with polyethylene (PE) sheeting in such a manner that an air change can
occur under this covering. This is assured if the PE sheet ends approx. 0,.5 m above the floor.
Subassemblies
The subassemblies should be stored on shelves wherever possible. It is advisable to cover them with PE
sheeting.
3-196
Shipment and storage
Insulated parts
Each insulating component is packed in airtight sheeting together with a filter bag (250 g), which is also
placed in the switchgear gas compartment. Check the airtight packing at the visual inspection and, in case of
damage, change the filter bag and restore the airtight packing.
If stored properly, insulated parts can be kept on stock unlimited.
Built-on and built-in parts
Built-on and built-in parts must be left in their original packing (cartons, blister wrappers).
Spare parts made of aluminium and steel are coated with Trost Multifunction Oil for corrosion protection.
Check the coating at the visual inspection and renew whenever necessary.
Standard parts
Standard parts must be left in their packing. Surface treatment (hot-dip galvanizing, galvanizing) or their
material ensures adequate corrosion protection.
Sealing elements
Attention
The risk of damage to sealing elements during storage is a risk to safe operation.
Store sealing elements only horizontal and not hanging
• Do not store or place any objects on sealing elements because these elements can be
easily damaged.
• Sealing elements must be left in their original packing and lie flat during storage.
• The original packing protects the scaling elements against UV radiation. Whenever parts
are removed, this packing must be rescaled air-tight and light-proof.
If stored properly, sealing elements can be kept on stock for 5 years.
Filter material
The filter material is to be stored in the sealed containers. This filter material must be installed immediately
after the container is opened.
Pos : 5.43 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.5 Vorgehens weis e bei Schäden und Verl ust @ 0\mod_1330959679313_18.doc x @ 2892 @ 3 @ 1
3.3.5
Action to be taken in the event of damage or loss
In the event of loss of or damage to any parts in storage, whether still packaged or unpacked, as a result of
fire, natural disasters, theft or accidents, the police must be informed and the reference number under which
the case is being handled obtained.
Pos : 5.44 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-197
r
Pos : 5.45 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4 Behandl ung von Dic htverpac kung en @ 0\mod_1330959748001_18.doc x @ 2896 @ 2 @ 1
3-198
Shipment and storage
Shipment and storage
3.4
Handling of sealed packages
Packages that may be damaged due to the effects of extreme air humidity during transport and/or storage
are dispatched in sealed packages. The packing is produced and checked at the works before the crate is
sealed.
This section describes
-
the basic structure of sealed packing
recognizing sealed packing
unpacking sealed packing
repairs of the sealed packing.
Basic information:
Packaging [ 3.1]
Markings [ 3.2]
Receipt and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Pos : 5.46 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.1 Grundsätzliches über Dichtver pac kung @ 0\mod_1330959802065_18.doc x @ 2900 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.1
Basic information of sealed packing
The purpose of the sealed packing is to provide an all-round protective layer for the goods. The quantity of
desiccant placed within this protective layer restricts the relative humidity to a level which is not harmful for
the goods. The protective layer can also be rigid, e.g. in the form of an airtight metal container.
For a flexible protective layer, an anti-corrosion film is used, which is then sealed airtight after the desiccant
has been placed inside.
The quantity of drying agent used depends on the storage life guaranteed and limits the final humidity within
the barrier layer to < 60%.
Pos : 5.47 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.2 Er kennen der Dichtverpac kung @ 0\mod_1330959891550_18.doc x @ 2904 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.2
Recognizing sealed packing
Appropriate remarks in the delivery note and on the packing cate refer to the sealed packing.
On the outside of the crate is a board with symbols for saled packing and the following basic notes:
Sealed packing
DO NOT OPEN
until ready for use or inspection
After inspection reseal packing.
Pos : 5.48 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-199
Shipment and storage
r
Pos : 5.49 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.3 Auspac ken @ 0\mod_1330959949098_18.doc x @ 2908 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.3
Unpacking

Note
The sealed packing must not be opened during transport, nor to check the goods
after receipt of the shipment!
Goods in sealed packing may be unpacked only if either
- they are needed immediately for erection work or
- suitable storage facilities are available.
In all other cases, the goods must remain in the sealed packing.
The customs authorities and forwarding agents must therefore be informed in good time of the forthcoming
arrival of such consignments and arrangements made with the customs officials to have the goods inspected
at site, where they have to be unpacked in any event.
Only if such arrangements have not been made, at least one wall of the crate may be removed and the foil
cut open in order to inspect the goods. The foil must then be resealed; see the note on the board next to the
symbol for sealed packing.
Pos : 5.50 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4 R epar atur der Dic htverpac kung @ 0\mod_1330959990739_18.doc x @ 2912 @ 3 @ 1
3.4.4
Repair of sealed packing
Pos : 5.51 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4.1 Öffnen der Dic htverpac kung @ 27\mod_1411017450851_18.doc x @ 254010 @ 4 @ 1
3.4.4.1
Opening of the sealed packing
• Remove one longitudinal crate wall or the folding box and open foil with a straight cut low
down and parallel to the ground so that all desiccant bags can be removed.
• Inspect the goods as far as possible. If there are any signs of damp, corrosion etc. some
or all of the goods must be unpacked to as certain the overall condition.

Note
If there are any signs of damp, corrosion etc contact the appropriate Siemens
office.
Pos : 5.52 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4.2 Tr oc kenmi ttel er neuern @ 0\mod_1330960208132_18.doc x @ 2920 @ 4 @ 1
3.4.4.2
Renewing the desiccant
If the goods are in good condition, renew the desiccant. The following methods are possible:
• Remove the same number of identical desiccant bags from their airtight packing and
arrange them in the same places.
• Recondition desiccant removed from sealed packing as described below and put it back
in position.
• Vary the quantity of desiccant to suit the remaining storage time, if this is known.
Pos : 5.53 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-200
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.54 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4.3 Tr oc kenmi ttel regenerieren @ 27\mod_1411019656665_18.doc x @ 254040 @ 4 @ 1
3.4.4.3
Reconditioning the desiccant
Open the bags with a straight cut and pour used desiccant onto a rectangular unused baking tray (uniform
layer, approximately 4 cm thick) and dry in an oven at a temperature of + 120 °C for approximately 10 hours.
Open the oven door every 2 hours and stir up the desiccant layer.

Note
Do not heat the desiccant to above +130 °C.
After reconditioning pour the desiccant into one or more clean cans which should be filled to the maximum
possible level. Seal the cans and allow them to cool.
Put the cooled desiccant into the bags and seal these with adhesive tape. Cooled desiccant which is not
immediately required can be stored in sealed plastic foil bags (PE foil, at least 0.1 mm thick).
Taking account of the remaining storage time
The following formula is an adequate guide:
B=Fxtxk
Whereby:
B=
Number of units of desiccant
F=
Crate surface in square meters
t=
Storage time in months
k=
Desiccant units per 1 sq. m. and 1 month
32 units = 1 kg
Values for k:
(depend on type of packing, climatic conditions and storage time)
Plastic foil
Climatic condition
Temperature
Relative humidity
Storage time
Desiccant unit
moderate
+23 °C
83%
< 12 months
k=1
severe
+40 °C
92%
< 12 months
k=3
severe
+40 °C
82%
12 months
k=5
Climatic condition
Temperature
Relative humidity
Storage time
Desiccant unit
moderate
+23 °C
83%
< 12 months
k = 0.25
severe
+40 °C
92%
< 12 months
k = 0.75
severe
+40 °C
82%
> 12 ≤ 24 months
k = 1.25
Aluminium-plastic foil
3-201
Shipment and storage
r
Example:
Sealed packing with plastic foil, climatic conditions severe, storage time 6 months:
k=3
Crate dimensions:
Length:
4m
Width:
1.8 m
Height:
2m
How many kg/lbs desiccant are required?
Surface:
F = 2 x (4 x 1.8 + 4 x 2 + 1.8 x 2) = 37.6 sqm
Desiccant:
B = 37.6 x 6 x 3 = 676.8 Units
= 21.15 (22) kg
Pos : 5.55 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4.4 F olie wieder vers chli eßen @ 0\mod_1330960365509_18.doc x @ 2928 @ 4 @ 1
3.4.4.4
Resealing the foil
• After putting in the bags of desiccant immediately reweld the foil where it was cut. Leave
a slit of 5 to 7 cm length open (low down).
The welding seams should overlap. If welding equipment is not available, close the cuts with aluminium lined
adhesive tape (at least 0.1 mm and 30 mm wide).
• Insert the tube of a vacuum cleaner through the remaining slit and suck out some of the
air from the sealed packing until the sheeting can be seen to be drawn inwards. Then
extract the vacuum cleaner tube and immediately seal the slit in the sheeting.
• If possible do not close the crate for a few hours, so as to be able to see that the foil is
still in a contracted state (checking for correct sealing).
If the foil is not sealed, check the fresh sealing strip, particularly places where the foil is welded close to the
crate floor.
• After successfully checking for leaks, restore the mechanical protection by applying the
crate side wall or by using the folding box.
Pos : 5.56 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
3-202
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4 Montage und IBS/4 Montage und IBS @ 3\mod_1336030866902_18.doc x @ 15970 @ 2 @ 1
4 Assembly and Commissioning
4-203
r

Pos : 6.2.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1 Vorauss etzungen - Ü bers chrift @ 3\mod_1336031237013_18.doc x @ 15981 @ 4 @ 1
4-204
Assembly and Commissioning
Note
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in part, from
the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track guiding, the
location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary equipment.
Assembly and Commissioning
4.1
Prerequisites
Pos : 6.2.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1 Vorauss etzungen - Ü bers chrift Text @ 25\mod_1391429825081_18.doc x @ 227623 @ @ 1
This section describes the requirements of installation and commissioning, accounting for the following:
-
required documents
personnel situation
transport routes, hoisting gear and transport equipment
tools, devices and expendable materials to be installed
requirements of the assembly site
the clean work requirements
fire and accident prevention
the recording.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Preparatory work [4.2]
Assembling the switchgear [ 4.3]
Commisioning of switchgear [4.4]
Pos : 6.2.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1 Unterl agen @ 3\mod_1336031438686_18.doc x @ 15992 @ 4 @ 1
4.1.1
Documentations
All documents have been collected in the order documentation.
The following are some of the documents available for assembly:
Pos : 6.2.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1.1 Betri ebs anleitung @ 3\mod_1336031689859_18.doc x @ 16003 @ 2 @ 1
4.1.1.1
Operating instructions
The operating instructions describe the structure and the working of the switchgear as well as its component
parts and provide important information on assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance and on
how to remedy faults.
Pos : 6.2.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-205
r
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.2.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1.2 Zeic hnungen @ 3\mod_1336031694672_18.doc x @ 16014 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.1.2
Drawings
Assembly drawings
Installation drawings are necessary in order to assemble the individual subassemblies on site. They show
-
the switchgear structure
the joints of the transport units
the connecting points between the shipping assemblies
the gas compartments.
Gas monitoring drawings
Gas monitoring drawings provide information relating to each gas compartment on
-
the weight of the SF6 gas
the volume of the gas compartment
the filling pressure
the triggering values of the gas monitoring system
the used monitoring devices, filling devices and test devices.
Single-line diagram, single-pole
The single-pole single line diagram shows the switchgear with the busbar system, all the active modules and
outgoing feeders. Each module can be clearly identified by means of its device designation. The separation
into bays and the separation into gas compartments can be seen.
Pos : 6.2.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1.3 Sc haltbüc her @ 3\mod_1336031706828_18.doc x @ 16025 @ 4 @ 1
4.1.1.3
Schematics
The schematics for a feeder or a component contain, for example:
-
Single-line diagram ot the feeder
Explanation of the designation system
Schematics
Component list
Connection diagram.
Pos : 6.2.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1.4 Weitere Unterl agen @ 3\mod_1336031711484_18.doc x @ 16036 @ 4 @ 1
4.1.1.4
Further documentation
The order documentation includes further documentation, e. g.
- routine test records
- records of tests carried out after assembly.
Pos : 6.2.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-206
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.2.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.2 Personell e Vor aussetzungen @ 3\mod_1336031724235_18.doc x @ 16047 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.2
Personnel prerequisites
Pos : 6.2.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.2.1 Verantwortung @ 3\mod_1336031728406_18.doc x @ 16058 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.2.1
Responsibility
For the assembly and the commissioning, a responsible person must be designated, and - in as far as the
responsible person does not supervise the work directly and several persons are working simultaneously on
the system - an overseer must also be designated. We recommend using a Siemens supervisor for the
duration of the work.
The exact division of the tasks between the responsible person, the overseer and the supervisor must be
defined before work begins. This division of tasks should be as follows:
Responsible person
- Instruction of personnel on the safety measures to be taken during assembly and commissioning and
ensuring that personnel observe the safety procedures.
- Organisation of work.
Supervisor
- Supervision of work in the absence of the responsible person.
Supervisor
- Instruction of personnel with regard to assembly regulations, guidelines or other documentation.
- Supervising the correct execution of the work in hand, the observance of the assembly regulations,
guidelines and other documentation. In the event of a deviation from the assembly regulations, this
person is authorized to stop work until the required conditions are met.
Pos : 6.2.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.2.2 M ontage- und Inbetriebsetzungs pers onal @ 3\mod_1336031738719_18.doc x @ 16069 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.2.2
Erection and maintenance personnel
Assembly and commissioning work may only be carried out by sufficiently qualified, instructed and
authorized personnel. The degree of responsibility varies depending on the tasks in hand, the anticipated
degree of danger to personnel and objects and the damage which may be caused.
If outside staff or the customer's staff are employed instead of Siemens expert personnel, it is assumed that
this personnel satisfies the minimum requirements for the individual categories from unskilled laborer to
specialist foreman and is in possession of the minimum qualifications for their respective specialist field. This
applies to electricians, pipesmiths, steelsmiths, welders etc.
Assembly and commissioning personnel are required to attend instruction given by the responsible person
and are under obligation to familiarize themselves with the content of the relevant documents provided.
Pos : 6.2.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.3 Transportwege, Hebezeuge, Trans por tmittel @ 21\mod_1378110820159_18.doc x @ 183930 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.3
Transportation routes, lifting equipment, transportation equipment
The modules are delivered largely preassembled. The modules and components are usually transported to
the site on trucks. The transportation routes must be suitable for truck traffic. Bridges must have the
necessary load-carrying capacity.
One or two truck cranes may be required for unloading, depending on conditions at the site.
Suitable and proper lifting and transportation equipment of sufficient load-carrying capacity must be deployed
for installation work. An overhead traveling crane must be provided in the switchgear compartment.
Pos : 6.2.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-207
r
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.2.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.4 Wer kz eug e, Vorric htungen, Verbr auchs materialien, Steighilfen @ 3\mod_1336031754532_18.doc x @ 16091 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.4
Tools, devices, expendable materials, gantries
Appropriate tools in perfect working order must be used. Special tools and devices are imperative for some
tasks.
Only ladders, scaffolding or conveyor cages for cranes are allowed as gantries.
It is not allowed to use any elements of motor drives as a gantry, especially the motor drive itself, motor drive
attachments, linkage and cable plugs. The same applies for freely accessible measuring instruments and
gauges, gas and hydraulic pipes, rupture disc attachments, current and voltage transformer connexion boxes
as well as expansion joints.
Pos : 6.2.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5 Anforderungen an di e Baustelle und deren Einric htung en @ 3\mod_1336031759250_18.doc x @ 16102 @ 4 @ 1
4.1.5
Requirements with regard to the building site and its equipments
Pos : 6.2.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5.1 Aufstellungsraum der Sc hal tanlag e @ 3\mod_1336031770047_18.doc x @ 16113 @ 4 @ 1
4.1.5.1
Location of the switchgear
- Construction work on the room in which the switchgear is to be installed and its roofing must have been
completed. No construction work may be carried out while the switchgear is being assembled.
- The flooring must be equal to the designated loads, must rest on the required foundations, have a flat
surface and have been treated with a priming coat.
Pos : 6.2.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5.2 Lagerräume @ 3\mod_1336031773547_18.doc x @ 16124 @ 4 @ 1
4.1.5.2
Storage areas
There must be one or more lockable storage rooms. Tools, devices and expendable materials have to be
stored in the storage rooms. The racks are for storage of installation components, small accessories and
tools. Whereever possible, the location of the storage rooms should be central to keep routes short.
A stores supervisor should be designated to ensure that stores are kept correctly. The tasks of the stores
supervisor are as follows:
- Keeping records of all stock movements
- Reporting all incoming and outgoing deliveries, all damage and any losses.
Pos : 6.2.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5.3 Büro- und Aufenthaltsräume, s anitär e Anl agen @ 21\mod_1378111153576_18.doc x @ 183980 @ 4 @ 1
4.1.5.3
Office and recreation rooms, sanitary facilities
The following must be provided, as appropriate for the strength of the workforce
- a sufficiently large, heated and, if possible, air-conditioned office room and recreation room
- a desk, one to three filing cabinets, a few chairs, and a large table for spreading out drawings
(approx. 3 x 1.5 m)
- phone, fax and Internet connections
- sanitary facilities (washroom, restroom) of sufficient size and in sufficient quantity.
Pos : 6.2.20 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-208
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.2.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5.4 Beleuc htung, Belüftung, Strom- und Was ser versorgung @ 21\mod_1378111178256_18.doc x @ 184030 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.5.4
Lighting, ventilation, electricity and water supplies
All rooms and compartments, including adjacent rooms and stairwells, must have general lighting as
prescribed by national codes and regulations.
The electricity and water supply systems must be dimensioned appropriately for the expected demand,
particularly that of large loads (e.g. welding equipment, testing equipment, devices for gas filling, heaters,
etc.).
Pos : 6.2.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.6 Anforderungen an Sauber keit @ 3\mod_1336034027717_18.doc x @ 16157 @ 4 @ 1
4.1.6
Clean work requirements
Cleanliness on site is an absolute prerequisite for the maintenance of the assured quality parameters.
It is appropriate to name a responsible person who will maintain the cleanliness of the assembly area. The
name of the person should be clearly noted with a sign at the site. The person responsible for cleanliness
should instruct all personnel working at the site as well as procure the appropriate cleaning solutions and
other necessary supplies.
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Pos : 6.2.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.7 Brandsc hutz und U nfall ver hütung @ 3\mod_1336034031686_18.doc x @ 16168 @ 3 @ 1
4.1.7
Fire and accident prevention
The room where the switch gear is located, as well as all other adjacent rooms, built-in systems, devices and
equipment must adhere to all applicable laws, regulations and norms for fire and accident prevention. This
includes the provision of warnings, notices, fire extinguishers and alarms as well as first-aid equipment.
Accident prevention regulations must be available either by providing copies directly to personnel or through
signage.
Pos : 6.2.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.8 Protokollier en der M ontage und Inbetriebsetzung @ 21\mod_1378111211968_18.doc x @ 184080 @ 4 @ 1
4.1.8
Documentation of erection and commissioning
Erection and commissioning shall be documented in full using the reports provided for this purpose.
The Test Report TR 2850 supports organization of the work.
Completion of all listed activities shall be noted in the Test Record. Non-applicable items shall be marked
N.A. (not applicable). Items not performed or only partially completed are to be provided with a footnote and
explained in more detail on page 6 of the Test Report under item 5, "Comments."
Pos : 6.2.25 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-209
r
Pos : 6.3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten - Übersc hrift @ 22\mod_1378111252342_18.doc x @ 184130 @ 3 @ 1
4-210
Assembly and Commissioning
Assembly and Commissioning
4.2
Preparatory work
Pos : 6.3.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten - Übersc hrift Text @ 25\mod_1391431173319_18.doc x @ 227644 @ @ 1
This section states the function of the Test Report TR 2850. The section describes the activities to be
recorded and explains them or provides references to further explanations.
The entire scope of erection, including preparatory work and commissioning, must be recorded in the Test
Report TR 2850.
Both the Test Report and the Description of Erection are based on the sequence of activities to be
performed, although specific conditions on site regularly result in deviations from the stated sequence.
Some of the following tasks have to be performed more than once while assembling the switchgear, while
some only need to be performed once for the entire installation.
In any case, the Test Report can be used as a checklist that is a useful tool to support organization of the
work.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Prerequisites [ 4.1]
Assembling the switchgear [ 4.3]
Commissioning of switchgear [ 4.4]
Order documentation

Note
Given the strict requirements for cleanliness, all work not directly connected with
assembly of the switchgear is prohibited. All work that may produce dust must be
completed before assembly begins.
Completion of the following activities must be confirmed in Test Report 2850.
Pos : 6.3.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2. 1 Baus eitige Vor aussetz ungen @ 3\mod_1336036292756_18.doc x @ 16201 @ 2 @ 1
4.2.1
Customer building prerequisites
• Check that requirements have been met with regard to the location of the switchgear
room and adjacent rooms as well as lounges, office spaces and toilets and confirm in log
2850.
Pos : 6.3.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-211
r
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.3.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2. 2 U nterweis ung von Fremdpers onal @ 3\mod_1336036771102_18.doc x @ 16212 @ 3 @ 1
4.2.2
Instruction of third-party personnel
• Instruct assembly and maintenance personnel with regard to:
-
Operating safety in electrical plants
The building site is clean and orderly
The use of cleaning agents
Safety markings
preventive measures and disposal procedures when working with SF6
Handling flanges and O-rings
Handling sealed packaging
Dealing with damage caused in transit
Tightening torques
Anti-corrosion measures.
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections [ 7.6]
Fitting the rupture disks [ 7.18]
Cleaning [ 7.19]
Bolted joints, tightening torques, locking tabs [ 7.24]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Receipt and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Pos : 6.3.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2. 3 Z eichnung en @ 3\mod_1336037035338_18.doc x @ 16223 @ 3 @ 1
4.2.3
Drawings
• Determine from the available lists that a complete set of all drawings exists.
Pos : 6.3.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2. 4 Schaltpläne @ 3\mod_1336037188902_18.doc x @ 16234 @ 3 @ 1
4.2.4
Circuit diagrams
• Determine from the available lists that a complete set of all circuit diagrams exists.
Pos : 6.3.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2. 5 Lieferunterlag en @ 3\mod_1336037369919_18.doc x @ 16245 @ 3 @ 1
4.2.5
Delivery documentation
• Check to see that the HSA lists and delivery notes are present.
Receipt and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Pos : 6.3.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2. 6 Ü ber prüfung der Lieferei nheiten @ 3\mod_1336037560201_18.doc x @ 16256 @ 3 @ 1
4-212
Assembly and Commissioning
4.2.6
Checking the delivery units
• Check all delivery units for damage sustained during transport.
• Check sealed packaging.
• Check shock indicators if they are included (e.g. in voltage transformer).
Receipt and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Pos : 6.3.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 6.3.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.2 Vorbereitende Arbeiten/4.2. 7 Wer kz eug e / Instr umente @ 22\mod_1378111319579_18.doc x @ 184180 @ 3 @ 1
4.2.7
Tools / Instruments
• Check the completeness and condition of the tools and instruments against their delivery
notes. The tools and instruments must meet German standards; measuring instruments
must be calibrated.
Pos : 6.3.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.2 Vorbereitende Arbeiten/4.2. 8 Baumaß e für D urchbrüche i m F uß boden, der D ec ke und i n den Wänden pr üfen @ 3\mod_1336038031267_18.doc x @ 16278 @ 3 @ 1
4.2.8
Check the dimensions of cut-outs in the floor, ceiling and walls
• Measure the longitudinal and transverse axes of the switch gear and mark them on the
floor. Now, check and measure the position of wall cut-outs (e.g. for outputs) to overhead
line terminals and the position of ceiling cut-outs for high-voltage, control and transformer
cable as well as earthing.
• Should anything deviate from required values or if cut-outs have not yet been completed,
be sure to finish this work before any switchgear assemblies are brought to the assembly
site.
Use the drawings to determine the measurements of the switchgear and resulting sizes of
cut-outs in the floor, ceiling and walls.
The size of wall cut-outs for overhead line terminals is especially important because the sealing
compensators can only handle tolerances up to 20 mm. Should significant deviations still be present, it will
be necessary to apply shims or a compensation plate between the wall construction and the frame. If
required, these parts should be completed on-site and cleared with the manufacturer.
• Clarify whether all cable ducts and cable racks with their required wall cut-outs are
finished and released.
• Then clarify whether the cut-outs in the ceilings and floors have non-slip and load-bearing
covers.
Pos : 6.3.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.2 Vorbereitende Arbeiten/4.2. 9 Kabel kanäle in Fuß böden prüfen @ 3\mod_1336038141814_18.doc x @ 16289 @ 3 @ 1
4.2.9
Check the cable ducts in the floor
• Check the position and arrangement of the cable ducts and establish the presence of the
required coverings.
• Discuss the situation with project management if tolerances are exceeded.
Pos : 6.3.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-213
r
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.3.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.2 Vorbereitende Arbeiten/4.2.10 Ver messung der Anlagen-Lastpunkte @ 22\mod_1378111354328_18.doc x @ 184230 @ 2 @ 1
4.2.10 Measurement of equipment support points
• The load points of the bays and supports (steel frames) must be measured and marked.
Final determination of the load points with respect to the openings in the ceiling and walls
is possible.
• Measure the height differences between load points precisely. The height difference of
1 mm/m must be complied with.
• In case of tolerance deviations, suitable measures must be specified together with the
project management (e.g. grinding down of welds).
Pos : 6.3.16 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-214
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age montier en/4.3 Sc haltanlag e montieren - Übersc hrift @ 22\mod_1378111395809_18.doc x @ 184280 @ 3 @ 1
4.3
Assembling the switchgear
Pos : 6.4.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age montier en/4.3 Sc haltanlag e montieren - Übersc hrift T ext @ 25\mod_1391493448789_18.doc x @ 227670 @ @ 1
This section states the function of the Test Report 2850. The section describes the activities to be recorded
and explains them or provides references to further explanations.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Prerequisites [ 4.1]
Preparatory work [ 4.2]
Commissioning of switchgear [ 4.4]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Order documentation


Note
Given the strict requirements for cleanliness, all work not directly connected with
assembly of the switchgear is prohibited.
Note
Protect locations at which work is being performed against moisture until all
modules have been connected and the prescribed corrosion protection has been
applied. When working outdoors, seal off open modules against the ingress of
dust using the original cover, transportation cover or protective film, even during
short breaks in the work.
Warning
Hazard due to tipping or falling load – DANGER TO LIFE!
• Do not walk under suspended loads.
• Do not exceed the load-carrying capacity of transportation and lifting equipment.
• Bays must never be stacked on transportation frames. This also applies if folding boxes
are used.
• Only remove shipping plates (basic packaging), or transportation frames (sealed
packaging), after arrival at the intended installation location and after having adequately
secured the load against tipping over.
Completion of the following activities must be confirmed in Test Report TR 2850.
Pos : 6.4.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-215
r
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age montier en/4.3. 1 Anlag enaufbau nach Hauptz eichnung durc hführen @ 22\mod_1378111460550_18.doc x @ 184530 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.1
Installation of switchgear according to main drawing
The exact sequence of installation activities must be planned based on the overview circuit diagram,
considering the position of the access routes to the switchgear room, the options for deploying the overhead
crane, and the options for transporting and setting down equipment. This planning, which is already
performed at the factory, is used to define the delivery sequence of shipments from the factory.
The basis for the entire switchgear assembly process are the bays preassembled in the factory. After the
bays have been installed, the other modules (e.g. cable modules, extensions, etc.) must be mounted.
The type of connection required in each case is shown in the assembly drawing.
If more than two weeks separate the end of erection from the start of commissioning, the anticondensation
heating for the affected modules must be provisionally put into operation.
Checking the control functions [ 7.11]
Pos : 6.4.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-216
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age montier en/4.3. 2 F elder positi oni eren 010 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 22\mod_1378111816301_18.doc x @ 184830 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.2
Positioning of bays
The following Description of Erection provides only a general overview of the work to be performed. It does
not provide firm instructions for the erection personnel.


Note
Even out any differences in height after installation by adjusting the feet. Lift the
first bay until it is slightly higher than the other bays based on the height
measurements made. Then align each of the bays to be installed in the busbar
run and with this bay on the exit side.
Note
For single bays, the lifting slings must have a load-carrying capacity of ≥ 2.5 t and,
depending on the height of the crane, a length of approximately 4 m.
For double bays, the lifting slings must have a load-carrying capacity of ≥ 5 t and,
depending on the height of the crane, a length of approximately 5 m.

Note
Because of the limited accessibility of the busbar fasteners, the work should be
performed by two people.
To avoid damaging the expansion joints on the removal link, work carefully and
with suitable tools.
(Ratchet wrenches must not be used!)
• Position the bay carefully.
• Using a spirit level and leveling instrument, adjust the first bay by adjusting the feet.
• Provisionally fix the first bay in the support structure (steel frames) in the hall floor (with
spot welds).
• Align the conductors with bushings or contact elements using the assembly device 58005932 and the contact support.
Pos : 6.4.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age montier en/4.3. 2 F elder positi oni eren 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 22\mod_1378122305830_0.doc x @ 187905 @ @ 1
4-217
r
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age montier en/4.3. 2 F elder positi oni eren 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 22\mod_1378124000483_18.doc x @ 187953 @ @ 1
Fig. 4-1
Contact support
Pos : 6.4.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age montier en/4.3. 2 F elder positi oni eren 025 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild @ 24\mod_1384785760884_0.doc x @ 210780 @ @ 1
Pos : 6.4.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 2 Fel der positioni eren 025 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 Bil du @ 24\mod_1384785787700_18.doc x @ 210801 @ @ 1
Fig. 4-2
Assembly device
Pos : 6.4.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 2 Fel der positioni eren 030 @ 22\mod_1378123354490_18.doc x @ 187929 @ @ 1
• Treat the flanges
• Position the second bay carefully.
• Using a spirit level and leveling instrument, align the second bay by adjusting the feet.
• Connect the second bay to the first bay using centering pins 58005062001 and fitting
bolts 580-05062-003.
• Bolt on the busbar flange with the correct tightening torques.
Pos : 6.4.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 2 Fel der positioni eren 040 - Bild @ 22\mod_1378124238590_0.doc x @ 187977 @ @ 1
4-218
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 2 Fel der positioni eren 040 - Bildu @ 22\mod_1378124382269_18.doc x @ 188001 @ @ 1
Fig. 4-3
Centering pins
Pos : 6.4.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 2 Fel der positioni eren 045 - Bild @ 24\mod_1384786014009_0.doc x @ 210822 @ @ 1
Pos : 6.4.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 2 Fel der positioni eren 045 - Bildu @ 24\mod_1384786748940_18.doc x @ 210864 @ @ 1
Fig. 4-4
Fitting bolts
Pos : 6.4.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 2 Fel der positioni eren 050 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 22\mod_1378124555978_18.doc x @ 188025 @ @ 1
Below are the allowable tolerances along the longitudinal direction of the busbar (axially):
- Removal link (100 mm): +2 / -0 mm
- Sliding expansion joint: +5 / -0 mm
- Lateral expansion joint 1000mm: +5 / -5 mm
(To remove a busbar cross module, a gap of ≥ 10mm is required between the removal link and the busbar
cross module or between the sliding expansion joint and busbar cross module. Negative tolerances would
adversely affect - i.e. reduce - this dimension so that it may not be possible to remove the busbar cross
module.)
• Now mount the next modules following the relevant work instructions.
• Finally, check alignment of the supports and delivered assemblies and, if necessary,
make final corrections and tighten the bolt fasteners using the prescribed final torque.
• Fill the completed bays with gas to nominal pressure.
• Weld the bays to the support structure (steel frames) in the hall floor.
(On the 8DN8, it is currently only possible to weld the feet.)
Pos : 6.4.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 3 Ü berpr üfung auf äuß ere Besc hädigungen der Baugruppe @ 3\mod_1336039436590_18.doc x @ 16344 @ 3 @ 1
4-219
r
4.3.3
Assembly and Commissioning
Check for visible damage to assemblies
• Check assemblies externally for signs of damage
• If any damage is discovered, take the appropriate measures as suggested.
Receipt and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Pos : 6.4.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 4 Äußer e R einigung der Baugruppen @ 3\mod_1336039541010_18.doc x @ 16355 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.4
External cleaning of the assemblies
• Check whether assemblies are clean (externally).
• If the required state of cleanliness is not met, clean the assembly.
Cleaning [ 7.19]
Pos : 6.4.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 5 Innere Sic htkontrolle jener Baugruppen, di e z ur M ontage z u öffnen si nd, hinsichtlic h Sauber ke @ 3\mod_1336042098736_18.doc x @ 16366 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.5
Visible check insides for damage and cleanliness
• On assemblies that have to be opened for installation, check insides for damage and
cleanliness.
• If any damage is discovered, take the appropriate measures as suggested. If the required
state of cleanliness is not met, clean the assembly.
Receipt and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Cleaning [ 7.19]
Pos : 6.4.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 6 Flansc h- und O-Ri ng-Behandlung @ 22\mod_1378112302087_18.doc x @ 185155 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.6
Treatment of flanges and O-rings
• Prepare flanges and conductor connections of the modules to be connected.
• Treat the O-rings.
Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections [ 7.6]
Pos : 6.4.21 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-220
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 7 Gasdic hte und gas durc hläs sige D urchführungen 010 @ 22\mod_1378112412021_18.doc x @ 185405 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.7
Gas-tight and gas-permeable bushings
• Prior to installation, check each delivered assembly against the main drawing to ensure
that the gas-tight and gas-permeable bushings are in the installation locations intended
for them.
• Check whether there is a customer requirement for identification.
• Before installing each delivered assembly, check against the main drawing that the
bushings are being mounted as required:
- all bushings in their intended installation locations
- gas-tight bushings correctly installed. (The symbol on the bushing shows the correct installation position.)
Pos : 6.4.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 7 Gasdic hte und gas durc hläs sige D urchführungen 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bil d @ 6\mod_1344156681566_0.doc x @ 42798 @ @ 1
Pos : 6.4.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 7 Gasdic hte und gas durc hläs sige D urchführungen 020 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bil du @ 3\mod_1336043051305_18.doc x @ 16399 @ @ 1
Fig. 4-5
Bushings with symbol to identify the installation position
Pos : 6.4.25 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 7 Gasdic hte und gas durc hläs sige D urchführungen 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 22\mod_1378112512611_18.doc x @ 185655 @ @ 1
Order documentation
Pos : 6.4.26 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-221
r
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.27 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 8 Einbau der Z uganker und Messen der Fel dteilung 010 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 22\mod_1378112585590_18.doc x @ 185755 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.8
Installing the tie rods and measuring the bay spacing
The first bay must be fixed in the floor.
• Move the bay to be mounted up to the already fixed bay such that the intended bay
spacing is complied with.
• Bolt the flange between the removal link and the adjacent module.
• Adjust the removal link to the specified dimension using the device for this purpose.
• Lock nuts [2] and [3] with liquid plastic (Loctite 243) and tighten with reduced torque (20
Nm).
The installation concept for the 8DN8 specifies that the remaining bays shall not be welded firmly in place
until the equipment has been filled with the SF6 gas.
Pos : 6.5.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 8 Einbau der Z uganker und Messen der Fel dteilung 020 - 8DN8 5 Bil d @ 6\mod_1344156797768_0.doc x @ 42820 @ @ 1
Pos : 6.4.28 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 8 Einbau der Z uganker und Messen der Fel dteilung 020 - 8DN8 5 Bil d @ 6\mod_1344156797768_0.doc x @ 42822 @ @ 1
Pos : 6.4.29 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 8 Einbau der Z uganker und Messen der Fel dteilung 021 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu @ 22\mod_1378112669894_18.doc x @ 185855 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Threaded rod
½ nut
Nut
Fig. 4-6
Connecting two bays with removal link
Pos : 6.4.30 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-222
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.31 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 9 Filter i n Anl agen-Gasräume ei ns etz en @ 3\mod_1336043547560_18.doc x @ 16432 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.9
Insert filter in switchgear gas compartments
• Check that a “Filter” label is attached.
Inserting / replacing filter material [ 7.17]
Pos : 6.4.32 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.10 Bei Erweiterung: Primärleiterz uor dnung z wisc hen altem und neuem Anl agenteil prüfen @ 22\mod_1378112736242_18.doc x @ 185955 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.10 In case of extension: check primary conductor allocation
• When equipment is to be added to switchgear that is already in operation, always check
that the assignment of the primary conductors from the old to the new switchgear and the
phase angle are correct.
Pos : 6.4.33 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.11 Anlag enerdung gemäß Er dungs plan verlegen @ 22\mod_1378112820047_18.doc x @ 186205 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.11 Switchgear earthing according to earthing plan
The building earthing system must have been completed before the switchgear earthing system is installed
and must be accessible at the specified locations.
• Bolt the earthing cables to the switchgear as shown in the earthing drawing and weld
them to the building earthing system.
Pos : 6.4.34 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.12 Steuerleitung en verl egen @ 22\mod_1378112954069_18.doc x @ 186455 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.12 Installing control cables
• Install the control cables of the drives and instrument transformers and the control
equipment.
Assembling the switchgear [ 4.3]
Pos : 6.4.35 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.13 Kontroll e auf Dic htheit nic ht belegter Kabel versc hraubungen @ 22\mod_1378113848923_18.doc x @ 186955 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.13 Check unused cable glands for tightness
(Install blind plugs in the glands!)
Pos : 6.4.36 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.14 Absc hir mung der Wandler und Steuerl eitungen beids eitig erden @ 3\mod_1336045705918_18.doc x @ 16498 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.14 Earth the transformer and control cables shielding at both ends
Pos : 6.4.37 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.15 Far bbehandlung pr üfen, durc hführ en, ausbess ern @ 22\mod_1378113077639_18.doc x @ 186705 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.15 Check, apply and/or repair paintwork
• Apply paint coatings in accordance with the required protection class.
• Check the surface of the paintwork on the entire switchgear, including the gas pipes, for
any damage and repair if necessary.
Pos : 6.4.38 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.16 Besc hriftung und Besc hilderung anbringen @ 3\mod_1336046070230_18.doc x @ 16520 @ 2 @ 1
4.3.16 Application of signs and lettering
• Check that factory-applied signs and labelling are complete and clearly visible. Complete
or improve where necessary.
Pos : 6.4.39 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-223
r
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.40 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.17 Montage der Spannungs wandler @ 22\mod_1378113983003_18.doc x @ 187205 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.17 Installation of voltage transformers
Preparation of voltage transformer for installation
• Unpack the voltage transformer until it is only on the transport rack,
• Check the impact indicators. If an indicator indicates possible damage during shipment,
inform the supervisor and the Siemens representative.
• Check the pressure of the SF6 gas fill provided for transport at the DILO connection (ask
manufacturer if positive pressure is not present) – do not discharge the transport gas fill!
• Check that the rating plate data match the overview circuit diagram to avoid mixing up
electrically different but visually identical voltage transformers.
Installation
• Raise the voltage transformer using lifting equipment and remove the transport rack.
• Mount the contact element using the special assembly device, align it and attach the
voltage transformer using centering pins and fitting bolts.
• Raise the voltage transformer using lifting equipment and remove the transport rack.
• Mount the contact element using the special assembly device, align it and attach the
voltage transformer using centering pins and fitting bolts.
• If necessary, change the position of the diverter over the rupture disk as shown in the
assembly drawing. When doing so, check again that, in this installation position, the blowout opening of the diverter is facing away from any location in which personnel could be
standing and that no parts are situated in the direction of blow-out which could redirect
the flow of gas.
• Apply corrosion protection if this has not already been done.
• Install density monitors.
Pos : 6.4.41 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-224
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.4.42 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.18 Montage des RC-T eilers @ 22\mod_1378114033766_18.doc x @ 187305 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.18 Installation of RC-divider
Preparation of RC divider for installation
• Unpack the RC divider until it is only on the transport rack,
• Clean the insulators.
• Mount the contact elements using the assembly device and align them.
• Check that the rating plate data match the overview circuit diagram.

Note
Shortening or extending the secondary cables of the RC divider is prohibited! The
cables are part of the RC measuring system.
Installation
• Screw crane lifting lugs into either the cover or the housing of the RC divider, depending
on the position in which it is installed, and lift the RC divider up using lifting equipment.
• Attach the RC divider using centering pins and fitting bolts.
• Establish high-voltage connections to the relevant contacts.
• Perform secondary wiring.
• Remove the crane lifting lugs.
Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections [ 7.6]
Pos : 6.4.43 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.19 Korrosi onssc hutz an im Frei en liegenden Anbauteilen durchführen @ 3\mod_1336046795215_18.doc x @ 16553 @ 3 @ 1
4.3.19 Apply corrosion protection to attachments located outdoors
Corrosion protection, greasing and oiling [ 7.20]
Pos : 6.4.44 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.20 Hochs pannungs-Ansc hluß klemmen an Fr eiluftdurc hführ ung @ 3\mod_1336047002496_18.doc x @ 16564 @ 2 @ 1
4.3.20 HV terminals on Air bushings
• Advise customers and/or other firms to adhere to the torque settings.
• Tighten screws to specified torque.
Pos : 6.4.45 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-225
r
Pos : 6.5.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4 Sc haltanlag e i nbetriebs etz en - Ü bersc hrift @ 22\mod_1378114115619_18.doc x @ 187430 @ 2 @ 1
4-226
Assembly and Commissioning
Assembly and Commissioning
4.4
Commissioning of switchgear
Pos : 6.5.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4 Sc haltanlag e i nbetriebs etz en - Ü bersc hrift Text @ 25\mod_1391496157134_18.doc x @ 227712 @ @ 1
This section states the function of the Test Report TR 2850. The section describes the activities to be
recorded and explains them or provides references to further explanations.
Commissioning should be started when
-
the switchgear or large parts of the switchgear (e.g. several bays) have been completely assembled
auxiliary and control cables have been connected
all auxiliary and control voltages are available at the switchgear
the SF6 activities have been completed.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Prerequisites [ 4.1]
Preparatory work [ 4.2]
Assembling the switchgear [ 4.3]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Order documentation
Completion of the following activities must be confirmed in Test Report TR 2850.
Pos : 6.5.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 1 Pr üfen auf Überei nsti mmung vom Ü bersichtssc haltpl an @ 3\mod_1336047840948_18.doc x @ 16586 @ 2 @ 1
4.4.1
Check the accordance with the circuit diagram.
Check that the actual arrangement of the devices is in accordance with the circuit diagram
Order documentation
Pos : 6.5.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 2 Widerstands mess ung der Hauptstr ombahn @ 3\mod_1336048178010_18.doc x @ 16597 @ 2 @ 1
4.4.2
Resistance measurement of main current path
Testing the primary part [ 7.16]
Pos : 6.5.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 3 SF 6 Gasfüllung und Messung @ 3\mod_1336048632273_18.doc x @ 16608 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.3
SF6 Gas filling and measurement
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Pos : 6.5.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
4-227
r
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.5.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 4 Kontroll e der i nner en Abdec kung des Dic htewächters - 8DN 8 @ 3\mod_1336048851392_18.doc x @ 16619 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.4
Check the internal cover of the density monitor
Pos : 6.5.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 5 F unktions prüfung Dreistellungssc halter, Erder - 8DN 8 @ 3\mod_1336049105246_18.doc x @ 16630 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.5
Function test of three-position disconnector, earth switch
Testing the disconnectors, earthing and high-speed earthing switches [ 7.8]
Pos : 6.5.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 6 F unktions prüfung Leistungss chalter @ 3\mod_1336049411084_18.doc x @ 16641 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.6
Check operation of circuit-breakers
Checking the electronic circuit-breaker control [ 7.10]
Pos : 6.5.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4. 7 Prüfung der M eldungen @ 3\mod_1336050104149_18.doc x @ 16652 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.7
Check alarms
Checking the gas monitoring system [ 7.3]
Checking the control functions [ 7.11]
Pos : 6.5.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4. 8 Prüfung der R üc ks pannungsfr eiheit aller Sc hutzsc halter @ 3\mod_1336050344019_18.doc x @ 16663 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.8
Check that MCB’s are free of reverse voltage
Pos : 6.5.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4. 9 Entfernen der Klebemar ken und/oder Pl asti kstopfen an Belüftungss tutzen @ 3\mod_1336050513625_18.doc x @ 16674 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.9
Removing the stickers and/or plastic stopper at ventilation tubes
Pos : 6.5.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.10 Pr üfung der Anti kondensatheizungen @ 3\mod_1336050792292_18.doc x @ 16685 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.10 Check anti-condensation heating units
Checking the control functions [ 7.11]
Pos : 6.5.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.11 F unktions prüfung der Steuerung @ 3\mod_1336051377708_18.doc x @ 16696 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.11 Check operation of control system
Checking the control functions [ 7.11]
Pos : 6.5.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.12 Kontroll e der H S-Pr üfanl agen - 8DN 8 @ 3\mod_1336051603123_18.doc x @ 16707 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.12 Checking the HV testing systems
• Check and document the completeness and condition of high voltage test equipment
Pos : 6.5.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.13 Kunde über bevors tehende Hoc hs pannungs prüfung infor miert @ 3\mod_1336051784504_18.doc x @ 16718 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.13 Customer informed of pending high-voltage tests
Pos : 6.5.17 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
4-228
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.5.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.14 Z ustand des Kabel endversc hlus ses kontr ollieren/Kabelansc hluss überpr üfen @ 3\mod_1336052001668_18.doc x @ 16729 @ 2 @ 1
4.4.14 Check the condition of the cable end closing bush
• Record the way in which the cable end is terminated.
Check cable sealing end [ 7.15]
Pos : 6.5.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.15 Hochs pannungs prüfung @ 3\mod_1336052227708_18.doc x @ 16740 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.15 High-voltage test
Testing the primary part [ 7.16]
Pos : 6.5.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.15 Wec hs els pannungspr üfung - 8DN 8 @ 13\mod_1353330570278_18.doc x @ 77563 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.16 Alternating current test
Testing the primary part [ 7.16]
Pos : 6.5.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.16 Stromwandler über prüfen @ 22\mod_1378114190983_18.doc x @ 187630 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.17 Check current transformer
Testing the primary part [ 7.16]
Pos : 6.5.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.17 Dichtung i m Klemmenkas ten kontrolli eren - 8DN8 @ 3\mod_1336052880258_18.doc x @ 16762 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.18 Check seal in terminal box
Pos : 6.5.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.18 Spannungs wandler prüfungen @ 3\mod_1336053090629_18.doc x @ 16773 @ 3 @ 1
4.4.19 Voltage converter tests
Testing the voltage transformer [ 7.13]
Pos : 6.5.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.19 RC-Teil er pr üfen @ 22\mod_1378464143679_18.doc x @ 188981 @ 2 @ 1
4.4.20 Check the RC-divider
• For this, apply an alternating voltage of approx. 1000 V to the primary connections and to
the corresponding secondary connections (at the end of the secondary lead). Measure
the voltage with a high-impedance voltmeter under load. Thes secondary voltage must
measure 0.833 V ±5 % at a primary voltage of 1000V.
• Note the results in the test report TR 2808.A.2 and keep them for later comparison
measurements.
Pos : 6.5.25 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.19 Wetterschutz haube, Kontr olle der Z entr alsc hraube @ 3\mod_1336053301203_18.doc x @ 16784 @ 2 @ 1
4.4.21 Weather-protection cover, check central bolt
Fitting the rupture disks [ 7.18]
4-229
r
Pos : 6.5.26 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
4-230
Assembly and Commissioning
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.6.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.5 Sonstiges /4.5 Sonstiges @ 22\mod_1378114260138_18.doc x @ 187830 @ 3 @ 1
4.5
Miscellaneous
This section states the function of the Test Report TR 2850. The section describes the activities to be
recorded and explains them or provides references to further explanations.
Completion of the following activities must be confirmed in Test Report TR 2850.
Pos : 6.6.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.5 Sonstiges /4.5.1 Revisi on der Aufbauzeic hnungen @ 3\mod_1336054080891_18.doc x @ 16817 @ 2 @ 1
4.5.1
Revision of design drawings
Pos : 6.6.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.5 Sonstiges /4.5.2 Revisi on der Sc haltpläne @ 3\mod_1336117897944_18.doc x @ 16830 @ 2 @ 1
4.5.2
Revision of schematics
Pos : 6.6.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.5 Sonstiges /4.5.3 Pr üfen, ob Abweic hungen mittels NCR (Non C onformi ty R eport) erfaßt @ 3\mod_1336118050430_18.doc x @ 16841 @ 2 @ 1
4.5.3
Check whether anomalies entered in NCR (Non Conformity Report)
Pos : 6.6.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.5 Sonstiges /4.5.4 Pr üfpr otokolle erstellt @ 3\mod_1336118722263_18.doc x @ 16852 @ 3 @ 1
4.5.4
Inspection reports written
Pos : 6.6.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.5 Sonstiges /4.5.5 Rüc kvers and von M aterial und Ausrüs tung kontrollier en @ 3\mod_1336119203233_18.doc x @ 16863 @ 2 @ 1
4.5.5
Check return of material and equipment
• Check that SF6 cylinders, insert gas, surplus material, tools and instruments have been
returned.
• Check that return dispatch notes have been passed (or sent) to project management.
• Check that HV testing systems and shielding components have been returned.
Pos : 6.6.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.5 Sonstiges /4.5.6 Vermer ke über nicht betri ebsbereite Anlagenteile kontr ollieren @ 3\mod_1336119444964_18.doc x @ 16874 @ 3 @ 1
4.5.6
Check warnings regarding non-operational parts of the plant
• Check that warning regarding non-operational parts of the plant has been placed in the
control cabinet of the relevant outgoing feeder.
Pos : 6.6.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.5 Sonstiges /4.5.7 Verschli eß en von Bel üftungsöffnungen bei nic ht angesc hlossenen Anti kondens atheizungen @ 3\mod_1336119596985_18.doc x @ 16885 @ 3 @ 1
4.5.7
Closing the ventilation ducts
Close the ventilation ducts when the anticondensation heaters are not connected.
Pos : 6.6.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.5 Sonstiges /4.5.8 Übernahme von Sc haltanlagenz ubehör @ 3\mod_1336119750340_18.doc x @ 16896 @ 3 @ 1
4.5.8
Acceptance of switchgear accessories
Pos : 6.6.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.5 Sons tiges/4.5.9 Vorl äufiges / Endgültiges Abnahme- Protokoll @ 3\mod_1336119871789_18.doc x @ 16907 @ 3 @ 1
4.5.9
Preliminary / Final Acceptance-Report
Pos : 6.6.11 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
4-231
r
Pos : 7.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5 Betri eb/5 Betrieb @ 0\mod_1331115525877_18.doc x @ 3164 @ 1 @ 1
4-232
Assembly and Commissioning
Operation
5 Operation
5-233
r

5-234
Operation
Note
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in part, from
the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track guiding, the
location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary equipment.
Operation
Pos : 7.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1 Vorauss etzungen @ 0\mod_1331045132419_18.doc x @ 2996 @ 2 @ 1
5.1
Prerequisites
This section describes
- basic requirements of operation
- specific measures for accident and fire prevention.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Manual operation [ 5.2]
Checks, alarms, causes, remedial measures [ 5.3]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Pos : 7.3.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1.1 Gr unds ätzlic he Anforderungen 01 @ 0\mod_1331105846780_18.doc x @ 3020 @ 3 @ 1
5.1.1
Basic requirements
The scope and content of switchgear operation guidelines are confirmed by the fact that a system is always
a part of the larger system, a substation and finally a network with varying interdependencies and links.
The operator must diligently adapt his plant-specific directions to the respective manufacturers’
documentation and regulations. This ensures reliable, safe and fault-free operation of the switchgear.
Pos : 7.3.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1.1 Gr unds ätzlic he Anforderungen 02 - Vorsc hriften zum Betrieb Grafi k mit Bildu @ 25\mod_1392811792473_18.doc x @ 229732 @ @ 1
Operating regulations (national and international)
Operatinginstructions
Operating instructions / Circuit manuals /
other documentations from manufacturer
Network
Station
Bay
Network control
system
Station control
system
Bay control
system
Switchgear
system
Network control
Substation
control device
Bay control unit
Drive system
Load
management
Central control
system unit
Input / output
unit
Gas monitoring
Station
protection
Feeder
protection
device
Circuit
protection
devices
Telecontrol
Telecontrol
Operating requirements
Fig. 5-1
Operating regulations for the operation of the switchgear
Pos : 7.3.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-235
r
Operation
Pos : 7.3.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1.2 Spezifisc he Maß nahmen z ur Verhütung von Bränden und U nfällen @ 0\mod_1331106672678_18.doc x @ 3038 @ 3 @ 1
5.1.2
Specific measures for accident and fire prevention
The metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear offers a high degree of safety in every respect. This must not,
however, lead to the operating personnel adopting an indifferent attitude towards the safety rules over time.
In addition to the safety rules valid in the country in question, a few precautionary measures and points to be
noted in connection with this type of switchgear are listed below:
• The accessory items required for operating the switchgear and for reasons of safety
(devices for manual operation, warning signs, hand lamps, fire extinguishers etc.) must
be stored neatly at a certain point and be checked regularly for completeness and proper
functioning.
• Keys of any kind may be accessible only to the operating personnel.
• When operating the switchgear by hand remember that there is no protection against
incorrect operation as provided by the station or bay control unit.
• In the case of local control via the switchgear interlock unit, a minimum command
duration of about 500 ms must be adhered to. The maintained command does not
become effective until this time has passed.
• It is not permitted to make changes of any kind to the switchgear while it is in operation.
This includes the dismantling of parts, changing settings on monitoring devices, working
on the circuit-breaker drive system, etc.
• Even in relieved condition, the springs of drive systems are precharged.
• Do not climb into the switchgear; use stable ladders or frame structures if necessary!
• The openings in the diverters over the rupture disks must not be closed or covered during
operation, nor is it permitted to change the operating direction of the diverters or interfere
with them in any way.
• All services, extension, inspection and corrective maintenance respectively, should be
carried out by or under supervision of Siemens qualified personnel.
• Cable plug systems with dummy plugs or pressure gas tight covers on cable plug-in
bushings may only be used for the duration of the high-voltage test. The continuous use
of cable sealing ends with cable plug-in bushings is only permissible if a high-voltage
cable is connected.
Pos : 7.3.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-236
Operation
Pos : 7.3.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1.3 Verhalten bei tiefen oder hohen U mg ebungstemperaturen @ 0\mod_1331109945042_18.doc x @ 3047 @ 3 @ 1
5.1.3
Procedure if ambient temperatures are too high or too low
In addition to observing the relevant regulations and standards, the following safety notice must be observed
in order to prevent injuries:
Attention
Touching the metallic housing when temperatures are low (freezing) or high
(direct sunlight) can result in injuries to the hands.
The risk of injury is decreased or increased respectively by the current flowing
through the affected component at the time.
Special care must therefore be taken when ambient temperatures are high and
the rated normal current is flowing through the system at the same time.
Pos : 7.3.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-237
r
Pos : 7.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Schalten/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Schalten @ 0\mod_1331560404803_18.doc x @ 4446 @ 2 @ 1
5-238
Operation
Operation
5.2
Manual operation
Manual operation of disconnectors, earthing switches, high-speed earthing switches and circuit-breakers is
possible during commissioning and maintenance work, and also in an emergency if the control supply has
failed or (for example) the motor drive is defective.
Manual operation always takes place by way of over-riding the switchgear interlock unit.
This section describes in detail how to, during commissioning, maintenance and in the event of malfunction,
- manually switch all locally controlled bay equipment when interlocking has been deactivated (S1 switched
to OPEN);
- manually actuate disconnector and earthing switch modules as well as work-in-progress earthing
switches and high-speed earthing switches through direct activation of the motor drive;
- manually switch the circuit-breaker using direct electrical or mechanical activation of the releases.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Prerequisites [ 5.1]
Checks, alarms, causes, remedial measures [ 5.3]
Warning
Failing to observe a minimum safe distance to live system components,
particularly outdoor bushings, may result in death, severe injury and
considerable damage to property and environmental damage.
Before work on high-voltage systems can be carried out, a safe working
area must be created.
• Any work on high-voltage systems may be performed by adequately qualified personnel
only.
• Always observe a minimum safe distance to live system components.
Pos : 7.4.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-239
Operation
r
Pos : 7.4.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Schalten/5.2.1 Mit Vor ortsteuer ung bei abgesc haltetem Sc haltfehl ersc hutz behelfs mäßig schalten @ 0\mod_1331110129358_18.doc x @ 3055 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.1
Manual operation in local control with the switchgear interlock deactivated
Warning
In manual operation, switchgear interlocking is ineffective. Actuation of
switching devices in contravention of the interlock conditions specified for
the switchgear can result in serious damage to the switching device and to
the system.
• Manual operation may be performed only by adequately qualified personnel.
• Prior to manual operation, check the mechanical position indicators to ensure that the
interlock conditions are fulfilled.
• Non-maintained command operation is possible; disconnectors, earthing switches and
high-speed earthing switches must therefore be moved into their final positions.
Pos : 7.4.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-240
Operation
Pos : 7.4.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Schalten/5.2.2 Am M otorantri eb behelfs mäßig sc halten 010 @ 1\mod_1332999412214_18.doc x @ 12510 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.2
Manual operation of the motor drive
Warning
In manual operation, switchgear interlocking is ineffective. Actuation of
switching devices in contravention of the interlock conditions specified for
the switchgear can result in serious damage to the system.
• Manual operation may be performed only by adequately qualified personnel.
• Prior to manual operation, check the mechanical position indicators to ensure that the
interlock conditions are fulfilled.
• Interrupt the control circuit by actuating the cutout and pulling the plug. Secure against
reclosing.
• Isolate the manually switched disconnector, earthing switch and work-in-progress as well
as the high-speed earthing switch from high-voltage. Secure them against reclosing.
• Operation by non-maintained command is possible; disconnectors, earthing switches and
high-speed earthing switches must therefore be moved into their final positions.
Attention
Reconnection of high voltage when a disconnector or earthing switch has not
reached its proper end position (i.e. is in fault position) can cause damage to the
switchgear.

Note
Switching sounds that might occur inside the gas compartment during manual
switching shortly before or after disconnecting the switching contacts are normal
and do not constitute any danger to the operator.
The final position of the switching device must be reached. Never leave the
switching device in an intermediate position.
Pos : 7.4.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-241
Operation
r
Pos : 7.4.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Schalten/5.2.2.1 Er dungssc halter am M otorantrieb behelfs mäßig schalten 010 - 8DN8 @ 0\mod_1331560512288_18.doc x @ 4451 @ 4 @ 1
5.2.2.1
Manual operation of the earthing switch motor drive
The motor drive of the high speed or work in progress earthing switch can manually operated by using a
cordless screwdriver or a ratchet with the attached Allen wrench

Note
Only the enclosed system accessory tools may be used for manual operation.
Required tools:
- the Allen wrench
- a ratchet or
- a cordless screwdriver (not included in the scope of supply).
Pos : 7.4.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Schalten/5.2.2.1 Er dungssc halter am M otorantrieb behelfs mäßig schalten 020 - 8DN8, 8DQ1 6 Bild1 @ 25\mod_1395223569697_0.doc x @ 234649 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Schalten/5.2.2.1 Er dungssc halter am M otorantrieb behelfs mäßig schalten 020 - 8DN8, 8DQ1 6 Bildu @ 3\mod_1336125907338_18.doc x @ 16920 @ @ 1
Fig. 5-2
Ratchet / cordless screwdriver with attached Allen wrench
Pos : 7.4.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-242
Operation
Pos : 7.4.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.1 Erdungss chalter am Motor antrieb behelfs mäßig sc halten 030 @ 3\mod_1336126070523_18.doc x @ 16931 @ @ 1
For manual operation:
• Loosen wing screws and remove cover.
The limit switch interrupts the control circuit.
Pos : 7.4.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.1 Erdungss chalter am Motor antrieb behelfs mäßig sc halten 040 - 8DN 8 Bild2 @ 6\mod_1344153752554_0.doc x @ 42142 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.1 Erdungss chalter am Motor antrieb behelfs mäßig sc halten 040 - 8DN 8 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336126259005_18.doc x @ 16942 @ @ 1
Fig. 5-3
Cover for manual operation and electric locking
Pos : 7.4.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten5.2.2.1 Er dungssc halter am M otorantrieb behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 050 - 8DN 8 @ 32\mod_1464076057050_18.doc x @ 332561 @ @ 1
Control is interrupted for the duration of manual operation Control can be temporarily interrupted
independently of this by rotating the installed cover by 180°.
Caution
The limit switches are not designed for manual operation of the motor actuator.
Operation of the limit switches by removing the cover during manual operation will
damage the limit switches!
• Only remove the cover on the motor actuator when the motor actuator is not being
controlled.
• Do not use limit switches for switching the motor actuator.
There is no hazard for the operator if the motor is electrically operated during manual operation either
inadvertently or due to an ON command that is still active (such as on restoration of control power). The limit
switches prevent electrical operation.
5-243
Operation
r
• Place ratchet or cordless driver with hex socket on the shaft end of the motor drive.
• Turn ratchet or cordless driver in the desired direction.
The direction of rotation for switching on or off is indicated on the motor actuator housing.
Caution
Do not operate the limit switches during operation with the ratchet or cordless
driver.
Use a suitable extension for the cordless driver.
Do not insert the cordless driver tool holder (chuck) into the opening for manual
operation!
Correct
Fig. 5-4
Incorrect
Use of cordless driver for manual operation
• Only turn until the limit position of the switching unit is reached. Under no
circumstances shall the switching unit be left in an intermediate position.
Caution
An incorrect limit position of the grounding switch (faulted position) can result in
damage to the switching unit on restoration of high voltage power!
Only a slight mechanical resistance can be felt on manual operation due to the gear ratio of the motor drive.
Caution
The application of a very large force against the mechanical stop for the actuator
can cause damage to important actuator elements.
Set the cordless driver to the lowest possible torque, max. 15 Nm.
5-244
Operation
• Before operation, insert the hex socket into the operating opening until it is felt to
be fully engaged on the hexagonal key.
For manual operation of the working grounding switch, the ratchet or cordless driver must be turned until the
desired position is shown on the mechanical switch position indicator and the limit switch is heard to click.
On manual operation of the fast grounding switch, the ratchet or cordless driver must be turned until the
spring mechanism has switched. After switching, continue to turn slowly until a click is heard.
For working grounding switch, chatter of the sliding clutch is generally an indication that the required limit
position has already been exceeded. In this case, slowly turn the ratchet or cordless driver back until the limit
switch is heard to click the first time. Then turn again in the opposite direction until the limit switch is heard to
click again.
As chatter can also result from unallowable drag, the mechanical switch position indicator for the switching
unit must always be observed.

Note
The fast grounding switch must be overhauled after two short-circuit switching
operations!
Pos : 7.4.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-245
Operation
r
Pos : 7.4.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 010 - 8DN 85-6 @ 21\mod_1376553773913_18.doc x @ 182112 @ 4 @ 1
5.2.2.2
Manual operation of the disconnector and earthing switch module motor drive
Provided the safety measures described at the beginning of the section are taken, the disconnector and
earthing switch module can be operated manually in emergency manual mode for maintenance work or in
the event of failure of the supply voltage.
Necessary for manual operation:
-
the two-way key [1] for switching process pre-selection
the hexagon key (marked 1) [2] for switching the disconnector
the hexagon key (marked 2) [3] for switching the earthing switch
a ratchet lever with extension
the torque limiter (gear on plate) [4]
4
3
Pos : 7.4.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 020 - 8DN 85-6 Bild @ 21\mod_1376553923332_0.doc x @ 182137 @ @ 1
2
1
Pos : 7.4.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 020 - 8DN 85-6 Bildu @ 21\mod_1376554047040_18.doc x @ 182162 @ @ 1
Fig. 5-5
Two-way key, hexagon keys and torque limiter on fixing plate
Pos : 7.4.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 025 - 8DN 8 5-6 @ 27\mod_1404370386179_18.doc x @ 248080 @ @ 1

Pos : 7.4.20 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-246
Note
The manually operation is only permitted with the torque limiter.
Don`t use a ratchet or a cordless screwdriver or other mechanical devices direct
on the hexagon key or on the motor drive.
Operation
Pos : 7.4.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 030 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 4\mod_1336130761515_18.doc x @ 16982 @ @ 1
Pre-select disconnector or earthing switch function
• Open the cover [1].
Pos : 7.4.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 040 - 8DN 8 5,8DN 86 Bild @ 6\mod_1344154588866_0.doc x @ 42214 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 040 - 8DN 85,8DN86 Bildu @ 6\mod_1344154479259_18.doc x @ 42190 @ @ 1
1
Cover
Fig. 5-6
View with cover in position
Pos : 7.4.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 050 - 8DN 8 @ 4\mod_1336130992830_18.doc x @ 16993 @ @ 1
The aperture [1] into which the two-way key is inserted is accessible.
Pos : 7.4.25 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 060 - 8DN 85,8DN86 Bild5 @ 6\mod_1344154912922_0.doc x @ 42312 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.26 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 060 - 8DN 85,8DN86 Bildu @ 6\mod_1344154827877_18.doc x @ 42288 @ @ 1
1
Opening for inserting the two-way key
Fig. 5-7
View with removed cover
Pos : 7.4.27 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 070 - 8DN 8 @ 4\mod_1336134036458_18.doc x @ 17004 @ @ 1
• To select either the disconnector or the earthing switch, insert the key into the opening [1]
and turn until the appropriate opening becomes accessible.
An interlock is activated at the same time to prevent operation from the local control cabinet or control room.

Note
Only the function that is permitted by the interlock conditions can be selected.
Pos : 7.4.28 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.29 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 080 - 8DN 8 5-6 @ 21\mod_1376554364686_18.doc x @ 182187 @ @ 1
5-247
Operation
r
Open disconnector
• Insert the hexagon key 1 for operating the disconnector

Note
The required direction of rotation is indicated.
The present switching state is shown by the position indicator.
Pos : 7.4.30 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 080 - 8DN 8 5-6 Bil d @ 21\mod_1376554558838_0.doc x @ 182212 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.31 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 080 - 8DN 8 5-6 Bil du @ 21\mod_1376554559353_18.doc x @ 182237 @ @ 1
Fig. 5-8
View with removed cover and inserted hexagon key 1
Pos : 7.4.32 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 081 - 8DN 8 5-6 @ 21\mod_1376554939969_18.doc x @ 182262 @ @ 1
Plug the fixing plate with torque limiter on the mounted hexagon key 1

Note
The fixing plate must be fitted directly at the motor drive.
Pos : 7.4.33 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 081 - 8DN 8 5-6 Bil d @ 21\mod_1376555108033_0.doc x @ 182287 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.34 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 081 - 8DN 8 5-6 Bil du @ 21\mod_1376555108595_18.doc x @ 182312 @ @ 1
Fig. 5-9
View with plugged fixing plate and torque limiter
Pos : 7.4.35 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-248
Operation
Pos : 7.4.36 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 082 - 8DN 8 5-6 @ 21\mod_1376555248810_18.doc x @ 182337 @ @ 1
Push and thigt the knurled screw direction of the gear.

Note
The fixing plate with torque limiter must be strong locked.
Pos : 7.4.37 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 082 - 8DN 8 5-6 Bil d @ 21\mod_1376555250074_0.doc x @ 182362 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.38 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 082 - 8DN 8 5-6 Bil du @ 21\mod_1376555251369_18.doc x @ 182387 @ @ 1
Fig. 5-10
Push - and rotation direction of the knurled screw
Pos : 7.4.39 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 083 - 8DN 8 5-6 @ 21\mod_1376555442955_18.doc x @ 182412 @ @ 1
Execute the operation after putting the hand crank on the shown direction of rotation. For one operation the
crank must be turned by 360°.
Pos : 7.4.40 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 083 - 8DN 8 5-6 Bil d @ 21\mod_1376555444063_0.doc x @ 182437 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.41 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 083 - 8DN 8 5-6 Bil du @ 21\mod_1376555445607_18.doc x @ 182462 @ @ 1
Fig. 5-11
Direction of rotation for opreation
Pos : 7.4.42 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-249
Operation
r
Pos : 7.4.43 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.2.2 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n am Antri eb behelfsmäßig sc halten 084 - 8DN 8 5-6 @ 21\mod_1376555692249_18.doc x @ 182487 @ @ 1
Close the Earthing switch
Loose the fixing plate with torque limiter from the motor drive and remove the hexagon key 1 for the
operation of the disconnector..
Plug the hexagon key 2 for the operation of the earthing switch into the earthing switch function, mount the
fixing plate with torque limiter and rotate 360° in shown direction.

Note
The required direction of rotation is indicated.
The present switching state is shown by the position indicator.
Interlocking the drive
To interlock the drive, remove the two-way key in one of the pre-selected positions.
The drive then remains electrically interlocked.
Pos : 7.4.44 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 010 @ 0\mod_1331110385338_18.doc x @ 3063 @ 3 @ 1
5.2.3
Manual operation of the circuit-breaker
If the control voltage fails, it is possible to switch mechanically by activating the releases.
Warning
In manual operation, switchgear interlocking is ineffective. Actuation of
switching devices in contravention of the interlock conditions specified for
the switchgear can result in serious damage to the switching device and to
the system.
• Prior to manual operation, check the mechanical position indicators to ensure that the
interlock conditions are fulfilled.
• Manual operation may be performed only by adequately qualified personnel.
Warning
Danger of serious mechanical damage!
A minimum SF6 filling pressure is required (even for switching in dead
state) for damping of the moving parts. Switching below this minimum
pressure will cause damage to the circuit-breaker.
Pressure must at least be at thelevel of general lock out SF6
• Before manual operation, check that the minimum operating pressure for mechanical
switching general lock out SF6 is available.
Gas monitoring [ 1.3]
5-250
Operation
For manual switching, activate the OPEN release [2] or the CLOSE release [1].
The circuit-breaker can only be switched off when the opening spring is charged and switched on when the
closing spring is charged. A spring status indicator [3] shows the tension status of the springs.
Pos : 7.4.45 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 030 - Bild6 @ 6\mod_1344156076690_0.doc x @ 42336 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.46 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 030 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331112149275_18.doc x @ 3110 @ @ 1
1
2
3
CLOSE release
OPEN release
Spring position indicator
Fig. 5-12
Drive cabinet with releases
5-251
Operation
r
Pos : 7.4.47 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.48 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 040 @ 0\mod_1331112518317_18.doc x @ 3119 @ @ 1
If the closing spring is not under tension due to failure of the control voltage or a defect in the tensioning
motor, it can be manually tensioned with a tool. This requires that the tool – as shown in the Fig. – be placed
on the gear shaft and turned counterclockwise until the ON latch audibly engages.
Caution
The tensioning motor starts automatically on restoration of the supply voltage –
possible startle reflex.
• Interrupt the motor power circuit before every positioning of the tool.
Pos : 7.4.49 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 040 - Bild7 @ 6\mod_1344156285091_0.doc x @ 42700 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.50 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 040 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331112562225_18.doc x @ 3124 @ @ 1
Fig. 5-13
Charging the closing spring using a tool
(Version common pin drive)
Pos : 7.4.51 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-252
Operation
Pos : 7.4.52 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 070 - 8DN 8 nur bei Ei nz elpolantri eb @ 4\mod_1336134848700_18.doc x @ 17015 @ @ 1
In version E, the access to the drive shaft is possible only from front. To do this, the special key at the height
of the marking (see figure below) must be guided backwards horizontally and must be placed on the square
of the drive shaft.
Pos : 7.4.53 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 075 - 8DN 8 Bild nur bei Einz elpol antri eb @ 6\mod_1344156403564_0.doc x @ 42724 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.4.54 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfs mäßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfs mäßig sc hal ten 075 - 8DN 8 Bildu nur bei Ei nz elpolantrieb @ 4\mod_1336135061883_18.doc x @ 17026 @ @ 1
Fig. 5-14
Charging the closing spring by means of a special key with extended handle
(Current transformer single pole drive)
Pos : 7.4.55 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-253
r
Pos : 7.5.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3 Kontr ollen, M eldungen, Urs ac hen, M aß nahmen @ 4\mod_1336135437393_18.doc x @ 17037 @ 2 @ 1
5-254
Operation
Operation
5.3
Checks, alarms, causes, remedial measures
This section describes
- recommended checks during operation
- fault signals and their causes as well as correction measures.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Prerequisites [ 5.1]
Manual operation [ 5.2]
Checking for leaks in gas compartments [ 7.4]
Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6 [ 7.23]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Gas monitoring [ 1.3]
Pos : 7.5.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.1 Kontr ollen währ end des Betri ebes @ 4\mod_1336135446564_18.doc x @ 17048 @ 3 @ 1
5.3.1
Checks during operation
Generally, checks are not necessary during operation. All parameters relevant to the operation of the
switchgear are continuously monitored. If established limits have been reached, this will be signalled visually
and, in some cases, audibly. If necessary, blocks will engage to protect the switchgear.
Independently, checks should be done by activating the lamp test buttons of the displays and indication
devices.
The switchgear can only function correctly if the following are available:
- The required gas density in the individual gas compartments.
- Opening and closing spring under tension.
- The various auxiliary supplies for control, position indicators, motor drives, electrical anti-condensation
heaters etc.
In the event of a failure or an impermissible deviation, both visual and acoustic alarms are initiated.
If these deviations reach such magnitudes that normal operation can no longer be maintained, automatic
lockout features come into effect, for example, preventing the circuit-breaker from being switched (neither by
the operating personnel nor by protective devices).
Attention
Deviations from normal operating conditions may make it necessary to act without
the interlocking normally present to prevent incorrect operation. Therefore there is
a danger of damage to or destruction of parts of the equipment.
• Any faults are only to be corrected by qualified personnel that have been properly
instructed.
• Comply with all safety instructions and operating requirements.
• Carry out all operations with due care and attention.
The values can be found in the technical data. The following sections enable values to be entered at the
relevant points.
Pos : 7.5.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.5.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.2 M eldung en für den Leistungssc halter @ 4\mod_1336379051441_18.doc x @ 17060 @ 3 @ 1
5-255
r
5.3.2
Operation
Alarms for the circuit-breaker
Pos : 7.5.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.2.1 Leis tungssc halter: SF 6-Verlust @ 4\mod_1336379716715_18.doc x @ 17071 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.2.1
Circuit Breaker: Loss of SF6
Alarm initiated: 520 kPa
Meaning:
The gas density in the gas compartment has decreased. A restriction on operation is not (yet) necessary.
Cause:
A bad seal releases gas into the air or into a neighbouring gas compartment.
Measures to be taken:
• Top up with gas from a cylinder using the filling device connected to flange W1 in the
automatic control unit to compensate for any gas loss.
• Check the gas compartment continuously for leaks. In the control unit, connect a
precision pressure gauge to maintenance flange W1 for this purpose. Record pressure
drop per time unit (every hour, every 3 hours, after 12 hours, after 24 hours) starting with
smaller time units.
If the gas pressure is dropping by measurable amounts (take into account that it varies with temperature),
notify the appropriate Siemens agency.
• Until Siemens specialists have carried out repairs, top up with gas using the filling device
or the maintenance unit connected to flange W1 to compensate for any gas loss.
Pos : 7.5.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-256
Operation
Pos : 7.5.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.2.2 LS: F unktionss perr e SF6 @ 4\mod_1336379723371_18.doc x @ 17082 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.2.2
Circuit Breaker: General lockout SF6
Alarm initiated at: 500 kPa
Meaning:
Gas pressure has dropped so low that arc-quenching is no longer ensured.
The circuit-breaker cannot now be operated electrically because the trigger circuits and the closing circuit
have been interrupted.
Caution
The circuit-breaker is not locked against manual operation of the release devices.
The parameters required for safe switching are not met with manual operation;
switching under load may result in the breaker being damaged.
• Only operate the breaker manually during commissioning, maintenance and in an
emergency and NOT during normal operation.
• Isolate the circuit-breaker before manual operation.
A minimum SF6 filling pressure is required (even for switching in dead state) for damping of the moving parts.
Switching below this minimum pressure will cause damage to the circuit-breaker.
Before manual operation, check that the minimum pressure for mechanical switching is available (general
lockout SF6).
Cause:
A bad seal releases gas into the air or into a neighbouring gas compartment.
Measures to be taken:
• When the breaker has to be opened, top up the gas filling from the cylinder using the
filling device connected to flange W1 in the automatic control unit / compensate for any
gas loss, so that the general lockout is cancelled.
• Open the circuit-breaker.
• Notify the appropriate SIEMENS agency and ask for specialists to be sent.
Pos : 7.5.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-257
Operation
r
Pos : 7.5.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.2.3 LS: Ei nfeder ents pannt @ 4\mod_1336379729043_18.doc x @ 17093 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.2.3
Circuit Breaker: On-spring unloaded
Meaning:
Closing spring spring is not tensioned. The circuit-breaker is
- locked against closing,
- locked against auto-reclosing (AR).
Attention
The circuit-breaker is not locked against manual operation from the releases.
Causes:
a) Charging process running
b) No motor voltage
c) Charging motor defective.
Measures to be taken in the control room:
If the message appears for less than 30 s, no further measures are required. The motor has tensioned the
closing spring. The circuit-breaker is ready for switching again.
If the message appears for more than 30 s, motor run time monitoring starts. [ 5.3.2.5]
Measures to be taken locally:
Cause a) No further action necessary (normal operation)
Cause b) [ 5.3.2.5]
Cause c) [ 5.3.2.5]
Pos : 7.5.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-258
Operation
Pos : 7.5.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahmen/5.3.2.4 Motorsc hutz @ 4\mod_1336380531148_18.doc x @ 17104 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.2.4
Motor protection
Meaning:
The fault current circuit-breaker for the motor circuit has tripped.
Causes:
a) Short circuit in the motor circuit
b) The kinematic chain is sluggish.
Measures to be taken in the control room:
In order to ensure continuity of supply, initiate the appropriate load transfer actions in the system. Then open
the circuit-breaker that caused the alarm. Further measures need to be taken locally after opening.
Measures to be taken locally:
a) Measure the motor circuit. In the case of a short circuit, replace the faulty part.
b) Perform a visual inspection of the drive. Check visually that the spring is in the correct position.
If the spring is only partly wound up, use a suitable spring discharging mechanism to discharge it. Then
check the kinematic chain for sluggishness.
Warning
Any attempt to relieve by hand or by the release a spring which has not
been wound properly can lead to severe physical injury.
• Only use a suitable spring discharging mechanism to discharge the spring
• After repairing any faults, switch the circuit-breaker on.
Pos : 7.5.12 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-259
Operation
r
Pos : 7.5.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahmen/5.3.2.5 Motorlaufzeitüber wachung @ 4\mod_1336380729729_18.doc x @ 17115 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.2.5
Motor run time monitoring
Meaning:
The motor run time monitor has tripped. The motor is switched off by default (if required, the motor can be
left running and just a message output). The run time monitor is set by default to 60 s.
In circuit-breaker drives with AC motors, the set time can be increased in order to prevent motor voltage
failures through AC network operations (no CB-internal malfunction).
Causes:
a) The kinematic chain is broken
b) The kinematic chain is sluggish
c) No motor voltage
d) The charging motor is faulty
Measures to be taken in the control room:
In order to ensure continuity of supply, initiate the appropriate load transfer actions in the system. Then open
the circuit-breaker that caused the alarm. Further measures need to be taken locally after opening.
• Acknowledge alarm using lockswitch after rectifying the fault.
Measures to be taken locally:
a)
Perform a visual inspection of the drive. Check that the spring is in the correct position. If the spring
is not wound up, measure the motor circuit. Replace the faulty part when the motor circuit is open. If
the motor circuit is in order, see b).
When the spring is fully wound up, check that the motor shuts down properly. Change the faulty part when
the motor circuit is closed.
b)
Perform a visual inspection of the drive. Check that the spring is in the correct position. If the spring
is not (or only partly) wound up, measure the motor circuit. Replace the faulty part when the motor
circuit is open. Check the kinematic chain for sluggishness when the motor circuit is OK. To do this,
relieve the wound-up spring beforehand using the spring relieving mechanism.
Warning
Any attempt to relieve by hand or by the release a spring which has not
been wound properly can lead to severe physical injury.
• Only use a suitable spring discharging mechanism to discharge the spring
c) Check whether
- motor protecting switch is active
- the necessary voltage is present
d) Replace charging motor.
Pos : 7.5.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-260
Operation
Pos : 7.5.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahmen/5.3.2.6 KU- Verriegel ung: @ 4\mod_1336382322803_18.doc x @ 17126 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.2.6
Autoreclosure interlocking:
This facility is not used in switch control. It is available in the control room for blocking the feeder protection
auto-reclosure function.
Meaning:
The circuit-breaker cannot perform auto-reclosure at present.
Causes:
a) The charging motor tensions the spring (operating mode)
b) The General lockout SF6 has tripped.
Measures to be taken:
a) [ 5.3.2.3]
b) [ 5.3.2.2]
Pos : 7.5.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahmen/5.3.2.7 Mel dung Z wangsgleic hlauf @ 4\mod_1336382567054_18.doc x @ 17137 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.2.7
Pole discrepancy alarm
Meaning:
The pole discrepancy alarm is generated when the pole discrepancy supervision has tripped.
Causes:
The pole discrepancy supervision provides for the automatic opening of the closed interrupter unit if, after an
adjustable time period, not all the poles are in the same breaker state. This can have various causes:
a) The command was initiated for a single pole only.
b) One or more releases are defective.
c) One or two drives are not ready for switching.
The waiting time is factory-set to 1 second. This is necessary in order to carry out a single-pole autoreclosure without tripping the pole discrepancy supervision.
Measures to be taken in the control room:
a) Acknowledge the alarm after establishing the reason for the tripping of the pole discrepancy.
b) Check whether the command was initiated for a single pole only.
Measures to be taken locally:
a) Check the releases and the electrical trigger circuits of the CB.
b) Check the kinematic chain.
Pos : 7.5.17 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-261
r
Operation
Pos : 7.5.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahmen/5.3.3 Mel dungen der Anlag enbaus tei ne @ 13\mod_1351781657329_18.doc x @ 76203 @ 3 @ 1
5.3.3
Signals from switchgear modules
Pos : 7.5.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahmen/5.3.3.1 SF 6-Verlus t @ 4\mod_1336382734820_18.doc x @ 17148 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.3.1
Loss of SF6
Alarm initiated: 420 kPa
Meaning:
The gas density in the gas compartment has decreased. A restriction on operation is not (yet) necessary.
Cause:
A bad seal releases gas into the air or into a neighbouring gas compartment.
Measures to be taken:
• Top up the gas filling from the cylinder using the filling device connected to the
maintenance flange of the gas monitoring system to compensate for any gas loss.
• Check the gas compartment continuously for leakage. If necessary, connect a precision
pressure gauge to the maintenance flange for this purpose. Record pressure drop per
time unit (every hour, every 3 hours, after 12 hours, after 24 hours) starting with smaller
time units.
• If the gas pressure is dropping by measurable amounts (take into account that it varies
with temperature), notify the appropriate Siemens agency.
Pos : 7.5.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahmen/5.3.3.2 Mini mal e Betriebs dichte SF 6 @ 4\mod_1336382832758_18.doc x @ 17159 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.3.2
Minimum SF6 density
Alarm initiated: 400 kPa
Meaning:
The gas density in the compartment has decreased to such an extent that the dielectric strength of the
affected switchgear module(s) is just below the normal level. The gas density must not decrease any further,
i.e. the affected part of the switchgear must then be taken out of service.
Cause:
Gas is released into the air by means of an bad seal.
Measures to be taken:
same measures as on the "Loss of SF6"; the following also applies:
• Monitor the gas pressure very carefully and engage specialists to carry out repairs as
soon as possible.
• Please notify the appropriate Siemens agency for this purpose.
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Pos : 7.5.21 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-262
Operation
Pos : 7.5.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahmen/5.3.3.3 SF 6-Druc k steigt @ 4\mod_1336382979711_18.doc x @ 17170 @ 4 @ 1
5.3.3.3
SF6 pressure rising
Alarm initiated: 520 kPa
Meaning:
The gas pressure in the gas compartment has risen above the rated operating level.
Cause:
a) Too much gas was pumped in at a lower ambient temperature.
b) Gas has entered the compartment from an adjacent compartment with higher operating pressure (circuit
breaker) through a defective bushing.
The alarm may have already been initiated there
“CB: Loss of SF6”.
Measures to be taken:
Cause a)
• Lower the gas pressure to the rated operating level (as a function of the temperature) by
bleeding it off, or pumping it into the vessel of a service unit.
Cause b)
• Notify the appropriate Siemens agency and ask for specialists to be sent.
Pos : 7.5.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahmen/5.3.4 Störstellung @ 4\mod_1336383136836_18.doc x @ 17181 @ 3 @ 1
5.3.4
Fault position
Alarm:
Signal is given when the pin of the disconnector or of the earthing switch is not in its prescribed end position
after a switching process.
Meaning:
The fault position results in a change in the dielectric properties of the switching device concerned. If this
state is allowed to continue, severe damage can result when the high voltage is switched back in.
Cause:
The disconnector or earthing switch has not been moved into its end position (with the switchgear interlock
unit deactivated, i.e. S1 switch in OPEN position).
Measures to be taken:
• Acknowledge fault position via switchgear interlock unit, or acknowledge customerspecific activation.
• Then close or open by means of appropriate pushbuttons.
• Reactivate switchgear interlock unit.
Pos : 7.5.24 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
5-263
r
Pos : 8.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6 Ins tandhaltung/6 Ins tandhaltung @ 0\mod_1331121759710_18.doc x @ 3235 @ 1 @ 1
5-264
Operation
Maintenance
6 Maintenance
6-265
r

Pos : 8.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
6-266
Maintenance
Note
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in part, from
the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track guiding, the
location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary equipment.
Maintenance
Pos : 8.3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1 Vor aussetzungen @ 0\mod_1331121890930_18.doc x @ 3244 @ 2 @ 1
6.1
Prerequisites
This section describes:
-
Regulations for safe working conditions
Basic requirements of personnel
Maintenance kits
Applicable measures in case of malfunction.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Intervals and maintenance service [ 6.2]
Maintenance work [ 6.3]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Disposing of high-voltage switching devices and systems [ 7.27]
Pos : 8.3.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.1 Sicherheits maß nahmen - 8DN 8 5/6 - mit RC-Teiler @ 29\mod_1429186553963_18.doc x @ 276327 @ 3 @ 1
6.1.1
Basic safety measures
Warning
During operation, certain parts of the switchgear carry dangerous voltage.
Improper operation and non-observance of safety instructions can result in
death, severe personal injury and substantial property and environment
damage.
Before any work starts:
•
•
•
•
•
Switch off and isolate
Secure against reclosing
Check for de-energized state
Earth and short circuit the equipment
Cover or cut off adjacent live parts.
Warning
In operation, parts of the drive systems are spring charged. Even in
discharged state, springs are pre-charged.
The closing spring is automatically recharged after closing as long as the
control voltage and motor voltage of the circuit-breaker drive are not
switched off.
The spring snap mechanism of the high speed earthing switch is charged
during closing and opening.
Improper operation of the switchgear and non-observance of safety
instructions can result in serious injury to personnel and substantial
damage to property and the environment.
6-267
Maintenance
r
When working on the circuit-breaker, discharge the closing and opening springs. To do this
•
•
•
•
•
Switch off the motor voltage.
Open the circuit-breaker if it is set to CLOSE.
Close the circuit-breaker.
Open the circuit-breaker again.
Switch off the control voltage.
When working on the high-speed earthing switch, turn off the control and motor voltage.
Warning
During operation, certain parts of the switchgear are under SF6 pressure.
Under certain circumstances, SF6 and its decomposition products may
represent a hazard.
Improper operation and non-observance of safety instructions can result in
death, severe personal injury and substantial property and environment
damage.
• Reduce the SF6 pressure to the required value. Install the appropriate service units for
work with gas.
• When working in gas compartments, if there is a danger of mechanical load on the
bushing due to the use of tools or as a result of falling objects, the pressure in the
adjacent gas compartment must be reduced to < 0.5 bar.
• If the occurrence of SF6 decomposition products is to be expected, the prescribed
protective measures must be taken.
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Caution
On the primary side, a removed RC divider can have a residual charge, because
of the condensers fitted, even after switching off and earthing of the switchgear.
On the secondary side a voltage is applied when the switchgear is in operation.
If it is touched the charge is balanced via the person.
The shock can lead to a defence reaction and this can result in bodily injury and
material and environmental damage.
• Before removing an RC divider from the switchgear, the relevant installation component
must be insulated and earthed.
• After removing the RC divider from the switchgear, short-circuit the primary side of the
RC divider between the primary conductor and the housing.
• Before starting work on the measurement and protection devices, all secondary side
outputs of the RC divider must be short-circuited.
6-268
Maintenance
Warning
Failing to observe a minimum safe distance to live system components,
particularly outdoor bushings, may result in death, severe injury and
considerable damage to property and environmental damage.
Before work on high-voltage systems can be carried out, a safe working
area must be created.
• Any work on high-voltage systems may be performed by adequately qualified personnel
only.
• Always observe a minimum safe distance to live system components.
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Pos : 8.3.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-269
Maintenance
r
Pos : 8.3.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.2 Antrieb gegen Betätigen sic her n @ 0\mod_1331122221232_18.doc x @ 3259 @ 3 @ 1
6.1.2
Secure drive against operation
Pos : 8.3.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3 ES 001 - 8DN8 Übersc hrift @ 27\mod_1401783073608_18.doc x @ 245859 @ 4 @ 1
6.1.2.1
Electrical interlocking of the earthing switch motor drive
Pos : 8.3.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3 ES 011 - 8DN8 elektromechanisc h @ 0\mod_1331122297264_18.doc x @ 3263 @ @ 1
Electrical interlocking is effected by interruption of the control circuit by means of a limit switch [1], the
sensor of which is present on the cover for manual operation and electric locking [2].
• Loosen wing screws [3] and remove cover.
The limit switch interrupts the control circuit.
• Fit the cover twisted (cover marking [4] points towards "OPEN").
• Tight the wing screws[3]
Pos : 8.3.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3 ES 011a - 8DN 8 5 el ektr omec hanis ch Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344070858635_0.doc x @ 41820 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Pos : 8.3.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3 ES 011b - 8DN 8 el ektr omec hanis ch Bildu @ 0\mod_1331122305686_18.doc x @ 3268 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
Limit switch
Cover
Wing bolt
Cover marking
Fig. 6-1
Drive with cover for manual operation and electric locking
Pos : 8.3.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3 TR + ES 030 - 8DN 8, 8D Q1 1/3, 8DN 9 D ec kelstellungen Bild2 @ 6\mod_1344071095396_0.doc x @ 41844 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.3.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3 TR + ES 030 - 8DN8, 8DQ1 1/3, 8DN 9 D ec kelstellung en Bil d2u @ 1\mod_1333095190246_18.doc x @ 12921 @ @ 1
1
Limit switch
Fig. 6-2
Cover positions
a) Limit switch with cover in “operation” position
b) Limit switch with cover in “control disabled” position
Pos : 8.3.11 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.3.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 ES 001 - 8DN 8 mechanisch bl oc ki eren @ 21\mod_1376485063274_18.doc x @ 181785 @ 4 @ 1
6-270
Maintenance
6.1.2.2
Mechanical blocking of the earthing switch motor drive
For the mechanically blocking of the earthing switch the cover for manual operation needs to be replaced
with the (red) cover for blocking.
Caution
Danger of damage to operating mechanisms: Remove all blocking devices before
performing switching operations.
• Fit blocking devices only in accordance with the operating instructions.
• Do not give clearance for switching operations until all blocking devices are removed.
For application of the blocking:
• Loose the wing screws [3] and remove the cover ->Fig. 6-1.
The limit switch interrupts the control circuit
• Insert the cover for blocking and tight the wing screws.
Pos : 8.3.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 ES 001 - 8DN 8 mechanisch bl oc ki eren Bild1 @ 21\mod_1376543821026_0.doc x @ 181810 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.3.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 ES 001 - 8DN 8 mechanisch bl oc ki eren Bild1u @ 21\mod_1376544137398_18.doc x @ 181835 @ @ 1
Fig. 6-3
Cover for mechanically blocking
Pos : 8.3.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-271
Maintenance
r
Pos : 8.3.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 ES 010 - 8DN 8 mechanisch bl oc ki ern für Wartung @ 21\mod_1376484651305_18.doc x @ 181760 @ 4 @ 1
6.1.2.3
Mechanical blocking of the earthing switch drive linkage for maintenance
Earthing switches can be blocked on the drive linkage for maintenance.
Caution
Danger of damage to operating mechanisms: Remove all blocking devices before
performing switching operations.
• Fit blocking devices only in accordance with the operating instructions.
• Do not give clearance for switching operations until all blocking devices are removed.
For application of the blocking:
• Remove cover on motor drive.
• Insert the blocking bolt through the hole in the drive lever [1].
Pos : 8.3.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 ES 010 - 8DN 8 mechanisch bl oc ki ern für Wartung Bild @ 6\mod_1344071377234_0.doc x @ 41868 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.3.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 ES 010 - 8DN 8 mechanisch bl oc ki ern für Wartung Bildu @ 1\mod_1333097808446_18.doc x @ 13021 @ @ 1
1
Operating lever
Fig. 6-4
Blocking the earthing switch on the drive linkage
Pos : 8.3.19 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-272
Maintenance
Pos : 8.3.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.3 TR + ES 001 - 8DN8 Übersc hrift @ 27\mod_1401785784771_18.doc x @ 245898 @ 4 @ 1
6.1.2.4
Electromechanical interlocking of the disconnector and earthing switch module motor drive
Pos : 8.3.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.3 TR + ES 050 - 8DN8 el ektr omec hanisc h @ 1\mod_1333101296846_18.doc x @ 13043 @ @ 1
Manual operation [ 5.2]
• Insert two-way key into the opening [1] and turn so that the desired position [2] or [3] is
reached.
Simultaneously, an interlock is activated that prevents operation from the local control cabinet or control
room.
• To interlock the drive, remove the two-way key from out of one of the pre-selected
positions.
The drive then remains electrically interlocked.
Pos : 8.3.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.3 TR + ES 050 - 8DN8 el ektr omec hanisc h Bild5 @ 6\mod_1344071788570_0.doc x @ 41892 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.3.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.3 TR + ES 050 - 8DN8 el ektr omec hanisc h Bild5u @ 1\mod_1333101304830_18.doc x @ 13065 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Opening for two-way key
Cover of shaft 1
Cover of shaft 2
Fig. 6-5
Devices for manual operation
Pos : 8.3.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 TR + ES 100 - 8DN8 mec hanisc h bl oc kier en @ 1\mod_1333101872904_18.doc x @ 13087 @ 4 @ 1
6.1.2.5
Mechanical blocking of the disconnector and earthing switch module motor drive
Disconnector and earthing switch modules can be blocked mechanically on the gear shifting gate or for
maintenance on the drive shaft.
Caution
Danger of damage to operating mechanisms: Remove all blocking devices before
performing switching operations.
• Fit blocking devices only in accordance with the operating instructions.
• Do not give clearance for switching operations until all blocking devices are removed.
6-273
r
Maintenance
For application of the blocking on the gear shifting gate:
• Remove cover for manual operation [1] on drive housing.
• Insert the blocking device [2] and save with padlock [3].
Pos : 8.3.25 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 TR + ES 100 - 8DN8 mec hanisc h bl oc kier en Bil d 1 @ 6\mod_1344152909539_0.doc x @ 41916 @ @ 1
1
2
2
3
Pos : 8.3.26 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 TR + ES 100 - 8DN8 mec hanisc h bl oc kier en Bil du1 @ 21\mod_1376545438628_18.doc x @ 181960 @ @ 1
1
2
3
Cover for manual opreation
Blocking device
Padlock
Fig. 6-6
Mechanically blocking on the gear shifting plate
6-274
Maintenance
Pos : 8.3.27 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.3.28 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 TR + ES 110 - 8DN8 mec hanisc h bl oc kier en für Wartung @ 21\mod_1376544707666_18.doc x @ 181860 @ 4 @ 1
6.1.2.6
Mechanical blocking of the disconnector and earthing switch module drive linkage for
maintenance
Disconnector and earthing switch modules can be blocked mechanically on the drive shaft for maintenance.
Caution
Danger of damage to operating mechanisms: Remove all blocking devices before
performing switching operations.
• Fit blocking devices only in accordance with the operating instructions.
• Do not give clearance for switching operations until all blocking devices are removed.
For application of the blocking:
• Remove cover on drive housing.
• Position and bolt the blocking device [1] in position on the drive shaft [2].
Pos : 8.3.29 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 TR + ES 110 - 8DN8 mec hanisc h bl oc kier en für Wartung Bild 1 @ 21\mod_1376544709351_0.doc x @ 181885 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.3.30 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.5 TR + ES 110 - 8DN8 mec hanisc h bl oc kier en für Wartung Bildu 1 @ 21\mod_1376544709928_18.doc x @ 181910 @ @ 1
1
2
Locking bolt
drive shaft
Fig. 6-7
Blocking the drive shaft
Pos : 8.3.31 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-275
r
Maintenance
Pos : 8.3.32 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.6 Verriegel ung und/oder Bloc kier ung mit Vorhängesc hloß sic her n 010 @ 0\mod_1331123409998_18.doc x @ 3300 @ 4 @ 1
6.1.2.7
Securing locking and/or blocking with a padlock
All fixtures can be secured from removal and/or rotation by using a padlock.
Pos : 8.3.33 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.6 Verriegel ung und/oder Bloc kier ung mit Vorhängesc hloß sic her n 020 - Bild @ 6\mod_1344153067505_0.doc x @ 42070 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.3.34 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.6 Verriegel ung und/oder Bloc kier ung mit Vorhängesc hloß sic her n 020 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331123414420_18.doc x @ 3310 @ @ 1
Fig. 6-8
Example of securing with a padlock
Pos : 8.3.35 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.4 Personalei ns atz @ 11\mod_1348056107517_18.doc x @ 66860 @ 3 @ 1
6.1.3
Assignment of personnel
The inspection and maintenance services may only be carried out by qualified personnel.
The advantage of calling in SIEMENS personnel is that the work is always carried out in accordance with the
latest knowledge and experience gained from a large number of metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear.
This is then reflected in the switchgear having a higher reliability standard
The experience of the SIEMENS personnel also ensures completion of the work in the shortest possible
time. Consequently, the periods of reduction or interruption to the operation of the switchgear line are kept as
short as possible.
SIEMENS qualified personnel should be supported, however, by the customer's/user's personnel.
Assignment of SIEMENS personnel also means that tools and measuring instruments etc. that are usually
not worth buying are provided on a hire basis.
Pos : 8.3.36 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.5 Wartungspakete @ 0\mod_1331123649830_18.doc x @ 3319 @ 3 @ 1
6.1.4
Maintenance kits
Maintenance kits include enough sealing material for the anticipated service requirements.
Maintenance kits are available at extra cost from SIEMENS AG.
Only those spare parts approved by the manufacturer may be used.
It is not recommended to keep a stock of such kits, since some parts, e.g. O-rings, are subject to aging.
Pos : 8.3.37 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-276
Maintenance
Pos : 8.3.38 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.6 Verhalten bei Störungen @ 0\mod_1331123682627_18.doc x @ 3323 @ 3 @ 1
6.1.5
Responding to malfunctions
Any unintended deterioration in the proper functioning of the switchgear as a whole or one of its bays is
regarded as a disturbance.
A disturbance is caused by failure of one or several parts of the switchgear. These parts have then lost their
wear reserve prematurely, possibly as a result of maloperation. For this reason, high-speed earthing
switches that caused three-phase fault by being closed inadvertently should be inspected and, if necessary,
repaired.
In the event of a disturbance apply to the appropriate SIEMENS office for assignment of qualified personnel,
stating the type and extent of the disturbance as accurately as possible and naming any parts that are
showing signs of damage. To simplify identification state the part designations given in these instructions
(terminology and/or part numbers used, reference to drawings).
Checks, alarms, causes, remedial measures [ 5.3]
Pos : 8.3.39 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-277
r
Pos : 8.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Z ykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2 Z ykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste @ 0\mod_1331123899020_18.doc x @ 3330 @ 2 @ 1
6-278
Maintenance
Maintenance
6.2
Intervals and maintenance service
The metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear is made so as to ensure the best possible relationship
between design and materials used on the one hand, and maintenance effort and intervals on the other. The
result is optimum utilization.
The switchgear therefore offers a high degree of reliability, even as the limits of wear (erosion, aging,
corrosion etc.) are approached.
The switchgear can only function reliably if it is correctly maintained. The purpose of inspection and
maintenance is therefore to:
- determine to what extent certain parts have worn and to assess their state,
- ensure that parts still in good condition are kept in this state,
- replace certain parts in good time.
This section describes:
-
factors influencing maintenance intervals
determining the starting points for timely and consistent maintenance intervals
various maintenance operations and the resultant limits on system function
max. permissible number of interruptions as a function of the breaking current.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Checks, alarms, causes, remedial measures [ 5.3]
Prerequisites [ 5.1]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Disposing of high-voltage switching devices and systems [ 7.27]
Pos : 8.4.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Z ykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2.1 Einfl üss e auf Wartungsinter vall @ 0\mod_1331123945021_18.doc x @ 3334 @ 3 @ 1
6.2.1
Influences on the maintenance interval
Inspection and maintenance services are categorized in line with the work involved and designated
accordingly.
Pos : 8.4.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Z ykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2.1.1 Einfl üss e durc h mec hanisc hen Verschl eiß und/oder Sc haltungen @ 0\mod_1331123983412_18.doc x @ 3338 @ 4 @ 1
6.2.1.1
Influences through mechanical wear and/or switching operations
Switchgear that is operated frequently obviously suffers greater wear than switchgear operated only seldom.
The following distinction must be made here:
- mechanical wear caused by friction as a result of the number of (mechanical) operating cycles and
- arc erosion due to the switching of load current or fault current.
The wear reserve is calculated so that in most cases the various maintenance services can be performed at
fixed intervals. Only if switchgear is operated particularly frequently, the permissible number of mechanical
operations and/or load switching operations may make it necessary to bring forward the corresponding
maintenance service.
The prescribed maintenance intervals and the instructions for maintenance work and the replacement of
parts must be complied with.
Pos : 8.4.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-279
Maintenance
r
Pos : 8.4.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Z ykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste6.2.1.2 Sc hädlic he U mwel tei nflüsse @ 32\mod_1456814887681_18.doc x @ 325872 @ 4 @ 1
6.2.1.2
Harmful environmental influences
Metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear equipment is provided with surface sealing to protect it against
corrosion. Additional measures are required to ensure that this surface sealing is effective.
Beginning from a defined starting date, the surface sealing should be checked regularly at maximum
intervals of 24 months for incipient corrosion damage to protect the equipment from harmful environmental
influences.
Starting date [ 6.2.2]
This inspection shall be conducted by an expert specialist contracted by the plant owner/operator.

Note
Care, maintenance and checking/inspection of the coating system require a
fundamental knowledge of surface engineering and familiarity with the associated
technical terms.
Based on his/her specialized training, knowledge, skills and expertise and
familiarity with the pertinent regulations and guidelines, a specialist is capable of
assessing the work assigned to him/her, of recognizing any associated risks and
of implementing all appropriate safety/protection measures required.
A specialist must always obey the pertinent technical regulations.
The visual inspection involves checking the surface of the sealing for any damage and/or anomalies (cracks,
wear, notches, bubbles, creep corrosion or partial flaking of the surface coating) and for contamination. Any
detected anomalies shall be evaluated on the basis of EN ISO 4628, Part 1 to 10.
The results of the visual inspection must be documented (photo documentation) and provided to the system
manufacturer to enable him to react appropriately, where required in cooperation with the plant
owner/operator, before the damage to the surface sealing advances to a point at which its elimination
becomes overly expensive.
Ambient conditions which exert special stress on the surface sealing demand stringent requirements. Special
stress can bring about premature aging or damage of the protective surface sealing and make repairs
necessary earlier than normally required by the protection applied on account of appearance and/or other
reasons.
In the case of ambient conditions that involve special stress, the inspection intervals may have to be
reduced, based on the results of the initial visual inspection.
6-280
Maintenance
This special stress, which can adversely impact the surface sealing, includes:
- Temperature
Large differences in temperature
Constantly high or low ambient temperatures
- Water
High level of precipitation
Condensation
- UV radiation
Direct sunlight
Ozone
- Reducing or oxidizing substances
Acid solution (pH level below 6.5)
Base solution (pH level above 7.5)
Chloride ions (e.g., saline solution)
Sulfur compounds (e.g., sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide)
Nitrogen compounds (e.g., nitrogen oxides, ammonia)
- Physical wear mechanisms
Abrasion (sand, ice crystals)
- Oscillations
Vibrations
Shocks (e.g., earthquakes)
- Biological factors
Microbiologically induced corrosion (e.g., algae, moss)
Bird droppings, insects, acids, alkalis or salts, organic solvents and corrosive gases.
The protection period, or time frame up to the initial repair measures required for corrosion protection which
may be required is >15 years for indoor installations and normal operating conditions, <15 years for indoor
installations with special stress conditions and <5 years for outdoor installations.
The protection period is not a "warranty period"; the protection period is a technical term to aid in the
planning of repair work.
The basic climatic and ambient conditions which are significant for providing proper corrosion protection are
taken into account for defining the protection period. Proper corrosion protection exists for steel parts when
the coating system has not exceeded rust grade Ri 3 based on ISO 4628-3.
Any contamination and/or damage to the surface sealing shall be eliminated by a specialist in coordination
with the plant manufacturer.

Note
Care, maintenance and checking/inspection of the coating system require a
fundamental knowledge of surface engineering and familiarity with the associated
technical terms.
Based on his/her specialized training, knowledge, skills and expertise and
familiarity with the pertinent regulations and guidelines, a specialist is capable of
assessing the work assigned to him/her, of recognizing any associated risks and
of implementing all appropriate safety/protection measures required.
A specialist must always obey the pertinent technical regulations.
Pos : 8.4.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Z ykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2.2 Starttermi n @ 0\mod_1331124823298_18.doc x @ 3346 @ 3 @ 1
6-281
r
6.2.2
Maintenance
Starting date
The starting date for the inspection and maintenance schedule is that at which the filter material is placed in
the gas compartments, and these are evacuated and filled with gas.
However, since not all compartments are filled with gas on the same day, a starting date for the switchgear
installation as a whole (or its various construction stages) must be set. As a general rule, differences of
between two and three months are of no significance here.
It does not matter either whether the gas-filled switchgear is put into service or not, following its installation.
The starting date should be recorded in writing and the number of mechanical operations and fault current
operations etc. monitored in order to see whether in-spection and maintenance should be carried out as a
function of time or of wear.
Pos : 8.4.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-282
Maintenance
Pos : 8.4.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Z ykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2.3 Instandhaltungsdi enste - T abelle - 8DN8 @ 24\mod_1389768969854_18.doc x @ 224151 @ 3 @ 1
6.2.3
Maintenance service
1
Maintenance service (due after time or wear )
Time
Wear
Visual inspection (SK)
after 9 years
Observations
Switchgear remains in the service;
the bays must be insulated one
after other.
The gas compartments need not to
be opened.
Visual inspection (SK)
after 17 years
Circuit-breakers:
after 3.000 mechanical operating
cycles
Switchgear remains in the service;
the bays must be insulated one
after the other.
The gas compartments need not to
be opened.
Revision (REV)
after 25 years
Circuit breakers:
after 6.000 mechanical operating
cycles
Switchgear is taken out of service,
either completely or in sections,
depending on the amount of work
involved.
Work-in-progress earthing switch
and disconnector:
after 2.000 mechanical operating
cycles
The gas compartments must be
opened.
High-speed earthing switch:
after 2.000 mechanical operating
cycles
Contact system check (KK)
Circuit breakers:
When the max permissible number
of switching operations is reached
according to number 6.2.4.1.
The concerned module must be
insulated.
The corresponding gas
compartment is opened.
High-speed earthing switches:
nd
After every 2 switching into
connection with high-voltage parts
Visual inspection (SK)
after 34 years
The maintenance schedule is repeated.
1
) In extreme environmental conditions such as heavy dirt or dust accumulation, maintenance intervals must
be shortened accordingly.
See also 6.2.1.2 Harmful environmental influences.
Accordingly, the coating systems are to be checked in intervals of max. 24 months and repaired if necessary.
The intervals are to be shortened appropriately given environmental conditions with special stresses.
Pos : 8.4.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-283
r
Maintenance
Pos : 8.4.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Z ykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4 Kontroll e des Kontakts ys tems @ 0\mod_1331125491275_18.doc x @ 3373 @ 3 @ 1
6.2.4
Inspection of the contact system
Pos : 8.4.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Z ykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4.1 Kontrolle des Kontakts ys tems des Leistungssc halters in Abhängigkeit 01 @ 0\mod_1331125571979_18.doc x @ 3377 @ 4 @ 1
6.2.4.1
Contact system check as a function of the breaking current
If the permissible number of interruptions is reached before the maintenance date, the specified
maintenance has to be carried out earlier.
The permissible number of interruptions shown in the graphics below refers to a pole of a triple-pole circuitbreaker.
As a result, three times as many single-pole interruptions may be caused for the triple-pole circuit-breaker.
Pos : 8.4.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Z ykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4.1 Kontrolle des Kontakts ys tems des Leistungssc halters in Abhängigkeit 02 - Bil d1 @ 6\mod_1344070555922_0.doc x @ 41796 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.4.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Z ykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4.1 Kontrolle des Kontakts ys tems des Leistungssc halters in Abhängigkeit 02 - Bil du @ 0\mod_1331125698559_18.doc x @ 3382 @ @ 1
n
I
max. permissible number of interruptions
breaking current in kA
Fig. 6-9
Max. permissible number of interruptions as a function of the breaking current.
Pos : 8.4.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Z ykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4.2 Kontrolle des Kontakts ys tems des Sc hneller dungssc halters @ 1\mod_1333107740538_18.doc x @ 13142 @ 4 @ 1
6.2.4.2
Inspection of the high-speed earthing switch contact system
The contact system of the high-speed earthing switch must be inspected after the second switching into
connection with conductors carrying high-voltage.
Pos : 8.4.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-284
Maintenance
Pos : 8.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.3 Ins tandhaltungs arbeiten/6.3 Ins tandhaltungs arbeiten - Tabelle @ 25\mod_1395129322275_18.doc x @ 234010 @ 2 @ 1
6.3
Maintenance work
Maintenance
Section
Visual inspection
Major inspection
Entire installation, including outgoing lines
•
•
Check exterior, record operating cycle counter reading
7.1
•
•
Check and repair the anti-corrosion agent
7.19
•
•
Check rupture disc with protection plate for damage
•
•
Check function of anti-condensation heaters in drive housings and cabinets
7.11
•
•
Check the fixing of the cable and the cable glands, and if required tighten the
terminals
7.11
-
Gas-related work
•
•
Check the pressure of the gas filling with precision pressure gauge
7.4
•
Extract the SF6 gas by suction
7.2
•
Replace filters
7.17
•
Evacuate gas compartment and fill with SF6 gas
7.2
•
Check moisture content of the SF6 gas
7.5
•
Measure SF6-air content
7.5
•
Perform leakage detection when the installation is ready for operation (in the case
of loss of gas and generally at covers and flanges that have been removed)
7.4
Gas monitoring
•
•
Check function of the density monitor
7.3
Circuit breaker
•
Check drive
7.9
•
Visual inspection of contact system
•
•
Function check of release circuits
7.10
•
•
Function check of closing lockout
7.3
•
•
Function check of General lockout SF6
7.3
•
•
Check anti-pump function
7.10
•
•
Check control function
7.10
•
Check electrical connections and tighten terminals if necessary
7.11
-
Disconnector and earthing switch module, work-in-progress earthing switches and high-speed
earthing switches.
•
Check drive
•
Visual check on switching system
•
Check electrical connections and tighten terminals if necessary
7.8
7.11
Expansion joint
•
Check setting of tie rods on the removal expansion joint. Fasten screw
connections as specified
4.3.1
Current and voltage converter and RC voltage divider
•
Electrical connections in terminal box or control cabinet to be checked - tighten if
necessary
7.12/ 7.13
GIS switchgear and control gear is a complex technical system. Modification on a component (main circuit
or auxiliary and control circuits) shall be confirmed by the manufacturer of the GIS. Otherwise the correct
function and safety of the product could be not valid anymore.
Pos : 8.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
6-285
r
6-286
Maintenance
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7 Allgemeine Hinweis e/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweisungen @ 4\mod_1336390058800_18.doc x @ 17193 @ 1 @ 1
7 General considerations and instructions
7-287
r

Pos : 9.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-288
General considerations and instructions
Note
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in part, from
the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track guiding, the
location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary equipment.
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.1 Z us tands kontr olle außen/7.1 Z us tands kontr olle außen @ 0\mod_1331127138029_18.doc x @ 3406 @ 2 @ 1
7.1
Checking external system condition
This section sets out the criteria for inspecting the exterior condition of the plant and switchgear.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Attention
If they are not adequately covered, components which move during switching
operations can cause crushing of body parts when touched or gripped.
• If a complete visual check requires climbing aboard the system, it is important to be sure
that no switching operations are conducted for the duration of the check.
• Any necessary organizational specifications must be incorporated in the operating
instructions.
• Carry out a visual inspection according to the following criteria; record the results.
• Decide on any steps necessary to correct the defects.
Criteria for the operating unit:
- General tidiness and cleanliness
- Intactness of the structural enclosure, in particular fire protection equipment and locking devices
- Availability of life-saving and fire-fighting appliances
- Availability of documentation for the safe operation of the switchgear (operating manual, gas monitoring
plan, etc.)
Criteria for evaluating the installation:
- Cleanliness
- Paintwork damage
- Corrosion
- Inspecting the bellows of the compensators for deformation and damage by impact.
Pos : 9.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-289
r
Pos : 9.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-290
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.6.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Evakui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2 Evakuier en, F üllen und Leeren der Gasräume @ 25\mod_1395043619426_18.doc x @ 233120 @ 2 @ 1
7.2
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments
This section contains a detailed description of
- evacuating and filling gas compartments
- emptying gas compartments.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Inserting / replacing filter material [ 7.17]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Warning
SF6 is heavier than air and can displace the air for breathing at lower levels
or in confined spaces.
DANGER OF SUFFOCATION –
if the SF6 concentration in the air exceeds 35% by volume!
• Work involving a risk of suffocation as a result of escaped or escaping SF6 may only be
performed in the presence of a second person who must likewise be familiar with the
risks involved. Both persons must remain in constant visual and acoustic contact.
• When any work is done on gas compartments, there must be adequate ventilation.
Any necessary organizational specifications must be incorporated in the operating instructions:

Note
Evacuation and emptying may be carried out with a appropriate service unit or
vacuum pump. The equipment is designed to ensure environmentally compatible
evacuation.
Filling and refilling can also be carried out with a gas cylinder and filler appliance.
A safety valve must be installed between the service unit and the gas cylinder for
filling and refilling, in order to prevent the maximum permissible operating
pressure in the gas compartment from being accidentally exceeded by more than
10%.
The gas monitoring diagram shows the following necessary data:
-
filling pressures
designation of gas compartments
location of gastight bushings
volume of the gas compartment and weight of the SF6 filling
7-291
General considerations and instructions
r
Order documentation
Pos : 9.6.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Evakui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2.1 Evakuier en und F üllen der Gasr äume 01 @ 25\mod_1395046091059_18.doc x @ 233141 @ 3 @ 1
7.2.1
Evacuating and filling the gas compartments
Evacuation and filling may be carried out with a appropriate service unit or vacuum pump. After the gas
compartment has been evacuated, it can be filled by means of the service unit or directly from the gas
cylinder with the filling device.
• Install the filter.
• Remove the union nut of the maintenance point from the gas compartment to be
checked; connect the service unit to the maintenance point with the safety valve in
between. To operate the evacuation device see the appropriate operating instructions of
the service unit or vacuum pump..
If the pressure measurement takes place in the suction line, the valve between pump and gas compartment
must be closed for the duration of measurement.
• Evacuate the gas compartment to a pressure of P-abs < 20 mbar (2 kPa). When this
pressure has been reached, evacuate for an additional 15 minutes.
• After the evacuation procedure has been completed, switch the service unit to fill or
connect the gas cylinder with filling device and safety valve to the gas compartment.
• Refer to the gas monitoring diagram for the filling pressure of the gas compartment to be
filled and determine the container temperature.
The pressure values always refer to a container temperature of + 20°C. The gas pressure levels to be set at
various temperatures are shown in the pressure/temperature diagram.
Warning
The tanks are designed for different filling pressures.
• Before filling, determine the highest permissible operating pressure for the tank in
question.
• Filling the gas compartment.
• When the filling pressure is reached (temperature-corrected if necessary), stop filling;
disconnect the connection between the service unit or filling device and the maintenance
point, and record the filling pressure and container temperature.
• If cable plug-in bushings are used on the cable sealing end without high-voltage cables or
dummy plugs, these must be sealed, evacuated and filled using pressure gas tight
covers.
Any necessary test of the density monitors should be performed in the context of the filling procedure.
• Screw the union nut onto the maintenance point.
7-292
General considerations and instructions
Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6 [ 7.23]
Pos : 9.6.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Evakui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2.1 Evakuier en und F üllen der Gasr äume 02 - Bild1 @ 7\mod_1345548586547_0.doc x @ 52575 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.6.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Evakui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2.1 Evakuier en und F üllen der Gasr äume 02 - Bildu @ 7\mod_1345548641171_18.doc x @ 52599 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pressure reducer regulating valve
Pressure reducer shut-off valve
Distributor with shut-off valve (for density monitor testing)
Precision pressure gauge (0 to 10 bar, class 0.6)
Safety valve
Filler stub
Fig. 7-1
Connecting the gas cylinder with SF6 filling device and safety valve
Pos : 9.6.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-293
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.6.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Evakui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2.2 Leer en und Bel üften der Gasräume @ 25\mod_1395047613483_18.doc x @ 233183 @ 3 @ 1
7.2.2
Emptying and venting the gas compartments
Gas compartments may only be emptied using the service unit.
The service unit shall reach a end pressure in his performance data of secure below < 2 kPa (0.29 psig). In
certain cases additional service devices, e.g. suction pump, needs to be used, to obtain the demanded
suction performance.
• Remove the union nut on the maintenance connection of the gas compartment to be
tested. Connect the service unit to the maintenance connection. To operate the service
unit see the appropriate operating instructions.
If the pressure measurement takes place in the suction line, the valve between pump and gas compartment
must be closed for the duration of measurement.
• Pump the SF6 out of the gas compartment until a end pressure of < 2 kPa (0.29 psig) has
been reached. In case of better performance data of the suction unit the lowest possible
end pressure shall reached.
• Vent the gas compartment, preferably by way of ventilating filters, until atmospheric
pressure has been reached.
SF6 can be re-used, provided its decomposition products do not exceed 1 ppm-V. The measurement shall be
carried out with a measurement system, which dispense the SF6 not to the ambience, but stored it in a
closed system.
• Screw the union nut onto the maintenance connection.
Pos : 9.6.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-294
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.7.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Prüfen der Gasüber wac hung/7.3 Prüfen der Gasüber wac hung @ 0\mod_1331127950150_18.doc x @ 3442 @ 2 @ 1
7.3
Checking the gas monitoring system
This section contains a detailed description of
- testing the density monitor
- replacing the density monitor.
Basic information:
Gas monitoring [ 1.3]
Gas monitoring [ 2.3]
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6 [ 7.23
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Warning
SF6 is heavier than air and, in lowlying or confined spaces, can displace the
air required for breathing.
There is danger of suffocation if the SF6 concentration in the air exceeds
35%!
• Work involving a risk of suffocation as a result of escaped or escaping SF6 may only be
performed in the presence of a second person who must likewise be familiar with the
risks involved. Both persons must remain in constant visual and acoustic contact.
• Necessary organizational stipulations should be adopted in the operating instructions.
• When any work is done on gas compartments, there must be adequate ventilation.
Pos : 9.7.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-295
General considerations and instructions
r
Pos : 9.7.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Prüfen der Gasüber wac hung/7.3.1 Prüfen der Dic htewächter @ 0\mod_1331128343843_18.doc x @ 3461 @ 3 @ 1
7.3.1
Testing the density monitor
The density monitors are factory-set. Resetting on-site is neither possible nor required. Refer to the gas
monitoring plan for set values and filling pressures.
Only functional tests should be conducted.
Testing involves raising or lowering the gas pressure and determining the exact pressure at the moment the
signal is tripped.
To check the density monitors, remove and test using SF6 test equipment. An adapter is included in the test
equipment.
• Refer to “Technical Data” for switching pressure values; determine container
temperature.
The pressure values for the density monitor always refer to a container temperature of 20 °C. The gas
pressure levels to be set for other temperatures are given in the pressure/temperature diagram.
• Determine the corresponding SF6 density line in the SF6 diagram.
• Slowly reduce the pressure. Reduce the pressure at approx. 0.02 bar (2 kPa) per second.
• Determine actual switching pressure values and compare to the reference values.
• Refit the density monitor if functioning correctly. Fit a new density monitor if the actual
switching pressure values are outside the specified tolerances.
Pos : 9.7.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Prüfen der Gasüber wac hung/7.3.2 Dic htewäc hter ab- und anbauen 010 @ 0\mod_1331128014573_18.doc x @ 3446 @ 3 @ 1
7.3.2
Mounting and removing density monitor
Removal is required,
- if the density monitor is defective
- for the purpose of the test
Density monitors can be replaced without letting out or having to pump out SF6 gas from the corresponding
gas compartment.
Caution
Potentially lethal voltage – DANGER FOR LIFE!
• Switch off the control voltage.
• Clamping or plug-and-socket connectors of the signal lines undo (dependent on the
design).
Pos : 9.7.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-296
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.7.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Prüfen der Gasüber wac hung/7.3.2.1 Dic htewäc hter mit Prüfansc hl uss @ 0\mod_1331128208919_18.doc x @ 3456 @ 4 @ 1
7.3.2.1
Density monitor with test connection
A non-return valve closes the gas chamber off when unscrewing the union nut on the test connection.
Attention
The gas chamber is under pressure - when the density monitor is unscrewed, gas
can escape unless you first unscrew the union nut!
• Remove the union nut of the test connection before unscrewing the density monitor.
• Now unscrew density monitors.
To mount the density monitor:
• Check that the O-ring sits correctly in the seal groove. Replace it if the density monitor is
refitted after passing the test.
• Install density monitor.
• Attach the clamping or plug-and-socket connectors of the signal lines (dependent on the
design).
• Screw the union nut onto the test connection.
• Check the joint to make sure it is air-tight.
Pos : 9.7.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-297
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.7.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Prüfen der Gasüber wac hung/7.3.2.2 Dic htewäc hter mit Prüfansc hl uß prüfen @ 0\mod_1331128661784_18.doc x @ 3471 @ 4 @ 1
7.3.2.2
Test the density monitor with the test connector.
In order to prepare for the test, unscrew the union nut on the test connection and screw the maintenance unit
onto the test connection.
Testing involves raising or lowering the gas pressure and determining the exact pressure at the moment the
signal is tripped.
• Refer to "Technical Data" for switching pressure values; determine container
temperature.
The pressure data for the density monitor always refer to a container temperature of 20 °C. The gas
pressures which result at other temperatures are shown in the pressure/temperature diagram.
• Find the corresponding density line in the Pressure-Temperature diagram.
• Reduce pressure gradually at approx. 0.02 bar (2 kPa) per second.
• Determine actual switching pressure values and compare to the reference values.
• Remove connection maintenance unit - density monitor.
• If the deviations are within the permissible range, screw the union nut back on the test
connection.
• If the actual switching pressure value deviates from the permissible tolerance range,
replace the density monitor.
Pos : 9.7.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Prüfen der Gasüber wac hung/7.3.2.3 Dic htewäc hter ohne Prüfanschl uss @ 0\mod_1331128147824_18.doc x @ 3451 @ 4 @ 1
7.3.2.3
Density monitor without test connection
A non-return valve shuts off the gas chamber temporary as the density monitor is disconnected.
Since a small amount of SF6 Gas can pass the non-return valve the time without a density monitor
assembled has to be reduced to a minimum. In case that the density monitor is removed for more than 10
minutes, the connection should be closed with a cover in order to minimize loss of SF6. Without a density
monitor assembled the gas chamber is not monitored.
• unscrew density monitors.
For reconnecting the density monitor:
• Check that the O-ring sits correctly in the seal groove. Replace this provided the density
monitor is reconnected upon passing the test.
• Install density monitor.
• Attach the clamping or plug-and-socket connectors of the signal lines (dependent on the
design).
• Check the joint to make sure it is air-tight.
Pos : 9.7.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-298
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.7.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.3 Pr üfen der Gas über wac hung/7.3.2.4 Dichtewäc hter ohne Pr üfansc hl uss prüfen @ 0\mod_1331128560017_18.doc x @ 3466 @ 4 @ 1
7.3.2.4
Test the density monitor without the test connector.
For preparing for the test, density monitor should be disconnected and connected to the gas testing device.
Testing involves raising or lowering the gas pressure and determining the exact pressure at the moment the
signal is tripped.
• Refer to "Technical Data" for switching pressure values; determine container
temperature.
The pressure details for the density monitors always refer to a container temperature of 20 °C. The gas
pressures that arise at other temperatures are shown in the pressure-temperature diagram.
• Find the corresponding density line in the Pressure-Temperature diagram.
• Reduce pressure gradually at approx. 0.02 bar (2 kPa or 0.29 psi) per second.
• Determine actual switching pressure values and compare to the reference values.
• Remove connection maintenance unit - density monitor.
• Once the deviations are within the tolerance range, reconnect the density monitor.
• If the actual switching pressure value deviates from the permissible tolerance range,
replace the density monitor.
Pos : 9.7.12 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-299
r
Pos : 9.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-300
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.9.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.4 Prüfen der Dichtheit der Gasräume/7.4 Pr üfen der Dic htheit der Gasr äume @ 0\mod_1331128717488_18.doc x @ 3476 @ 2 @ 1
7.4
Checking for leaks in gas compartments
This section contains a detailed description of
- checking the gas filling with the precision pressure gauge
- leakage detection.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Warning
SF6 is heavier than air and can displace the air for breathing at lower levels
or in confined spaces
DANGER OF SUFFOCATION
- if the SF6 concentration in the air exceeds 35% by volume!
• Work involving a risk of suffocation as a result of escaped or escaping SF6 may only be
performed in the presence of a second person who must likewise be familiar with the
risks involved. Both persons must remain in constant visual and acoustic contact.
• Necessary organizational stipulations should be adopted in the operating instructions.
• When any work is done on gas compartments, there must be adequate ventilation.
Pos : 9.9.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-301
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.9.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.4 Prüfen der Dichtheit der Gasräume/7.4.1 Druc k der Gas füll ung mit Fei nmeß manometer kontrollier en @ 0\mod_1331128787942_18.doc x @ 3481 @ 3 @ 1
7.4.1
Check pressure of the gas filling with precision pressure gauge
• Read off the filling pressure of the gas compartment to be tested from the gas monitoring
plan and measure the container temperature.
The pressure values always refer to a container temperature of + 20 °C. The gas pressure levels to be set at
various temperatures are shown in the pressure/temperature diagram.
• Remove the union nut of the maintenance connection of the gas compartment to be
checked; connect the service unit or the SF6 filling device to the maintenance connection.
• Record the pressure reading and container temperature measured.
• Evaluate the results; in the event of a deviation from the normal temperature (20 °C) refer
to the pressure/temperature diagram.
• if the pressure differential
≤ 0.2 bar (20 kPa)
=> up SF6; record the filling pressure.
> 0.2 bar (20 kPa)
=> Leakage detection.
Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6 [ 7.23]
Order documentation
Pos : 9.9.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.4 Prüfen der Dichtheit der Gasräume/7.4.2 Lec ks uc he @ 0\mod_1331128845833_18.doc x @ 3486 @ 3 @ 1
7.4.2
Leakage detection
A check for leakage must be made
- on the flange connections and pipe unions which were assembled on site, and
- in the event of inadmissible loss of pressure.
• Search for leaks using a leak tester.
Halons and halogenated substances, also cigarette smoke and perspiration under certain conditions can
influence the readings. Measurements should thus not be taken immediately after cleaning and/or painting.
• If a leakage is detected, it must be stopped.
Pos : 9.9.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi er vorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-302
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.10.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.5 M essen des Gas-F euchteg ehaltes/7.5 M ess en des Gas-Feuc htegehaltes und des SF 6-Proz ents atz es @ 0\mod_1331128889396_18.doc x @ 3491 @ 2 @ 1
7.5
Measuring the moisture content and SF6 content of the gas
This section contains a detailed description of
- measuring the moisture content of the gas to determine the dew point
- potential health hazards.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Warning
SF6 is heavier than air and, in lowlying or confined spaces, can displace the
air required for breathing. There is
DANGER OF SUFFOCATION
- if the SF6 concentration in the air exceeds 35%!
• Work involving a risk of suffocation as a result of escaped or escaping SF6 may only be
performed in the presence of a second person who must likewise be familiar with the
risks involved. Both persons must remain in constant visual and acoustic contact.
• When any work is done on gas compartments, there must be adequate ventilation.
• Any necessary organizational specifications must be incorporated in the operating
instructions.
The gas monitoring diagram shows the following necessary data:
- gas compartments and marking of expendable materials
- volume of the gas compartment and weight of the SF6 filling.
Order documentation
Pos : 9.10.2 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-303
General considerations and instructions
r
Pos : 9.10.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.5 M essen des Gas-F euchteg ehaltes/7.5.1 M ess en des Gas-Feuc hteg ehaltes (T aupunkt) 01 @ 0\mod_1331128958944_18.doc x @ 3496 @ 3 @ 1
7.5.1
Measuring the moisture content of the gas (dew point)
A dew point measuring instrument must be used for this purpose. Refer to the instructions supplied by the
manufacturer.
The gas must flow very slowly through the sensor.
The criterion for the humidity content of the SF6 gas is the dew point temperature, i.e. the temperature at
which condensation of the water vapour begins.
The permissible humidity levels at the corresponding dew point temperatures are shown below:
Pos : 9.10.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.5 M essen des Gas-F euchteg ehaltes 7.5.1 Mes sen des Gas-F euchtegehaltes (Taupunkt) 02 - T abell e @ 30\mod_1435144075567_18.doc x @ 282781 @ @ 1
Dew point
1)
Critical humidity level
- 5 °C (+ 23 °F)
Maximum permitted humidity:
- during start-up
- in operation
- 10 °C (+ 14 °F)
- 10 °C (+ 14 °F)
1)
The values refer to a gas temperature of 20°C (68°F)
The measurement must be taken at operating pressure.

Note
In order to prevent condensation, the maximum allowable moisture content within
gas-filled switchgear and control gear filled with gas at the rated filling density for
insulation ρ shall be such that the dew-point is not higher than −5°C (23°F) for a
measurement at 20°C (68°F)
The temperature of the gas inside the switchgear compartment is meant.
In general, the temperature difference between a measured dew-point value and
the corresponding gas temperature inside a compartment shall be minimum 25 K.
This is based on the basic requirement regarding an acceptable dew-point of -5°C
at a temperature of 20°C.
Pos : 9.10.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.5 M essen des Gas-F euchteg ehaltes/7.5.2 M ess en des SF 6-Proz ents atz es oder des Luftanteil es @ 0\mod_1331129132853_18.doc x @ 3511 @ 3 @ 1
7.5.2
Measuring the SF6 percentage or air content
Use an SF6 percentage gauge for taking measurements, thereby referring to the manufacturerís instructions
for use.
The SF6 percentage must not fall below 95%. By analogy, the air content must not be more than 5%.
The SF6 percentage or air content need not be measured if the switchgear is filled with gas straight from the
original cylinders.
Pos : 9.10.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-304
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.11.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen/7.7 Lei ter- und Fl ansc hver bindungen vor ber eiten und herstellen @ 0\mod_1331129195119_18.doc x @ 3516 @ 2 @ 1
7.6
Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections
This section contains a detailed description of
- the spare parts, expendable materials and tools
- preparing and joining flanges
- preparing and connecting conductors.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Cleaning [ 7.19]
Corrosion protection, greasing and oiling [ 7.20]
Bolted joints, tightening torques, locking tabs [ 7.24]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Warning
To protect personnel and the environment it is important to observe the
instructions for use of lubricants and cleansing agents.
Pos : 9.11.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen/7.7.1 Ersatzteile, Verbr auchs materialien und Wer kz euge @ 0\mod_1331129256807_18.doc x @ 3520 @ 3 @ 1
7.6.1
Spare parts, expendable materials and tools
O-Rings
O-rings are made seamlessly from a mixture of synthetic kinds of rubber and natural rubber. Each individual
application requires a special compound. Specialist suppliers offer about 150 such compounds in 7 degrees
of hardness. The following directives therefore apply:
- Fit only the O-rings supplied by the factory produ-cing the switchgear.
- Clean O-rings by wiping them with lint-free paper moistened with liquid cleaning agent. Never immerse
the O-rings in the cleaning agent or, even worse, allow them to remain immersed.
Consumables
- “Tectyl 506” (manufacturer: Valvoline)
- “Ritzol Tecto 7/2” (manufacturer: Valvoline)
- Vaseline (SHELL VASELINE 8420 or (SHELL COMPOUND S6800)
- paint (coating varnish included in switchgear auxiliary pack)
- Haku 5067 (or alternative cleansing agent)
- lint-free paper (manufacturer: e.g. Mölnlycke, trade name “A-Tork”)
- cleaning cloths
7-305
r
General considerations and instructions
Tools
- flat brushes, one each 6 mm and 15 mm wide
- 2 conical fitting spikes or stud bolts
- 1 spanner
- 1 torque wrench
- 1 vacuum cleaner (if required)
- wire brushes
- Scotch-Britt sponges (switchgear auxiliary pack)
Pos : 9.11.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen/7.7.2 Fl ansche vor ber eiten und ver binden 01 @ 0\mod_1331129323683_18.doc x @ 3525 @ 3 @ 1
7.6.2
Preparing and connecting flanges
When preparing the flanges, a distinction must be made between
- interior flanges and
- exterior flanges.
In addition, the preparation of the bright surfaces depends on whether these are exposed to the gas (interior
zone B) or the outside air (exterior zone A).
Pos : 9.11.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen/7.7.2 Fl ansche vor ber eiten und ver binden 02 - Bild @ 6\mod_1344069715578_0.doc x @ 41772 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.11.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen/7.7.2 Fl ansche vor ber eiten und ver binden 02 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331129478326_18.doc x @ 3534 @ @ 1
–––
----
Tectyl 506 - coating for external area A
Trost Multifunktionöl coating for inner area B
• Grease bolts with "Molykote Longterm 2" before inserting
Fig. 7-2
Flange preperation of the metallic bare surfaces of flanges and covers
Pos : 9.11.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-306
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.11.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen/7.7.2 Fl ansche vor ber eiten und ver binden 03 @ 0\mod_1331129801549_18.doc x @ 3544 @ @ 1
In general:
• Ensure that the outer surfaces of flanges and covers are free of dust.
• Remove plastic transport cover and all traces of adhesive tape and "Tectyl 506" (for
transport and storage).
• Clean metal sealing faces of flanges.
• Check groove and sealing faces for damage.
• Apply a uniform thin coating of "Trost Multifunction oil" in (inner) area B, "Tectyl 506" in
(outer) area A using a flat brush.

Note
Where covers for manway openings have been supplied separately, the "Tectyl
506" coating applied at the factory has to be removed completely and thereafter
the sealing face of cover to be treated as described here.
• Carefully wipe away with lint-free paper any "Tectyl 506" which got into (inner) area B.
• Check the O-ring and clean it.

Note
O-rings may be reused provided that.
- they were originally fitted less than 12 months previously, and
- there is no evident damage and/or deformation (> 10 %).
• Apply a thin film of Vaseline to O-ring
• Place the O-ring carefully in the groove of the flange; it must fit completely and uniformly
in the groove. The thin Vaseline film should hold it in place.
• If necessary, vacuum-clean the gas compartment before joining the flanges, and if
appropriate prepare coupling contacts.
• Carefully bring flanges together. Either insert a fitting spike into two opposite pairs of
drilled holes (180° apart) or screw stud bolts into the tapped holes.
• As soon as the “Trost Multifunction oil" and "Tectyl 506" treatment has dried bring the
flanges together and join them with four bolts each 90° apart, using hexagonal nuts.
Tighten the bolts in diagonally opposed sequence. Then remove the fitting spikes or stud
bolts and insert and tighten up all other bolts and nuts.
• Finally, tighten all bolts to the prescribed tightening torque.
Flange connections with cast-resin bushing are of an second, interior O-ring (not shown in the following).
Only the exterior O-ring seals the flange. The interior O-ring is to be treated in the same way as the exterior
O-ring.
Pos : 9.11.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen/7.7.3 Lei ter verbi ndungen vorbereiten und hers tell en @ 0\mod_1331129848909_18.doc x @ 3549 @ 3 @ 1
7-307
General considerations and instructions
r
7.6.3
Preparing conductor connections
Attention
Risk of contamination of the modules during installation
- hazardous for operation!
• No dirt particles, e.g. dust or metal filings should be allowed to enter the modules.
To guarantee trouble-free operation, the copper spray plated contact surfaces of the aluminium conductors
must be prepared to prevent inadmissible voltage drops and contact corrosion in the long term. The contact
surfaces should not be damaged; refinish if necessary. The supervisor can give assistance with refinishing.
• Clean contact surfaces with a wire brush.
• Remove unacceptable residual grease (Haku 5067).
• Then coat with a thin Vaseline film.
• Assemble conductor connections according to the specific requirements of the individual
connecting point.
Housing and conductor connections [ 2.18]
Pos : 9.11.9 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-308
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.12.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.6 Kabel verl egen/7.6 Kabel verleg en @ 0\mod_1331129944301_18.doc x @ 3554 @ 2 @ 1
7.7
Laying cables
This section contains detailed information on
- basic requirements for laying and joining cables
- measures to ensure electromagnetic compatibility.
Basic information:
Order documentation
Pos : 9.12.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.6 Kabel verl egen/7.6.1 Gr unds ätzlic he Anforderungen an das Verlegen und Ver binden von Kabeln @ 0\mod_1331130372150_18.doc x @ 3558 @ 3 @ 1
7.7.1
Basic requirements for the laying and joining of cables
The cables are laid when assembly of all components and the on-site control cabinet has been completed.
Access is better if the cables are only laid when the filter material has been fitted, the gas compartments
evacuated and filled with SF6.
The cables are provided by the company installing the system and according to the operator's instructions.
For information on the electrical equipment, see the circuit manuals.
Pos : 9.12.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-309
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.12.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.6 Kabel verl egen/7.6.2 Maß nahmen z ur el ektr omag netischen Vertr äglichkeit @ 0\mod_1331130449713_18.doc x @ 3563 @ 3 @ 1
7.7.2
Measures to ensure electromagnetic compatibility
Given the use of electronic and digital devices in the control and protection system and the compact design
of modern switchgears, it is of prime importance to take measures to ensure electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC).
When designing and constructing the cabinets, the SIEMENS AG pays attention to measures ensuring EMC.
These measures also apply to the laying of cables and wiring. Any requirements of the operator above and
beyond this must be taken into consideration appropriately by the firm installing the system.
This includes, e.g.:
- The spatial separation of interference-sensitive signal leads and signal leads with high levels of
interference by laying them on different racks or vertical cable lines.
- Good and secure earthing connections via toothed contact disks or lock-tooth disks.
- The limitation of switching overvoltage by protecting the coils of relays, contactors, solenoid valves etc.
with diodes, varistors or an R.C. section.
- Short electrical connections between corresponding assemblies in the subracks.
- Paying attention to the magnetic stray fields of busbars and cables.
- Protecting the subracks and wiring sections against interference by screening them with perforated
plates.
- Good, comprehensive earthing connection between all subassemblies and devices and with the earth
potential of the switchgear.
- The use of screened cables or leads, suitable for high-frequency application and which should ideally be
contacted concentrically at the ends.
- The use of anti-corrosion agents to protect the contacts in use outdoors.
- Large-area, concentric connections of the screens, good conductors and on both sides via short
connecting leads (< 10 cm).
As there are many different screen constructions, there are various methods of handling the connections.
The constructing department or site management will stipulate which type of screening is to be used, taking
care to comply with the aforementioned basic EMC requirements.
Pos : 9.12.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-310
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.13.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Pr üfen der Tr enn-, Erdungs- und Sc hnell erdungssc halter/7.8 Pr üfen der Trenn-, Erdungs- und Sc hneller dungssc hal ter - 0-Übersc hrift @ 25\mod_1391508655215_18.doc x @ 227910 @ 2 @ 1
7.8
Testing the disconnectors, earthing and high-speed earthing switches
Pos : 9.13.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Pr üfen der Tr enn-, Erdungs- und Sc hnell erdungssc halter/7.8 Pr üfen der Trenn-, Erdungs- und Sc hneller dungssc hal ter - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 0\mod_1331130515558_18.doc x @ 3568 @ @ 1
This section contains a detailed description of
- visual check and inspection of the heating unit of the motor drive
- the function test.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Disconnector and earthing switch module [ 2.6]
Pos : 9.13.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Pr üfen der Tr enn-, Erdungs- und Sc hnell erdungssc halter/7.8.1 Sic htprüfung und Pr üfen der H eizung des Motor antriebes und Mel deschalter moduls @ 0\mod_1331130698782_18.doc x @ 3572 @ 3 @ 1
7.8.1
Visual check and inspection of the heating unit of the motor drive
Caution
Potentially lethal voltage – DANGER TO LIFE!
• Such work may only be done by appropriately qualified and instructed personnel.
• Units should not remain open for any longer than is absolutely necessary to carry out the
inspection, which must be performed with the utmost care. Any accessible live
components that could be touched must be covered.
• Carry out the visual check and correct defects as necessary.
• Before connecting the anti-condensation heating units, remove the transportation plugs
from the ventilation housings in the motor drives. These plugs are designed to prevent
the ingress of water during installation. The air that is required to ensure the correct
operation of the anti-condensation heating units will not be able to circulate in the motor
drives until the transportation plugs have been removed.
• Check the function of the heating units.
During commissioning only:
Caution
Potentially lethal voltage – DANGER TO LIFE!
• Setting up a measuring circuit for determining power consumption in an off-circuit state.
• Measure power consumption.
• Record the readings.
Pos : 9.13.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Pr üfen der Tr enn-, Erdungs- und Sc hnell erdungssc halter/7.8.2 Funkti onspr üfung 01 - 8DN8, 8DN 9 2, 8D Q1 @ 0\mod_1331130985387_18.doc x @ 3577 @ 3 @ 1
7-311
General considerations and instructions
r
7.8.2
Function test
Warning
Exposed moving parts – danger of injury to personnel and/or damage to
property
• Before switching on the motor drive, ensure that no persons, tools or other articles are in
the vicinity of the operating mechanisms.
The following must be checked
-
switching operations
free movement of the drive linkage
condition of the position indicator
limit of travel of switching devices.
During maintenance work, the following must also be checked:
- Lock nuts, other bolted joints and locking tabs for secure seating and corrosion.
• Close and open disconnectors and earthing switches as well as work-in-progress
earthing switches 5x with the motor drive to check them. Check any specific features in
the switching movements.
Disconnector and earthing switch modules as well as earthing switches can also be operated manually by
means of the hand crank in order to check the easy running of the drive linkage.
• Check that the position of the position indicator is correct when the switching devices are
in their limit positions CLOSE and OPEN.
• Check the position indicator for damage and wear at mechanical contact points.
• Record the results.
Pos : 9.13.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-312
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.14.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters kontrollier en/7.9 Federspeic her antrieb des Leistungss chalters kontrollier en @ 0\mod_1331131695557_18.doc x @ 3596 @ 2 @ 1
7.9
Check spring accumulator drive for circuit breaker
This section contains a detailed description of
- inspection of the auxiliary switch
- visual inspection
- inspection of the releases and latching blocks
Caution
Hazardous voltage and charged springs
– DANGER TO LIFE!
The closing spring is automatically recharged after closing, as long as the
control voltage and motor voltage of the drive are not switched off.
Improper operation of the switchgear and non-observance of safety
instructions can result in serious injury to personnel and substantial
damage to property and the environment.
• Such work may only be done by appropriately qualified and instructed personnel.
When working on the drive, discharge the closing and opening springs. To do this
• Switch off the motor voltage.
• Open the circuit-breaker if it is set to CLOSE.
• Close the circuit-breaker.
• Open the circuit-breaker again.
• Switch off the control voltage.
Order documentation
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Intervals and maintenance service [ 6.2]
Maintenance work [ 6.3]
Pos : 9.14.2 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-313
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.14.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters kontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 01 @ 0\mod_1331197697802_18.doc x @ 3613 @ 3 @ 1
7.9.1
Check auxiliary switches
The bearings of the auxiliary switches are maintenance free. Check that the AMP plugs [1] are seated
properly and check the coupling rods [2] for wear and damage.
Pos : 9.14.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters kontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 02 - Bil d1 @ 6\mod_1344024077495_0.doc x @ 41676 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.14.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters kontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 02 - Bil du @ 0\mod_1331199009376_18.doc x @ 3620 @ @ 1
1
2
AMP plug
Coupling rods
Fig. 7-3
Auxiliary switch
Pos : 9.14.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters kontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 03 @ 0\mod_1331199580104_18.doc x @ 3638 @ @ 1
Line is to be laid from the auxiliary switch from the auxiliary switch contact, press the spring tab [3] on the
AMP plug. In the case of AMP plugs with insulating sleeves [4], simply pull the insulating sleeve to
disengage the plug.
Pos : 9.14.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters kontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 04 - Bil d2 @ 6\mod_1344025013206_0.doc x @ 41700 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.14.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters kontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 04 - Bil du @ 0\mod_1331199686889_18.doc x @ 3648 @ @ 1
1
2
Spring tab
Insulating sleeve
Fig. 7-4
AMP plug
Pos : 9.14.9 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-314
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.14.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters kontr ollieren/7.9.2 Kontr olle der D ämpfer auf Dic htheit 01 @ 0\mod_1331199782938_18.doc x @ 3658 @ 3 @ 1
7.9.2
Checking the dampers for leakage
Carry out visual inspection of exterior of damper for closing and damper for opening for leakage.
• Check the area of the lower damper attachment (marked in illustration) for traces of
reddish oil.

Note
If traces of reddish oil are found in these places, inform the appropriate Siemens
office and request the help of expert personnel.
Pos : 9.14.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters kontr ollieren/7.9.2 Kontr olle der D ämpfer auf Dic htheit 02 - Bild3 @ 6\mod_1344068201342_0.doc x @ 41724 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.14.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters kontr ollieren/7.9.2 Kontr olle der D ämpfer auf Dic htheit 02 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331199942064_18.doc x @ 3662 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-5
Inspection of the dampers
Pos : 9.14.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters kontr ollieren/7.9.3 Kontr olle der Ausl ös er und Ver klinkungsbl öc ke auf F estsitz 01 @ 0\mod_1331200118455_18.doc x @ 3672 @ 3 @ 1
7.9.3
Checking that the releases and latching blocks are affixed tightly
• Using a torque wrench, check that the cheese-head screws [1] of the release plate and
the cheese-head screws [2] of the latching blocks are tightly seated.
Torques: Cheese-head screws [1] 8 ±1 Nm and cheese-head screws [2]: 40 ± 4 Nm
Pos : 9.14.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters kontr ollieren/7.9.3 Kontr olle der Ausl ös er und Ver klinkungsbl öc ke auf F estsitz 02 - Bild4 @ 6\mod_1344069509567_0.doc x @ 41748 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.14.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters kontr ollieren/7.9.3 Kontr olle der Ausl ös er und Ver klinkungsbl öc ke auf F estsitz 02 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331200122268_18.doc x @ 3682 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-6
Latching block
7-315
r
Pos : 9.14.16 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-316
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.15.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10 Elektrische Steuerung des Leistungss chalters prüfen @ 0\mod_1331217136067_18.doc x @ 3705 @ 2 @ 1
l
7.10 Checking the electronic circuit-breaker control
This section describes in detail the procedure for testing
- the anti-pump function
- the release coils
- the closing spring motor
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Order documentation
Pos : 9.15.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10.1 Pumpverhinderung pr üfen @ 25\mod_1395052375747_18.doc x @ 233725 @ 3 @ 1
7.10.1 Check anti-pump function
Attention
Switching operations without the necessary gas pressure can cause mechanical
damage!
• An SF6 minimum gas pressure (SF6-blocking pressure) must be availbale for test
operations (without current or voltage).
The anti-pump function prevents repeated switching (pumping) in the event of simultaneously input or active
switching commands.
• The circuit-breaker is in the CLOSE position Send one CLOSE and one OPEN command
at the same time.
The circuit-breaker should only go to OPEN once.
• The circuit-breaker is in the OPEN position. Send one CLOSE and one OPEN command
at the same time.
The circuit-breaker should only go to CLOSE once and OPEN once.
• Record the results.
Pos : 9.15.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10.2 Ausl ös er pr üfen @ 0\mod_1331217809269_18.doc x @ 3725 @ 3 @ 1
7.10.2 Checking the releases
• Check the circuit-breaker closing and opening operations of all existing trigger circuits by
applying current or actuating the station or bay control unit.
• Record the results.
Pos : 9.15.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10.3 D oppelerregung prüfen @ 0\mod_1331217872863_18.doc x @ 3729 @ 3 @ 1
7-317
r
General considerations and instructions
7.10.3 Checking the double excitation
to be dropped
Pos : 9.15.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10.4 M otor der Ei nsc haltfelder @ 0\mod_1331218107818_18.doc x @ 3733 @ 3 @ 1
7.10.4 Closing spring motor
• Check for the correct selected cutout.
• Check the monitoring timer, if installed, for correct operation.
• Record the results.
Pos : 9.15.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-318
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.16.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen @ 0\mod_1331218298366_18.doc x @ 3738 @ 2 @ 1
7.11 Checking the control functions
This section describes in detail the procedure for testing
-
control and alarm circuits
measuring, display and alarm circuits
electrical lockouts
heating.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Order documentation
Pos : 9.16.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11.1 Steuer- und M eldekr eise pr üfen @ 0\mod_1331218333038_18.doc x @ 3742 @ 3 @ 1
7.11.1 Checking the control and alarm circuits
Caution
Potentially lethal voltage – DANGER FOR LIFE!
• Such work may only be done by appropriately qualified and instructed personnel.
• Inspections on open equipment should be limited to the time absolutely necessary for the
test and appropriate caution should be taken. Exposed live parts in the vicinity should be
covered.
The tests include the control and alarm circuits from the switching devices to the local control cabinet and the
local control cabinet itself.
• Check that installation has been carried out according to the circuit diagram. This
includes
- Electric circuits and their protection
- Switch position indicators/system balancing.
• Check terminal and plug-in connections for adequate contacting and correct if necessary.
• Check for correct operation of the control and alarm circuits.
Pos : 9.16.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-319
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.16.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11.2 Mess- , Anz eige- und Z ählgeräte prüfen @ 0\mod_1331218369835_18.doc x @ 3746 @ 3 @ 1
7.11.2 Checking measuring, display and counting devices
• Check connection circuits (phase sequence, rotating field, energy flow direction) of all
measuring, display and counting devices and ensure that the device data correspond to
the system data (measuring ranges, characteristic curves, auxiliary supplies). Ensure the
chosen circuitry is adequate for the measuring task involved.
• Test the measuring, display and counting devices, including appropriate measuring
amplifiers and transducers – except current and voltage transformers – by simulated
excitation.
• Check the markings on the display devices and function keys for correctness and
perceptibility.
Pos : 9.16.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11.3 El ektrisc he Verriegel ung prüfen @ 0\mod_1331218420335_18.doc x @ 3750 @ 3 @ 1
7.11.3 Checking the electric interlock
The system interlocking is structured as follows
- internal interlocking (interlock conditions between the switching devices of one feeder) and
- external lockout (higher-order interlocking conditions between the branches).
The following lockout conditions apply:
- Disconnectors are not to be switched "under load".
- Circuit-breakers may not closed when a disconnector in the same electrical circuit is in the fault
position/centre position.
- Circuit-breakers which create a parallel current loop to other disconnectors (e.g. in a bus coupling) may
not be opened when in a branch of another switchgear panel
- more than one bus isolator is closed
- one of these isolators is in fault position
- all isolators are closed.
- Earthing switches should only be operated if it is certain that the component to be earthed is off circuit.
• Check to see that all internal and external interlocks correspond to the interlock plan.
• Check the interlock lockswitches.
• Check the transition from remote to local control.
• Check the fault signal keys (acknowledgement, test program).
Pos : 9.16.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-320
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.16.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11.4 Pr üfen der Anti kondensatheiz ungen @ 0\mod_1331218461289_18.doc x @ 3754 @ 3 @ 1
7.11.4 Checking the anti-condensation heating units
Anti-condensation heating units prevent corrosion resulting from condensation. They must therefore remain
switched on throughout the year – including the warm and hot seasons.
The motor drive heating units should be inspected at the same time as the motor drives.
• Before connecting the anti-condensation heating units, remove the transportation plugs
from the ventilation housings in the motor drives. These plugs are designed to prevent
the ingress of water during installation. The air that is required to ensure the correct
operation of the anti-condensation heating units will not be able to circulate in the motor
drives until the transportation plugs have been removed.
• Switch on the heating by means of the corresponding cutout in the local control cabinet.
Check by hand that they are emitting heat.
During commissioning only:
Caution
Potentially lethal voltage – DANGER FOR LIFE!
• Setting up a measuring circuit for determining power consumption in an off-circuit state.
• Measure power consumption.
• Record the readings.
Pos : 9.16.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-321
r
Pos : 9.17 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-322
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.18.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.12 Str omwandler prüfen/7.12 Stromwandler pr üfen @ 0\mod_1331218691087_18.doc x @ 3759 @ 2 @ 1
7.12 Checking the current transformer
This section contains a detailed description of
- visual inspections
- checking polarity
- checking secondary circuits.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Current transformer [ 2.9]
Order documentation
Pos : 9.18.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.12 Str omwandler prüfen/7.12.1 Sic htkontroll en @ 0\mod_1331218996730_18.doc x @ 3763 @ 3 @ 1
7.12.1 Visual inspection
• The following should be checked in the course of a visual inspection:
- Selection and dimensioning of the transformers (class, rating, overcurrent factor, cores, secondary
windings and their tapping points etc.)
- That the current transformers have been installed according to the drawings and circuit-diagrams
- Secondary-side earthing of the transformers
- The termination of all secondary windings with the prescribed resistance (impedance).
• Terminal connections for adequate contacting. If necessary, tighten the screws.
Pos : 9.18.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.12 Str omwandler prüfen/7.12.2 Polaritäts pr üfung @ 0\mod_1331219226012_18.doc x @ 3767 @ 3 @ 1
7.12.2 Polarity test
• Apply a DC voltage impulse to the primary terminal connections of the transformer (plus
on P1).
If the pole connection / direction of winding are correct, the measuring device (with the zero position in the
centre), connected to the secondary side (plus on S1)
- deflect to the positive side when direct current is applied
- deflect to the negative side when the direct current is switched off.
During the commissioning procedure it is advisable to carry out polarity measurements together with voltage
drop measurement of the main conductor.
Pos : 9.18.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-323
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.18.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.12 Str omwandler prüfen/7.12.3 Pr üfen der Sekundärstr omkr eis e @ 0\mod_1331219262044_18.doc x @ 3771 @ 3 @ 1
7.12.3 Testing the secondary circuits
• Apply a testing current to the secondary terminals (e.g. with a secondary testing device or
variable transformer).
• Loop an ammeter into the respective transformer circuit.
• Check for the correct phase assignment to the downstream device and ensure that all
circuits are closed.
The insulation was inspected at the works. Additional inspections may be incorporated in checks of the
network and switchgear protective system.
Pos : 9.18.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-324
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.19.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.13 Spannungs wandler prüfen/7.13 Spannungs wandler prüfen @ 4\mod_1336397787423_18.doc x @ 17221 @ 2 @ 1
7.13 Testing the voltage transformer
This section contains a detailed description of
- visual inspections
- performing the inspection of the insulation
- checking secondary circuits.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Voltage transformer [ 2.10]
Order documentation
Pos : 9.19.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.13 Spannungs wandler prüfen/7.13.1 Sic htkontroll en @ 0\mod_1331277679109_18.doc x @ 3781 @ 3 @ 1
7.13.1 Visual inspection
• The following should be checked in the course of a visual inspection:
-
Selection and dimensioning of the transformers
That the voltage transformers have been installed according to the drawings and circuit diagrams
Secondary-side earthing of the transformers
Correct configuration of the links on the terminal board.
• Check terminal connections for adequate contacting. Tighten the screws if necessary.
Pos : 9.19.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.13 Spannungs wandler prüfen/7.13.2 Is olations prüfung @ 0\mod_1331277726829_18.doc x @ 3785 @ 3 @ 1
7.13.2 Insulation test
Attention
Residual charge – risk of minor electric shocks if conducted through the body!
• Upon completion of the insulation check, the residual charge should be earthed.
• Inspect the insulation on the secondary circuits of the voltage transformer up to the
protective circuit-breaker (phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth with 2kV).
The secondary leads must not be connected to the transformer during the test. The insulation of the voltage
transformer itself was checked at the works.
• Earth the secondary circuits after the insulation test has been completed.
Pos : 9.19.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-325
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.19.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.13 Spannungs wandler prüfen/7.13.3 Sekundärstromkr eise pr üfen @ 0\mod_1331277772692_18.doc x @ 3789 @ 3 @ 1
7.13.3 Checking the secondary circuits
Downstream devices must be checked for in-phase connection.
• Disconnect secondary circuits at the bushing box of the voltage transformer.
• Apply voltage to the three phases and check for in-phase connection.
Additional tests can be components of preventive network and system tests.
Pos : 9.19.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-326
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.20.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.14 RC-Teiler pr üfen/7.14 RC-T eiler prüfen @ 0\mod_1331277868198_18.doc x @ 3794 @ 2 @ 1
7.14 Check RC divider
This section contains a detailed description of
- visual inspections
- the preparation for high voltage checking of the switchgear
- checking secondary circuits
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
RC divider [ 2.11]
Pos : 9.20.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.14 RC-Teiler pr üfen/7.14.1 Sichtkontr ollen @ 4\mod_1336398083560_18.doc x @ 17232 @ 3 @ 1
7.14.1 Visual checks
• The following should be checked in the course of a visual inspection:
- the selection and dimensioning of the RC divider
- That the RC divider has been installed according to the drawings and circuit-diagrams
- the secondary side earthing of the RC divider.
• Check connections of the coaxial lines in the switchgear cabinet for adequate contact.
Pos : 9.20.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.14 RC-Teiler pr üfen/7.14.2 Vor ber eitung des RC-Teil ers für die H oc hs pannungspr üfung der Sc haltanlag e @ 4\mod_1336398174211_18.doc x @ 17243 @ 3 @ 1
7.14.2 Preparation of the RC divider for high voltage test of the switchgear
• Short-circuit all secondary lines before carrying out high voltage testing of the switchgear.
The primary side of the RC divider must not be separated from the installation for the duration of the high
voltage test of the switchgear.
Pos : 9.20.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.14 RC-Teiler pr üfen/7.14.3 Sekundärstr omkr eis e prüfen @ 4\mod_1336398286593_18.doc x @ 17254 @ 3 @ 1
7.14.3 Check secondary current circuits
Secondary lines in the switchgear cabinet must be checked for in-phase connection.
• Disconnect coaxial lines in the switchgear cabinet.
• check the correct phasing connection with a suitable test unit.
Additional tests can be components of preventive network and system tests.
Pos : 9.20.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-327
r
Pos : 9.21 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-328
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.22.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.15 Kabel endverschl uß prüfen/7.15 Kabel endverschl uss überprüfen @ 0\mod_1331277941459_18.doc x @ 3799 @ 2 @ 1
7.15 Check cable sealing end
This section contains a detailed description of
- the preparation for the high-voltage test
- the prerequisites for the high-voltage test
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Cable connection module [ 2.16]
Order documentation
Warning
A high-voltage test or the commissioning of a switchgear without a
pressure-tight cable sealing
end may result in serious bodily injury or considerable damage to the
system.
• Before conducting the high-voltage test, ensure that the cable sealing end is sealed
gastight. The sealing end may be closed off with a high-voltage cable, a pressure gas
tight cover or – if used with cable connectors – with a dummy plug authorised by the
manufacturer.
• Do not perform a high-voltage test or commission the switchgear if the sealing end has
not been closed off gastight.
• Such work may only be done by appropriately qualified and instructed personnel.
Pos : 9.22.2 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-329
r
Pos : 9.23 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-330
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.24.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Pri märteil prüfen/7.16 Pri märteil prüfen @ 0\mod_1331278440429_18.doc x @ 3830 @ 2 @ 1
7.16 Testing the primary part
This section contains a detailed description of
- voltage drop measurement
- high-voltage test.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [7.2]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Order documentation
Pos : 9.24.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Pri märteil prüfen/7.16.1 Spannungsfall mes sen @ 0\mod_1331278749567_18.doc x @ 3847 @ 3 @ 1
7.16.1 Measuring voltage drop
This test must be carried out to detect excess contact resistance.
Conduct the test with a fixed D.C current.
• Determining measuring distances. Ensure that
- the distances specified are as short as possible, in order to locate poor contact points as quickly as
possible,
- measuring points are located between neighbouring branches, in order to ensure direct comparability.
• Calculate the allowable voltage drop for the specified sections. Manufacturer's
specifications form the basis for voltage drops at each coupling point, conductor
connection and each running centimetre of conductor.
The following are suitable as feeder and measuring points:
- Outgoing cables and overhead lines
- Insulated earthing switches.
Earthing switches should be used primarily as feeding points. If they are used as measuring points at the
same time, the readings may be seriously corrupted.
A single-pole measurement across a closed earthing switch is not advisable, owing to the earth contact
resistance.
• When using earthing switches, disconnect the link and reconnect after taking the
measurement.
• Feed a constant direct current current of 100 A and measure the voltage drop at the
specified points.
• Make a record of the readings and the test conditions.
Pos : 9.24.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Pri märteil prüfen/7.16.2 Hoc hs pannungspr üfung 01 @ 0\mod_1331279044982_18.doc x @ 3852 @ 3 @ 1
7-331
r
General considerations and instructions
7.16.2 High voltage test
After installation of the switchgear a voltage test of the main current paths with power-frequency voltage
must be conducted in accordance with the local regulations.
The test voltage must be applied to each phase in opposition to the two other earthed phases and the
earthed housing.
• Specify testing sections. The sections should be as small as possible, because
- the low power output of the test transformer limits the maximum test capacity
- in the event of a fault (disruptive discharge), the discharge energy is reduced (proportional to the test
capacity), i.e. there is less risk of damage to the switchgear
- faults can be localized more easily.
The high-voltage test consists of forming and the main test.
The test has been passed when all three phases of a test section retain the test voltage for one minute
without a fault occurring.
Pos : 9.24.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Pri märteil prüfen/7.16.2 Hoc hs pannungspr üfung 02 - Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344022602913_0.doc x @ 41604 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.24.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Pri märteil prüfen/7.16.2 Hoc hs pannungspr üfung 02 - Bildu @ 6\mod_1344023237964_18.doc x @ 41628 @ @ 1
C
Uds
T
Ur
Forming (1 and 2)
Test voltage as per EC 62271-203
Main test
Rated voltage
Fig. 7-7
Timing diagram for forming and main test with alternating voltage
Pos : 9.24.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-332
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.24.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Pri märteil prüfen/7.16.2 Hoc hs pannungspr üfung 03 @ 6\mod_1344023400539_18.doc x @ 41652 @ @ 1
Caution
High voltage – DANGER FOR LIFE!
The high-voltage test may only be performed by specially qualified electrical engineers.
For the duration of the high-voltage tests
• insert an adapter which has been earthed via two isolating points between the system
section being tested and each of the (possibly operative) system components
• short-circuit and earth the current transformers on the secondary side
• screening components must be fitted if system parts have to be disconnected for testing
• Depending on the type of high-voltage test, voltage transformers, and certain other items
(e.g. transformers and cables), must be disconnected from the system section to be
tested.
Following the high-voltage tests, earth and short-circuit the system to divert any possible residual charges.
7-333
r
General considerations and instructions
Before the start of the high-voltage tests
• notify the system owner of the high-voltage tests and agree on the safety precautions to
be taken.
• initiate the safety precautions.
• earth the sections of the system not to be tested.
• provided a resonance testing station is not to be employed, disconnect the contact
connections to the voltage transformer for the duration of the high-voltage tests.
• Mount the screening on plant-side connection piece if plant components need to be
isolated for testing (e.g. the voltage converter)
• Seal off the gas compartments. For the duration of the tests, install voltage transformers
or supplementary covers. Do not make contact or control cable connections to the
terminal box.
• Evacuate gas compartments and fill with SF6.
• Check the gas quality: The SF6 gas must show an SF6 proportion of ³ 95 % and a dewpoint temperature of at least – 10 °C. Measuring the moisture content and SF6 content of
the gas.
Measuring the moisture content and SF6 content of the gas [ 7.5]
• Specify the test sections so that the energy in the case of a flashover is reduced to a
minimum.
• Create a feed-in for the test voltage via outdoor bushing or enclosed built-on assembly.
• Note down the conditions for the high-voltage test.
• Perform the high-voltage test. Record the results.
Pos : 9.24.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-334
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.25.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filter material eins etz en / taus chen/8.17 Filter materi al ei ns etz en /7.17 Filter material eins etzen / tauschen @ 0\mod_1331279172616_18.doc x @ 3862 @ 2 @ 1
7.17 Inserting / replacing filter material
This section contains a detailed description of
- preparatory work
- inserting filter material
- replacing filter material.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Cleaning [ 7.19]
Corrosion protection, greasing and oiling [ 7.20]
Bolted joints, tightening torques, locking tabs [ 7.24]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Cleanliness on site [ 7.26]
Order documentation
Pos : 9.25.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filter material eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.1 Vor bereitende Arbeiten 01 @ 0\mod_1331279299081_18.doc x @ 3866 @ 3 @ 1
7-335
General considerations and instructions
r
7.17.1 Preparatory work

Note
Cleanliness at the workplace and the immediate vicinity is an absolute
prerequisite for the maintenance of the assured quality parameters.
• Refer to the gas monitoring schedule for the required data:
- Filling pressures,
- Description and location of the gas compartments and
- capacities of the gas compartments and weight of the SF6 filling.
• Before commencing work, set out a sufficient quantity or number of the following:
- tins of filter material,
- sealing rings and
- anti-corrosion agent.
The filter material is supplied in bags packed in air-tight tins.
Pos : 9.25.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filter material eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.1 Vor bereitende Arbeiten 02 - Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344022329934_0.doc x @ 41580 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.25.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filter material eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.1 Vor bereitende Arbeiten 02 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331279677358_18.doc x @ 3870 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-8
Opened tins with filter material
Pos : 9.25.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filter material eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.1 Vor bereitende Arbeiten 03 @ 6\mod_1344235729239_18.doc x @ 43930 @ @ 1

Note
Do not use filter material from leaking tins, as its capacity to absorb moisture and
decomposition products may be insufficient for the period until the next scheduled
filter change.
There must be a loud hiss when an air-tight tin is opened. If in doubt, compare the weight with that of bags
from another tin to determine whether the filter material has absorbed moisture.
The maximum time lapse between the opening of a tin and the insertion of the filter material it contains and
the gas-tight sealing of the gas compartment is 1 hour; the evacuation process should begin within a further
hour.
Pos : 9.25.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.25.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filter material eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.2 Einsetzen von Filtermaterial - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 0\mod_1331282471381_18.doc x @ 3879 @ 3 @ 1
7-336
General considerations and instructions
7.17.2 Inserting filter material
In all modules the location of the filter bags is accessible by opening a hood, a filter carrier or a cover, which
may be fitted with rupture disk and diverter.
• Remove the union nut on the maintenance connection of the respective gas
compartment. Connect the service unit to the maintenance connection. To operate the
service unit see the appropriate operating instructions.
• Remove hood or filter carrier or open the hood.
• Clean the interior.
• Apply an anti-corrosion agent.
• Open the filter tins and insert the filter bags in the holders provided.
• Fit new round sealing rings.
• Fit the hood, filter carrier or cover. Observe the specified tightening torque.
• Evacuate the gas compartment and then fill with SF6 gas.
Pos : 9.25.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-337
General considerations and instructions
r
Pos : 9.25.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filter material eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.3 T ausc hen von Filtermaterial @ 4\mod_1336399111054_18.doc x @ 17265 @ 3 @ 1
7.17.3 Replacing filter material
Warning
After heavy-duty short-circuit switching, the gas compartment of the
relevant circuit-breaker or load-break switch will contain SF6 decomposition
products in gaseous and/or dust form, which are hazardous to health!
• Wear a protective outfit.
• not expel SF6 gas into the environment.
• Carefully remove switch dust and contaminated gas carefully and dispose of it according
to regulations.
After inspecting the quality of the SF6 gas in the installation, a decision must be made on its suitability for reuse. The gas must be replaced if an SF6 content of < 95% is found.
Do not open the gas compartment of the voltage transformer!
• Remove the union nut on the maintenance connection of the respective gas
compartment. Connect the service unit to the maintenance connection. To operate the
service unit see the appropriate operating instructions.
• Extract the SF6 gas by suction.
• Ventilate the evacuated gas compartment.
• Open the filter cover.
• Remove used filter bags.
• Visually inspect the interior space. Record any peculiarities.
• Remove old anti-corrosion agent from the open flanges and covers.
• Clean the interior.
• Apply new anti-corrosion agent.
• Open the filter tins and insert the required number of filter bags in the holders provided.
• Insert new sealing rings and close the filter cover. Observe the specified tightening
torque.
• Evacuate the gas compartment and then fill with SF6 gas.
• Clean the maintenance unit after contact with contaminated gas.
Pos : 9.26.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Montage der Berstsc heiben/7.18 M ontage der Berstsc heiben @ 1\mod_1332412784483_18.doc x @ 10700 @ 2 @ 1
7-338
General considerations and instructions
7.18 Fitting the rupture disks
This section describes
- unpacking the rupture disc
- inserting the rupture disc.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Covers, filter mounts, rupture disk assemblies [ 2.17]
Cleaning [ 7.19]
Rupture disks are precision parts important to the safety of the system. Consequently, please pay
attention to the following instructions!

Note
Rupture disks that have already been in use must not be used again. Rupture
discs are considered to be used if they have been tightened once to the tightening
torque or have been exposed to another pressure load.
Carry out a visual inspection of new rupture disks before fitting them. Do not use the rupture disk if an
impurity has been found (e.g. bulges, deformations, grooves which have passed through, spherical
deformations in the convex structure)!
Pos : 9.26.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Montage der Berstsc heiben/7.18.1 Auspac ken der Bers tsc hei be @ 0\mod_1331282874338_18.doc x @ 3893 @ 3 @ 1
7.18.1 Unpacking the rupture disc
• Remove rupture disc carefully from the package.
• Check convexity and sealing surfaces of the rupture disc for imperfections or damage.

Note
Always store rupture discs on clean surfaces and such that the convexity points
upward. Never store other objects on top of rupture discs.
Pos : 9.26.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-339
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.26.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Montage der Berstsc heiben/7.18.2 Einbau der Berstscheibe 01 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 1\mod_1332412919860_18.doc x @ 10710 @ 3 @ 1
7.18.2 Fitting the rupture disk
• Compare the rupture disk identification with the product specification.
• Inspect (and clean and dry if necessary) the sealing surfaces and O-ring groove. O-rings
must only be used in accordance with specifications.
• Treat the contact surfaces of pressure ring, flange and rupture disc with Trost multi-oil
and/or Tectyl 506.
• Place the rupture disc [1] of the cleaned installation location centrally to the holes in the
installation section and with the bulge of the rupture disc pointing to the gas chamber.
• Place the pressure [2] ring in such a way that the flat depression points towards the
rupture disc.
• Screw [3] the relevant screws into the holes provided and tighten by hand. Make sure the
rupture disk remains centered. Inadequate centering can damage the rupture disk.
• Evenly tighten the screws diagonally in pairs, starting with a torque of 25 % and
increasing to 50 %, then 75 % and finally 100 % of the required torque, which will depend
on the thread size and the strength of the material involved.
• On versions with rupture disc device with diverting hood prepare a protection plate [4]
with holes.
• Remove protective paper from the protection plate.
• Place the protection plate evenly on the pressure ring so that any through-holes that are
present remain free.
• Use a scraper to press firmly and remove any air bubbles. When doing so, use adequate
pressure to ensure that adhesive penetrates into the pores of the pressure ring.
• If necessary, bolt the diverter [5] hood to the pressure ring. Screw the relevant screws [6]
into the holes provided and tighten by hand. Observe the above instructions when
subsequently bolting in position! Please respect the discharge direction indicated in the
contract documentation.
• With open-air installation, all open threaded holes must be closed off with bolts and the
pressure balancing element [7] (for the volume enclosed by the rupture disc and
protection plate) must be fitted.
• Paint rupture device without sealing the pressure balancing element and its depression
with the paint.
Pos : 9.26.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Montage der Berstsc heiben/7.18.2 Einbau der Berstscheibe 02 - 8DN8 5 Bil d1 @ 6\mod_1344021636837_0.doc x @ 41556 @ @ 1
7-340
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.26.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Montage der Berstsc heiben/7.18.2 Einbau der Berstscheibe 02 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336399684378_18.doc x @ 17276 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bolted connection of the diverter
Diverter
Guard plate
Bolted connection of the pressure ring
Pressure ring
Rupture disk
Pressure balancing element (with open air installation)
Fig. 7-9
Fitting the rupture disk
Bolted joints, tightening torques, locking tabs [ 7.24]
Pos : 9.26.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-341
r
Pos : 9.27 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-342
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.28.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19 R einigung @ 0\mod_1331283986344_18.doc x @ 3918 @ 2 @ 1
7.19 Cleaning
This section contains a detailed description of
-
cleaning agents to be used
cleaning equipment to be used
cleaning work
disposal of cleaning agents and equipment.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Advice on handling SF6 [ 7.25]
Pos : 9.28.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19.1 R einigungs mittel @ 0\mod_1331283474843_18.doc x @ 3910 @ 3 @ 1
7.19.1 Cleaning agents
Warning
of the cleaning agents are harmful to water and/or highly flammable.
• the interests of personnel safety and of protecting the environment, follow instructions for
use of cleaning agents carefully!
The following cleaning agents for work done during installation and maintenance may be used.
The selection was made from manufacturer's data sheets, and constitutes a summary thereof; not a
substitute for the manufacturer's information. If necessary, further information should be obtained from the
appropriate Siemens office or from the manufacturer.
Ethanol (Spirit) / Isopropanol
- Solvents available from various manufacturers
- Highly volatile solvents for insulating components in SF6 compartments
- Cast resin components are not electrostatically charged when rubbed with cloths moistened therein

Note
Highly flammable solvent
• Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame; when working in vessels, take adequate
precautions to prevent explosions!
7-343
General considerations and instructions
r
Haku 5067
Kluthe
D-Heidelberg
- readily volatile solvent for insulating components in SF6 compartments
- Cast resin components are not electrostatically charged when rubbed with cloths moistened therein

Note
Inflammable solvents
• Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame; when working in vessels, take adequate
precautions to prevent explosions!
→ Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Agents on hydrocarbon base (no halogenated hydrocarbons)
Shellsol D60, Shell
Essovarsal 60, Esso
Aral 4005, Aral
Haku 1025 / 920, Kluthe
Low-volatility solvents for painted and metal parts outside SF6 compartments

Note
Combustible solvents (no EC labelling requirement)
• Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
•
→ Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Pos : 9.28.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-344
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.28.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19.2 R einigungsgeräte @ 0\mod_1331283528266_18.doc x @ 3914 @ 3 @ 1
7.19.2 Cleaning equipment
Lint-free paper
Use lint-free paper e.g. “A-Tork” (supplier: Mölnlycke) to apply or remove cleaning agents.

Note
Each paper is only to be used once.
Cloths and brushes
Cloths or brushes must not be used for the interior of metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear, nor for parts
of switchgear which are to carry high-voltage in subsequent operation.
Cloths and brushes may be used outside the gas compartments, provided that no lint or bristles find their
way into the gas compartments under any circumstances.
Vacuum cleaners
Vacuum cleaners may be used if the tubes and nozzles are made of plastic. The nozzles may be made of
rubber or plastic.

Note
Brushes are not allowed owing to the risk of loosing bristles.
High pressure cleaner
The use of high pressure cleaners having a working pressure of maximum 10 MPa on switchgear
components located outdoors is allowed providing the following instruction is considered.

Note
Rupture discs, drives, density monitor and electrical control elements and the
immediate environment of these components must not be cleaned with a high
pressure cleaner - danger of damage!
• The manufacturer's regulations of the high pressure cleaner must be maintained.
• Do not use a high pressure cleaner indoors!
Pos : 9.28.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-345
General considerations and instructions
r
Pos : 9.28.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19.3 R einigungsar beiten @ 4\mod_1336400145267_18.doc x @ 17287 @ 3 @ 1
7.19.3 Cleaning work
The location and nature of contamination determine the cleaning agent(s), equipment and process to be
used.
Internal spaces of the housing and outer surfaces with loose dust and light foreign matter

Note
If switching dust is to be expected after repeated heavy short-circuit tripping,
remedial measures must be taken for health reasons.
• Use a vacuum cleaner to remove loose dust and light foreign matter from smooth
surfaces and from inside housings.
Insulated parts in the SF6 gas compartments
Warning
Fire and explosion hazard
Do not smoke and do not approach with a naked flame!
• Where closed vessels are concerned, be sure to provide good through ventilation.
• Select a cleaning agent/solvent which is suitable for use in SF6 gas compartments.
• Dampen lint-free paper with the cleaning water and rub down the surfaces to be cleaned.
Do not spill any drops of the cleaning agent and do not allow it to get into openings or cracks. Do not allow
any cleaning agent to enter openings and cracks.
Lightly soiled outer surfaces
• Dissolve a mild, liquid domestic cleaning agent in warm water.
• Dampen lint-free paper with the cleaning water and rub down the surfaces to be cleaned.
Do not spill any drops of the cleaning agent and do not allow it to get into openings or cracks. Do not allow
any cleaning agent to enter openings and cracks.
7-346
General considerations and instructions
Outer surfaces or parts that have been greased or treated with anti-corrosion agents
Warning
Fire and explosion hazard
Do not smoke and do not approach with a naked flame!
• Select a cold-action, hydrocarbon-based cleaning agent.
• Dampen lint-free paper with the cleaning water and rub down the surfaces to be cleaned.
If necessary, immerse small parts.
Do not spill any drops of the cleaning agent and do not allow it to get into openings or cracks. Do not allow
any cleaning agent to enter openings and cracks.
• Wipe off with lint-free paper.
O-rings
• As above; but do not immerse the o-rings.
Pos : 9.28.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19.4 Entsorgung @ 4\mod_1336400260053_18.doc x @ 17298 @ 3 @ 1
7.19.4 Disposal
Use the cleaning paper once only!
Dispose of used cleaning paper, brushes, cleaning cloths and dirty solvent in confirmity with national
regulations.
Pos : 9.28.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-347
r
Pos : 9.29 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-348
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.30.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20 Korrosi onssc hutz, F etten und Ölen @ 0\mod_1331296051750_18.doc x @ 4016 @ 2 @ 1
7.20 Corrosion protection, greasing and oiling
This section contains detailed information on
-
corrosion prevention work to be done
properties and use of anti-corrosion agents
additional greases and oils to be used during maintenance
properties and use of these greases and oils.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Pos : 9.30.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.1 Korrosi onsschutz durc hführ en - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6,8DN 9 2 @ 4\mod_1336462900767_18.doc x @ 17310 @ 3 @ 1
7.20.1 Application of anti-corrosion agent
Anti-corrosion measures are implemented at the factory prior to shipment of the switchgear. In addition,
further anti-corrosion measures must be carried out during the assembly and maintenance work for modules
installed outdoors.
The following measures reliably inhibit the corrosion of the switchgear or for parts of the switchgear.
This avoids corrosion-related maintenance measures and the associated limitations of operation.

Note
Corrosion stresses are, to a great extent, dependent on the often greatly differing
atmospheric environmental conditions and the micro-climate at the site of
installation.
Pos : 9.30.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.1.1 Übersic ht über die durchzuführenden Korrosionssc hutz arbeiten 010 @ 4\mod_1336463479770_18.doc x @ 17321 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.1.1 Overview of anti-corrosive measures to be taken
The following shows the work to be done in the context of installation and maintenance. The place where
such anti-corrosive measures are to be taken and the individual work steps are described. A diagram
provides a visual aid (depending on the design of the switchgear system, its appearance may differ slightly
from the illustration).
Pos : 9.30.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-349
General considerations and instructions
r
Pos : 9.30.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.1.2 Freiluft und Innenraum mit korrosi ven U mweltbedingungen 01 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 4\mod_1336463653212_18.doc x @ 17332 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.1.2 Open-air and indoor with corrosive environmental conditions

Note
Tapped holes for pressurized containers, which remain open after assembly, must
be closed off with a hot-galvanized screw and a washer, both of which have been
treated with Tectyl beforehand.
• Blind holes and unused holes must be filled with Sikaflex 221 and must be painted after
drying.
Pos : 9.30.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.1.2 Freiluft und Innenraum mit korrosi ven U mweltbedingungen 02 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344019617060_0.doc x @ 41388 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.30.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.1.2 Freiluft und Innenraum mit korrosi ven U mweltbedingungen 02 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336464327406_18.doc x @ 17343 @ @ 1
1
****
Blind holes and unused holes must be filled with Sikaflex 221 and painted after drying
apply a coat of paint after drying
Fig. 7-10
Corrosion protection of blind holes and unused holes on flanges and covers
Pos : 9.30.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.1.2 Freiluft und Innenraum mit korrosi ven U mweltbedingungen 03 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 @ 4\mod_1336464581358_18.doc x @ 17354 @ @ 1

7-350
Note
All flanges and covers with O-ring seals to SF6 gas chambers must have a final
seal (e.g. including sight glass flanges)
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.30.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.1.2 Freiluft und Innenraum mit korrosi ven U mweltbedingungen 04 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bild2 @ 6\mod_1344020157159_0.doc x @ 41412 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.30.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.1.2 Fr eiluft und Innenr aum mi t korrosi ven U mweltbedi ngungen 04 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 6\mod_1344020355925_18.doc x @ 41436 @ @ 1
–––
"Tectyl 506" coating for external area A
(Outside and inside of the flange, inside of the hole and washer before fitting)
----
"Trost Multifunktionöl" coating for inner area B
(only when making the flanged connection)
• Grease bolts with "Molykote Longterm 2" before inserting.
******
Paint coating of primer (Celerol 918) and final coat (Alexit 5225) to be applied with brush or
roller (remove excess anti-corrosive agent and thoroughly clean the surface beforehand)
Fig. 7-11
Final sealing of flanges and covers
Pos : 9.30.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.1.2 Fr eiluft und Innenr aum mi t korrosi ven U mweltbedi ngungen 05 - 8DN 8 5 Bild3 @ 6\mod_1344020485483_0.doc x @ 41460 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.30.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.1.2 Fr eiluft und Innenr aum mi t korrosi ven U mweltbedi ngungen 05 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336465125473_18.doc x @ 17365 @ @ 1
• Check protection plate for damage and ensure that the pressure balancing elements is
functional.
• Seal the protection plate outside after fitting with "Alexit 5225" (do not seal the thread and
pressure balancing element!)
1
2
Protection plate
Pressure equalization element
Fig. 7-12
Rupture disc outdoors
Pos : 9.30.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.1.2 Fr eiluft und Innenr aum mi t korrosi ven U mweltbedi ngungen 06 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild4 @ 6\mod_1344020714012_0.doc x @ 41484 @ @ 1
7-351
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.30.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.1.2 Fr eiluft und Innenr aum mi t korrosi ven U mweltbedi ngungen 06 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336465484416_18.doc x @ 17376 @ @ 1
1
2
before fitting, degrease the 2 retaining plates, seal with "Sikaflex 221" and paint with "Finalux"
After fitting, degrease the 4 busbars, seal with "Sikaflex 221" and paint with "Finalux"
Fig. 7-13
Transitional areas between components made of different metals
Pos : 9.30.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.1.2 Fr eiluft und Innenr aum mi t korrosi ven U mweltbedi ngungen 07 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 4\mod_1336465577224_18.doc x @ 17387 @ @ 1
If no special corrosion protection measures have been stipulated (depending on the protection classification)
you should carry out double or triple application of Tectyl 506:
- for mounted parts (shaft bearings, pins) made of steel GalZn or stainless steel
- moving parts made of steel or stainless steel
- other components made of any material with
Pos : 9.30.16 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-352
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.30.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.1.3 Innenr aum unter nor mal en U mwel tbedi ngungen 01 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9 2 @ 4\mod_1336465713400_18.doc x @ 17398 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.1.3 Indoor conditions under normal conditions
Pos : 9.30.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.1.3 Innenr aum unter nor mal en U mwel tbedi ngungen 02 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9 2 Bild @ 6\mod_1344021018531_0.doc x @ 41508 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.30.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.1.3 Innenr aum unter nor mal en U mwel tbedi ngungen 02 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9 2 Bildu @ 6\mod_1344021100531_18.doc x @ 41532 @ @ 1
–––
----
“Tectyl 506" coating for external area A (Outside and inside of the flange, inside of the hole and
washer before fitting)
"Trost Multifunktionöl" coating for inner area B (only when connecting)
• Grease bolts with "Molykote Longterm 2" before inserting.
Fig. 7-14
Anti-corrosion procedures for bare metal surfaces of flanges and covers without/with
attachment, Interior
Pos : 9.30.20 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-353
General considerations and instructions
r
Pos : 9.30.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.2 Vorgesc hriebene Korrosi ons schutz- und Dic htmittel @ 4\mod_1336465826125_18.doc x @ 17409 @ 3 @ 1
7.20.2 Prescribed anti-corrosion and sealing agents
Attention
anti-corrosive agents are highly flammable, hazardous to health (toxic) and/or
harmful to water.
• The interests of personnel safety and of protecting the environment, follow instructions for
use of anti-corrosive agents carefully!
The following selection of the most important material data has been taken from the manufacturer's
datasheets and facilitate initial information. It does not replace the manufacturer's information. If required,
further information can be requested from the relevant Siemens representative or direct from the
manufacturer.
Trost Multifunktionöl
O. Trost, D-Neumünster
- Anti-corrosive oil (approx. 22%), dissolved in gasoline
- good coverage: thin oil film remains after the gasoline has evaporated
- temporary anticorrosion protection for indoor conditions

Note
Inflammable when in a workable state
Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
→Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Tectyl 506
Valvoline, D-Hamburg
- Wax-like anti-corrosion agent, dissolved in gasoline
- temporary anti-corrosion protection for outdoor conditions
- neutral towards all metal surfaces, does not attack paint, plastics or rubber.

Note
Inflammable when in a workable state
Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
→Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Sikaflex - 221
Sika Chemie, D-Stuttgart
- Single-component sealing agent on polyurethane base

Pos : 9.30.22 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.30.23 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.3 Vorgesc hriebene Lac ke @ 4\mod_1336466023182_18.doc x @ 17420 @ 3 @ 1
7-354
Note
Contains isocyanates
Avoid contact with eyes and skin!
General considerations and instructions
7.20.3 Prescribed paints
Attention
of the paints are flammable and harmful to water.
• The interests of personnel safety and environmental protection, read and pay attention to
the product instructions and safety data for the paints!
The following selection of the most important material data has been taken from the manufacturer's
datasheets and facilitate initial information. It does not replace the manufacturer's information. If required,
further information can be requested from the relevant Siemens representative or direct from the
manufacturer.
Finalux coating varnish
Mankiewicz, D-Hamburg
Air-hardening synthetic resin paint to repair small areas of paint damage on external surfaces indoors (area
< 20 cm x 20 cm

Note
Inflammable and slightly toxic
Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
→Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Seevenax Schutzlack 112
Mankiewicz, D-Hamburg
Together with Seevenax hardener 125, 2-component epoxy resin varnish hardening at room temperature, for
repairing damaged paintwork in SF6 compartments

Note
Inflammable and slightly toxic
Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
→Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Seevenax Hardener 125
Mankiewicz, D-Hamburg
Hardener component for Seevenax protective varnish 112

Note
Inflammable and slightly toxic
Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
→Fluid is slightly harmful to water
7-355
General considerations and instructions
r
Alexit 5225
Mankiewicz, D-Hamburg
In combination with Celerol reaction primer 918 and Alexit hardener for the repair of paint damage and for
final sealing of flanges and covers

Note
Inflammable and slightly toxic
Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
→Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Alexit hardener
Mankiewicz, D-Hamburg
- Hardener components for Alexit 5225

Note
Inflammable and slightly toxic
Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
→Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Celerol reaction primer RG 918
Mankiewicz, D-Hamburg
–
quick-drying meatl-reacting primer with adhesive properties and corrosion protection effect

Note
Inflammable and slightly toxic
Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
→Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Schuppenpanzer K Zinkschutz
Fritze, D-Berlin
–
Air-drying zinc dust paint for repairs to zinc surfaces

Note
Inflammable and slightly toxic
Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!
→Fluid is slightly harmful to water
Pos : 9.30.24 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-356
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.30.25 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.4 F etten und Ölen @ 4\mod_1336466179036_18.doc x @ 17431 @ 3 @ 1
7.20.4 Greasing and lubrication
In order to minimize friction losses and wear of moving parts, and to ensure free movement of bolted joints
for the entire working life of the switchgear, lubricating greases and oils must be applied according to the
anticipated stress to which the materials are subjected.
In the course of maintenance the oils and greases must be renewed or replenished when required. In
particular, the following must be used:

Note
All the following greases and oils are substances or liquids that are harmful to
water.
Pos : 9.30.26 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.4.1 F ür alle Sc hmierstellen und all e ni cht feuer verzinkten Schr auben, s ofern kei n anderes .... @ 4\mod_1336466355019_18.doc x @ 17442 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.4.1 For all lubricating points and non-hot-galvanized bolts
For all lubricating points and non-hot-galvanized bolts, provided no other lubricant is specified
Centoplex 24 DL
Klüber Lubrication
D-München
- High-speed / low-temperature grease on mineral oil base with Li-Ca soap as thickener
Pos : 9.30.27 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.4.2 F ür R adi aldic htri nge und Wälzlag er der SF6- Wellendic htung am U ml enkg etriebe und am Antrieb @ 4\mod_1336466914716_18.doc x @ 17453 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.4.2 For sealing rings and anti-friction bearings of the SF6 shaft seal
For sealing rings and anti-friction bearings of the SF6 shaft seal on the corner gears and on the operating
mechanism
Isoflex Topas L32
Klüber Lubrication
D-München
- High-speed / low-temperature grease on mineral oil base with Li-Ca soap as thickener
Pos : 9.30.28 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.4.3 F ür die Gewinde all er feuer verzinkten Schr auben @ 4\mod_1336467095236_18.doc x @ 17464 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.4.3 For the threads of all hot-galvanized bolts
Molykote Longterm 2 plus
Dow Corning
D-München
- grease on mineral oil base with Li soap as thickening agent and molybdenum disulphide for increasing
the pressure absorption capacity
Pos : 9.30.29 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.4.4 F ür Scharni ere, Gel enke, Hilfssc halter wellen @ 4\mod_1336467295445_18.doc x @ 17475 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.4.4 For hinges, articulated joints, auxiliary switch shafts
Trost Multifunktionöl
Shell
D-Hamburg
- Lubricating oil on mineral oil base with additional materials
Pos : 9.30.30 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-357
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.30.31 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.4.5 F ür Ans chl ußfl ächen für H oc hspannungsl eitungen sowi e Schr aub- und Fes tkontakte, Er dungs- .. @ 4\mod_1336467413876_18.doc x @ 17486 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.4.5 For contact surfaces of conducting connections
For contact surfaces of high-voltage lines, bolted and fixed contacts, earthing bar and busbar bolted
connections
SHELL VASELINE 8420
or SHELL COMPOUND S 6800
Shell
D-Hamburg
- Vaseline as contact protection grease
Pos : 9.30.32 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.4.6 F ür R unddichtringe @ 4\mod_1336467729738_18.doc x @ 17497 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.4.6 For O-rings
SHELL VASELINE 8420
or SHELL COMPOUND S 6800
Shell
D-Hamburg
or
Polylub 801
Klüber Lubrication
D-München
- Fitting aid for o-rings
- Other types of grease can damage the o-rings and thus can cause leaks.
Pos : 9.30.33 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.20 Korr osionssc hutz, Fetten und Öl en/7.20.4.7 Tr enner- und Er dersc haltsti fte - 8DN8, 8DN9 2 @ 4\mod_1336467823726_18.doc x @ 17508 @ 4 @ 1
7.20.4.7 Disconnector and earthing switch pins
Barrierta
Klüber Lubrication
D-München
- For greasing the switching pins. The grease film should form a thin, whitish, gleaming layer on the whole
surface of the moving contact.
Pos : 9.30.34 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-358
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.31.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.21 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters abbauen ( Ausf G) - nicht 8D N9 6, 8D Q1/7.21 F eders peicherantrieb des Leis tungssc hal ters abbauen ( Aus führung G) @ 4\mod_1336469344260_18.doc x @ 17541 @ 2 @ 1
7.21 Remove the spring accumulator drive of the circuit breaker (Version G)
This section describes how to dismantle the spring-stored-energy mechanism using the blocking device.
The blocking device must be used if the energy mechanism needs to be dismantled due to damage, but
where it is not possible to first relieve the breaking spring, for example by operating the release.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Circuit-breaker [ 2.5]
Warning
The spring-stored-energy mechanism stores a high energy potential which
can represent a threat to the life and health of personnel if it is released in
an uncontrolled manner.
• Work on the spring-stored-energy mechanism must be carried out by qualified and
trained personnel only.
• The blocking device must be used when dismantling the spring-stored-energy
mechanism.
• The spring tensioning device must always be used when relieving the closing and
breaking springs.
Pos : 9.31.2 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-359
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.31.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.21 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters abbauen ( Ausf G) - nicht 8D N9 6, 8D Q1/7.21.1 Aufbau der Bloc kier vorrichtung 01 @ 4\mod_1336468815422_18.doc x @ 17530 @ 3 @ 1
7.21.1 Structure of the blocking device
The blocking device consists of the holder [1], the spindle nut [2], the four spacer bolts [3] and the spindle [4]
with the spindle head [5] and the coupling bolt [6].
Pos : 9.31.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.21 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters abbauen ( Ausf G) - nicht 8D N9 6, 8D Q1/7.21.1 Aufbau der Bloc kier vorrichtung 02 - Bild1 @ 6\mod_1343996839256_0.doc x @ 41140 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.31.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.21 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters abbauen ( Ausf G) - nicht 8D N9 6, 8D Q1/7.21.1 Aufbau der Bloc kier vorrichtung 02 - Bildu @ 4\mod_1336469458536_18.doc x @ 17552 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Holder
Spindle nuts
Spacer bolts
Spindle
Spindle head
Coupling bolt
Fig. 7-15
Locking bolt
Pos : 9.31.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.21 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters abbauen ( Ausf G) - nicht 8D N9 6, 8D Q1/7.21.1 Aufbau der Bloc kier vorrichtung 03 @ 4\mod_1336469658167_18.doc x @ 17563 @ @ 1
Various kinds of spacer bolts and spindles are used depending on the type of equipment.
For this reason, the bolts and the spindles are marked with the names of the switchgear types with which
they may be used.
Pos : 9.31.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-360
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.31.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.21 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters abbauen ( Ausf G) - nicht 8D N9 6, 8D Q1/7.21.2 Bloc kier vorrichtung anbauen 01 @ 4\mod_1336470010648_18.doc x @ 17574 @ 3 @ 1
7.21.2 Fitting the blocking device
• Remove the upper panel of the drive cabinet.
This provides access to recesses in the drive which are necessary for fitting the blocking device to the drive.
• Twist the spindle [4] into the spindle nut [2].
• Remove the coupling bolt [6] and keep it to hand.
• Screw the spacer bolts [3] into the spring-stored-energy mechanism.
• Fit the holder with the spindle and screw the four screws of the holder into the spacer
bolts.
• turning the spindle, adjust it so that the bore hole in the connecting rod [7] of the breaking
spring is at the same height as the hole in the spindle head [5].
• Insert the bolt through the hole in the spindle head and the hole in the connecting rod of
the breaking spring and secure.
Pos : 9.31.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.21 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters abbauen ( Ausf G) - nicht 8D N9 6, 8D Q1/7.21.2 Bloc kier vorrichtung anbauen 03 @ 4\mod_1336470476121_18.doc x @ 17596 @ @ 1
• Disengage the connecting rod to the circuit-breaker.
• Completely remove the drive cabinet.
• Remove the lower panel of the drive cabinet.
• Insert spring-tensioning device for relieving the closing and breaking springs.
• Remove the blocking mechanism and the relieving mechanism.
Pos : 9.31.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.21 F eders peic herantrieb des Leis tungssc halters abbauen (Aus f G) - nic ht 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1/7.21.2 Bl oc ki er vorric htung anbauen 02 - Bild2 @ 6\mod_1343998730675_0.doc x @ 41164 @ @ 1
7-361
r
Pos : 9.31.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.21 F eders peic herantrieb des Leis tungssc halters abbauen (Aus f G) - nic ht 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1/7.21.2 Bl oc ki er vorric htung anbauen 02 - Bildu @ 4\mod_1336470275102_18.doc x @ 17585 @ @ 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Holder
Spindle nut
Spacer bolts
Spindle
Spindle head
Bolt
Connecting rod
Fig. 7-16
Blocking device, fitted
Pos : 9.31.12 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-362
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.32.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramme/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramme 01 @ 4\mod_1336470656595_18.doc x @ 17607 @ 2 @ 1
7.22 Timing charts
The identification data for the auxiliary switches are completed by the timing charts which show the switching
position of the individual auxiliary contacts in the course of switching the main interrupter on or off. This does
not contain time data. The time data are provided in the routine test records.
Basic information:
Order documentation
Motor drives [ 1.2]
Pos : 9.32.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramme/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramme 02 - T abelle Bez eichnungen @ 4\mod_1336470889895_18.doc x @ 17618 @ @ 1
Key
The timing charts use the following descriptions:
Motor running time with motor drives
Main interrupter contact
Wipe contact (auxiliary switch)
runtime
main contact
wiper
NO contact (auxiliary switch)
NO
NC contacts (auxiliary switch)
NC
NO contact leading (auxiliary switch)
NC contacts delayed break (auxiliary switch)
NO em
NC lb
Pos : 9.32.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramme/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramme 03 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 LS, G-Antrieb Bild1 @ 6\mod_1343994639092_0.doc x @ 40726 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.32.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramme/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramme 03 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 LS, G-Antrieb Bildu @ 4\mod_1336470963468_18.doc x @ 17629 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-17
Circuit-breaker - shared drive - OPEN and CLOSE
Pos : 9.32.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramme/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramme 04 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bild2 @ 6\mod_1343995004413_0.doc x @ 40870 @ @ 1
7-363
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.32.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramme/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramme 04 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336474608067_18.doc x @ 17640 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-18
Circuit breaker - shared drive - Operating sequence CO
Pos : 9.32.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramme/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramme 05 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bild3 @ 6\mod_1343995232627_0.doc x @ 40894 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.32.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramme/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramme 05 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336474803066_18.doc x @ 17651 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-19
Circuit-breaker - shared drive - Operating sequence O - 0,3 s - CO
Pos : 9.32.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramme/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramme 06 - 8DN8 5, 8DN8 6 Bild4 @ 6\mod_1343995592792_0.doc x @ 40968 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.32.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.22 Z eitabl aufdi agramme/7.22 Z eitablaufdiagramme 06 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336475294220_18.doc x @ 17662 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-20
Work-in-progress earthing switch - CLOSE and OPEN
Pos : 9.32.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.22 Z eitabl aufdi agramme/7.22 Z eitablaufdiagramme 07 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild5 @ 6\mod_1343996601261_0.doc x @ 40992 @ @ 1
7-364
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.32.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.22 Z eitabl aufdi agramme/7.22 Z eitablaufdiagramme 07 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336475881662_18.doc x @ 17673 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-21
High-speed earthing switch - CLOSE and OPEN
7-365
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.32.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.22 Z eitabl aufdi agramme/7.22 Z eitablaufdiagramme 08 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bild6 @ 6\mod_1343996709837_0.doc x @ 41096 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.32.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.22 Z eitabl aufdi agramme/7.22 Z eitablaufdiagramme 08 - 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 Bildu @ 4\mod_1336476040924_18.doc x @ 17684 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-22
Disconnector and earthing switch module (Three position drive) - CLOSE and OPEN
Pos : 9.32.15 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-366
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.33.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.23 Druc k-T emperatur-Diagr amm für SF 6/7.23 Hinweis e z um U mgang mit SF 6 01 @ 0\mod_1331545030665_18.doc x @ 4193 @ 2 @ 1
7.23 Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6
All indications for gas pressures always assume a temperature of + 20 °C, even if this has not been stated in
individual cases.
After evacuation a gas compartment is filled with gas up to the prescribed rated filling pressure at + 20 °C.
This filling then corresponds to a certain density.
If the temperature changes, then the gas pressure indicated on the pressure gauge will also change, but not
the density. Consequently, the gas pressures for various temperatures lie on a curve which is referred to as
the line of constant gas density.
If the gas density should change, e.g. due to loss of gas, a different constant gas density curve is applicable.
To get an accurate reading of the pressure gauge display, use the diagram.
Pos : 9.33.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.23 Druc k-T emperatur-Diagr amm für SF 6/7.23 Hinweis e z um U mgang mit SF 6 02 - Bild @ 6\mod_1343994465657_0.doc x @ 40502 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.33.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.23 Druc k-T emperatur-Diagr amm für SF 6/7.23 Hinweis e z um U mgang mit SF 6 02 - Bildu @ 4\mod_1336476833572_18.doc x @ 17718 @ @ 1
*
Gauge pressure
Fig. 7-23
Pressure-temperature diagram for different gas densities (SF6). The following examples
demonstrate how it is to be used.
Pos : 9.33.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-367
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.33.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.23 Druc k-T emperatur-Diagr amm für SF 6/7.23 Hinweis e z um U mgang mit SF 6 03 @ 4\mod_1336477436866_18.doc x @ 17729 @ @ 1
Examples
The examples do not apply to any particular type of switchgear.
If pressure values lie between two lines of constant gas density an interpolated density line must be used.
1. Example
The gas filling pressure at +20°C is 4 bar (gauge pressure). The pressure gauge indicates 3.5 MPa at -5°C.
Question:
Is the indication in order or has a loss of gas occurred?
Answer:
There has been no loss of gas, because the value of 3.5 bar at -5°C lies on the same line of constant gas
density as the value of 4 bar at +20°C.
2. Example
The gas filling pressure at +20°C is 3.2 bar (gauge pressure). The pressure gauge indicates 3.25 bar at
50°C.
Question:
Is the indication in order or has a loss of gas occurred?
Answer:
3.25 bar at +50°C lies on a line of constant gas density which is equal to a gas pressure of 2.8 bar at +20°C.
There has, therefore, been a loss of gas that has led to a pressure loss of (3.2 – 2.8) bar = 0.4 bar referred to
+20°C.
3. Example
The gas loss found in the second example is to be made good by topping up the gas filling. The temperature
has in the meantime dropped to +32.5°C and the pressure gauge indicates 3.0 bar.
Question:
Which value must the pressure gauge indicate when topping up is completed?
Answer:
Topping up must continue until the density line is reached that at +20°C corresponds to the value of 3.2 bar
(gauge pressure). At +32.5°C, this density line corresponds to a pressure of 3.4 bar. Topping up must
therefore stop when the pressure gauge indicates 3.4 bar (gauge pressure).
Pos : 9.33.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-368
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.34.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmomente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24 Schr aubverbi ndungen, Anzi ehdr ehmomente, SL-Sic her ung en @ 0\mod_1331537613355_18.doc x @ 4091 @ 2 @ 1
7.24 Bolted joints, tightening torques, locking tabs
This section contains a detailed description of
-
assembling a bolted joint
identifying the strength class
using locking tabs
checking a bolted joint.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Pos : 9.34.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmomente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.1 H erstell en ei ner Sc hraubver bindung 01 @ 0\mod_1331537708941_18.doc x @ 4095 @ 3 @ 1
7.24.1 Assembling a bolted joint
For assembling the switchgear use only the bolts supplied. Spare bolts are included in the accessories pack,
in case any are lost during assembly work.
If the number of bolts supplied for the pressure vessels is insufficient, spare bolts must be ordered from the
factory only.
Warning
If unsuitable bolts are used, they can malfunction and cause severe
personal injury.
All bolted joints must be tightened with a torque wrench set to the prescribed tightening torque. Arbitrary
tightening can result in damage due to loosening of bolted joints. Refer to the following table for tightening
torques.

Note
Take heed of deviations in drawings.
7-369
General considerations and instructions
r
Lubrication
Bolt threads must be greased before use to reduce the effects of friction on the tightening torque to a
minimum.The following lubricants have to be used:
- for hot-galvanized bolts for housing flanges “Molykote-Longterm 2” from Dow Corning
- for all other bolts “Centoplex 24” from Klüber Lubrication
Pos : 9.34.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmomente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.1 H erstell en ei ner Sc hraubver bindung 02 - Bil d @ 6\mod_1343988431777_0.doc x @ 40478 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.34.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmomente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.1 H erstell en ei ner Sc hraubver bindung 02 - Bil du @ 0\mod_1331538071922_18.doc x @ 4099 @ @ 1
Fastening elements for general use
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Hex. socket head grub screws
Hex. socket head countersunk bolts
Studs
Nuts
Hexagon bolts
Cheese-head bolts with hexagon sockets
Fig. 7-24
Fastening elements for general use
Pos : 9.34.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmomente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.1 H erstell en ei ner Sc hraubver bindung 03 - T abelle Anziehdrehmomente @ 4\mod_1336478106776_18.doc x @ 17740 @ @ 1
Tightening torques in Nm arranged according to strength class and thread size. The values apply to clean,
greased threads and any nuts.
Tightening torques
Strengh class
for general applications
for pressure
vessels
5.6
8.8
10.9
8.8
M6
6 ± 0,5
8±1
8±1
8±1
M8
12 ± 2
20 ± 2
20 ± 2
20 ± 2
M 10
25 ± 3
40 ± 4
40 ± 4
40 ± 4
M 12
40 ± 4
70 ± 7
70 ± 7
70 ± 7
M 16
100 ± 10
170 ± 20
170 ± 20
170 ± 20
M 20
340 ± 30
340 ± 30
340 ± 30
M 24
600 ± 60
600 ± 60
600 ± 60
Thread sizes
> M 24
Pos : 9.34.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-370
see drawing data
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.34.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmomente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.2 Identi fizierung der Fes tigkeits kl ass e 01 @ 0\mod_1331541347514_18.doc x @ 4128 @ 3 @ 1
7.24.2 Identifying the strength class
Hexagon bolts:
Pos : 9.34.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmomente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.2 Identi fizierung der Fes tigkeits kl ass e 02 - Bil d2 @ 6\mod_1343979695826_0.doc x @ 39490 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.34.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmomente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.2 Identi fizierung der Fes tigkeits kl ass e 02 - Bil du @ 4\mod_1336478415356_18.doc x @ 17751 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-25
An example of the strength class (here 8.8) shown on hexagon bolts
a) mainly raised or impressed on the top of the bolt head, or
b) impressed on a flat
Pos : 9.34.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estig keits kl ass e 03 @ 6\mod_1343980132223_18.doc x @ 39453 @ @ 1
Cheese-head bolts with hexagon sockets:
Pos : 9.34.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estig keits kl ass e 04 - Bild3 @ 6\mod_1343980350236_0.doc x @ 39537 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.34.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estig keits kl ass e 04 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331542053523_18.doc x @ 4132 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-26
An example of the strength class (e.g. 10.9) shown in cheese-head bolts with hexagon
sockets
a) mainly by raised or impressed figures on the top of the bolt, or
b) impressed on the side
Pos : 9.34.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estig keits kl ass e 05 @ 6\mod_1343980497081_18.doc x @ 39561 @ @ 1
Studs:
Strength class / Symbol
Pos : 9.34.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estig keits kl ass e 06 - Bild4 @ 6\mod_1343980582817_0.doc x @ 39585 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.34.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estig keits kl ass e 06 - Bildu @ 4\mod_1336478547631_18.doc x @ 17762 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-27
Identification of strength class on studs
a) on the thread pint in figures, or . . .
b) . . . with symbols.
Pos : 9.34.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estig keits kl ass e 07 @ 4\mod_1336479359348_18.doc x @ 17773 @ @ 1
7-371
General considerations and instructions
r

Note
If a nut is used the bolt must protrude at least one turn.
- Bolts of strength class 10.9 and above which are screwed into aluminium must be tightened only with
torques for bolts of strength class 8.8.
- For bolted joints for pressurised containers (flange connections on aluminium containers) and bolts, nuts,
studs of SA540 Grade B23 / 24, Material No. 1.6582 (34CrNiMo6, Tensile strength: 1000 N / mm2,
Elongation: 12%) strength class 8.8 tightening torques should be used.
- For studs (conforming to DIN 833, 835, 836 and 939, for example) only the tightening torques for bolts of
strength class 5.6 may be used. The torques to be used for the nuts are given in the table.
- Bolts and cap nuts for pipe connections must be treated and tightened in accordance with the appropriate
sections.
- Bolted joints that have been tightened to the specified torques will still maintain sufficient contact pressure
even after any settling. If checked at a later stage, different tightening torques may be measured.
Procedure:
• Grease thread of bolt.
• Fit any washers as shown in the drawing.
• Lightly tighten all bolts and any nuts at joints using a spanner.
• Tighten the bolted connection with a torque wrench set to the specified torque (given in
table or illustration). Specifications, values and tolerances must be strictly observed. Any
special values given in the relevant illustration have precedence over the values in the
table.
Pos : 9.34.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.3 SL-Sic her ung en 01 @ 4\mod_1336479661634_18.doc x @ 17794 @ 3 @ 1
7.24.3 Locking tabs
All locking tabs must be inspected for proper fit and freedom from corrosion.
Pos : 9.34.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.3 SL-Sic her ung en 02 - Bild @ 6\mod_1343987408223_0.doc x @ 40430 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.34.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.3 SL-Sic her ung en 02 - Bildu @ 6\mod_1343987606924_18.doc x @ 40454 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-28
Locking tabs
Pos : 9.34.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubverbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmomente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.4 Kontrollier en ei ner Sc hraubver bindung @ 4\mod_1336479805027_18.doc x @ 17805 @ 3 @ 1
7-372
General considerations and instructions
7.24.4 Checking a bolted joint
All bolted joints were tightened with the specified torque during assembly. The bolted joints are to be
checked as follows:
• Set the torque wrench to the specified torque. The torque values are listed in the table.
• Apply the torque wrench to the bolt and tighten it.
Warning
Exposed moving parts are dangerous and can cause injury.
- Parts of the equipment may also be damaged.
- Work may be carried out only when the necessary measures have been taken to ensure that the
equipment is disconnected and cannot be switched on again.
Pos : 9.34.21 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-373
r
Pos : 9.35 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-374
General considerations and instructions
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.36.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinweise z um U mgang mit SF6/7.25 Hi nweis e z um U mg ang mit SF 6 @ 0\mod_1331549800142_18.doc x @ 4300 @ 2 @ 1
7.25 Advice on handling SF6
This section contains a detailed description of
-
physical and chemical properties of SF6
possible health hazards and general work hygiene requirements
equipment required for handling SF6
working on SF6 gas compartments
cleaning and disposing of materials and equipment used.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Pos : 9.36.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinweise z um U mgang mit SF6/7.25.1 Ges undheitsgefahren und allgemei ne arbeits hygienische F orderungen @ 4\mod_1336480579083_18.doc x @ 17827 @ 3 @ 1
7.25.1 Health hazards and general work-hygienic requirements
Commercially available SF6 is non-toxic. Nor does SF6 employed in the switchgear contain any impurities
which may constitute a health risk. However, SF6 displaces oxygen.
SF6 concentrations of above 19 volume % require special precautions!
Concentrations of this type can occur in opened and non-ventilated SF6 gas compartments, at floor level of
enclosed, constricted sections of the system and in lower-lying rooms (e.g. basements, cable ducts).
SF6 decomposition products are of varying toxicity.
They may cause irritation of the skin, eyes and mucous membranes and – if inhaled in substantial quantities
– nausea, dizziness and pulmonary edema. Even small amounts of gaseous decomposition products will,
however, draw attention to the hazard – before a risk of poisoning exists – through their unpleasant, pungent
smell.
The following general work-hygienic requirements must be met:
- Avoid contact of decomposition products with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not swallow or breathe in
these substances.
- Disposable suits, used material, filters from SF6 installations, respiratory equipment, maintenance
appliances or vacuum cleaners, switch dust and cleaning fluids must be disposed of so that the dust and
water-soluble fluorides they contain are not released.
- Ensure the skin, clothing and the workplace are kept free of contamination. Rinse off any dust on the skin
will plenty of water!
- Before work breaks and after the task is completed, thoroughly wash face, neck, arms and hands with
plenty of water.
- Eating, drinking and smoking or storing foodstuffs is prohibited in rooms with open SF6 installations
containing switch dust.
Pos : 9.36.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-375
General considerations and instructions
r
Pos : 9.36.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinweise z um U mgang mit SF67.25.2 U mwel tei nflüsse von Sc hwefel hexafluorid ( SF6) 01 @ 32\mod_1455516688249_18.doc x @ 324212 @ 3 @ 1
7.25.2 Environmental effects of sulphur hexafluoride (SF6)
SF6 is a non-ozone depleting gas, but is included in the group of Green House Gases - GHG.The Global
2
Warming Potential - GWP of SF6 is about 22,200 times greater than of carbon dioxide (CO ). As a result of
the very small concentrations of SF6, the effects on global warming are likely to be slight. At the Climate
Conference in Kyoto, Japan, in 1997, SF6 was included in the list of greenhouse gases which are to be
monitored and whose emission is to be reduced on a global basis by the implementation of specific
measures.
The targets from the Kyoto Protocol were implemented through the coming into force of the EU F Gas
Regulation (No. 842/2006) in July 2006. In addition, the German self-regulation declaration exists in
Germany since May 2005.
The volume of gas used in the switchgear in kg of SF6 is documented at the switchgear bay and in the
documents of the switchgear. The volume used for a switchgear bay is specified on the rating plates of the
SF6 plant. The individual volumes for each gas compartment are stated in the gas monitoring drawings. In
addition to the SF6 details on the rating plate and in the gas monitoring drawing, an information plate affixed
to the plant indicates the use of SF6 in the plant.
Pos : 9.36.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinweise z um U mgang mit SF6/7.25.2 U mwelteinfl uß von Schwefelhexafl uori d (SF 6) 02 - Bil d Hinweissc hild auf SF 6 Kyoto-Protokoll @ 26\mod_1396956060715_0.doc x @ 237429 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.36.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinweise z um U mgang mit SF6/7.25.2 U mwelteinfl uß von Schwefelhexafl uori d (SF 6) 02 - Bil du Hinweissc hild auf SF 6 Kyoto-Pr otokoll @ 26\mod_1396956519352_18.doc x @ 237448 @ @ 1
Fig. 7-29
Sign warning of SF6
Pos : 9.36.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinweise z um U mgang mit SF6/7.25.2 U mwelteinfl üss e von Schwefelhexafl uorid (SF 6) 03 @ 26\mod_1396956604388_18.doc x @ 237467 @ @ 1
The following applies for the manufacturer and the user of the plant as a general principle: it must be
ensured that all measures are taken to prevent emissions of SF6 during operation, maintenance and
installation work, the disposal of high voltage switchgear and plants as well as the transport, storage,
recovery, recycling or disposal of SF6.

Note
SF6 may not be discharged into the atmosphere under any circumstances.
The use of trained personnel and state-ofthe- art equipment is a basic prerequisite
for this.
Pos : 9.36.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1
7-376
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.36.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinweise z um U mgang mit SF6/7.25.3 Physi kalisc he und c hemi sche Eigensc haften @ 4\mod_1336480131123_18.doc x @ 17816 @ 3 @ 1
7.25.3 Physical and chemical properties
Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) is a colourless and odourless gas. Its density at 20° C and 1 bar (100 kPa) is 6.07
g/l. It is therefore approximately five times denser (heavier) than air. Under compression it can be easily
liquefied and can therefore be stored and transported in gas cylinders as liquid gas.
At an ambient temperature SF6 is chemically and thermally stable, inactive (inert), almost water-insoluble
and non-combustible.
Due to its high dielectric strength and excellent arc quenching properties, SF6 makes a good insulating and
extinguishing medium.
If SF6 escapes from an SF6 installation without becoming a turbulent mixture with the ambient air, with its
high density it may accumulate at ground level and penetrate basement areas. Once mixed with the ambient
air SF6 will not separate again.
SF6 decomposes if exposed to electrical discharges and arcs. Upon cooling, recombination occurs to a large
extent. However, it may react with air and water vapour, as well as construction materials (e.g. with volatile
flammable substances given off by contacts). Gaseous low sulphur fluorides and solid metallic fluorides (in
dust-form – known as switch dust) may thereby be produced in the presence of moisture, as well as
hydrogen fluoride. Some of these decomposition products can be detected by their unpleasant, pungent
smell.
Pos : 9.36.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum U mg ang mit SF 6/7.25.5 Ausrüstung für die Handhabung von SF 6 @ 4\mod_1336480759348_18.doc x @ 17838 @ 3 @ 1
7.25.4 Equipment for handling SF6
SF6 handling equipment should enable quick emptying and filling of gas compartments, effective and safe
handling and disposal of waste materials, and most important of all afford protection to personnel.
The range of equipment recommended depends on the nature of the work to be carried out.
Pos : 9.36.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum U mg ang mit SF 6/7.25.3.1 Gas arbeiten außer hal b des Gasr aumes @ 4\mod_1336480875884_18.doc x @ 17849 @ 4 @ 1
7.25.4.1 Carrying out gas-related work outside the gas compartment
The following equipment is recommended if the gas-related task can only be carried out outside the gas
compartment.
- Notices informing personnel of safety regulations, including drawings showing the layout of the
switchgear and division into compartments.
- SF6 maintenance unit or SF6 filling device with gas cylinder
- SF6 percentage measuring device
- device for measuring SF6 moisture content
- SF6 leakage measuring device
- Precision pressure gauge 0 - 10 bar (0 - 1000 kPa)
- First Aid equipment.
Pos : 9.36.12 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-377
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.36.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum U mg ang mit SF 6/7.25.3.2 Ar beiten i m geöffneten Gasr aum, wenn keine SF 6-Zers etz ungs punkte vor handen si nd @ 4\mod_1336481028464_18.doc x @ 17860 @ 4 @ 1
7.25.4.2 Working inside gas compartments without SF6 decomposition products
In addition to the equipment recommended under 3.1, the following is recommended for work in an open gas
compartment:
- Electrical suction blower with hoses for the forced ventilation
- Cloth gloves
- Sleeve protectors
- Oxygen meter
- A sign indicating that there are persons in the gas compartment.
Pos : 9.36.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum U mg ang mit SF 6/7.25.3.3 Ar beiten i m geöffneten Gasr aum, wenn SF6-Z ersetzungs produkte vor handen sind @ 4\mod_1336481187013_18.doc x @ 17871 @ 4 @ 1
7.25.4.3 Working inside gas compartments with SF6 decomposition products
If work is to be carried out where SF6 decomposition products are to be expected (e.g. after a stray light arc),
the following is recommended in addition to the equipment listed under 3.1 and 3.2:
- Full vision safety glasses
- Half-mask breathing equipment with combination filter cartridge B2P2
- Cotton tricot gloves worn with protective gloves (rubber)
- Double-walled plastic rubbish bags and a plastic container for the used cleaning material
- A roll of cleaning cloths made of lint-free paper, a dustpan, brush
- High-power industrial vacuum cleaner with a fine dust filter (Category K1) to trap particles of up to 0.3
micrometers
- Pre-filter unit for the maintenance unit with adapters
- Measuring device for decomposition products with a corresponding number of test tubes.
Pos : 9.36.15 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-378
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.36.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum U mg ang mit SF 6/7.25.4 Ar beiten an Gasräumen @ 4\mod_1336481321797_18.doc x @ 17882 @ 3 @ 1
7.25.5 Work in gas compartments
Pos : 9.36.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum U mg ang mit SF 6/7.25.4.1 Gr unds ätzlic he Anforderungen @ 4\mod_1336481429100_18.doc x @ 17893 @ 4 @ 1
7.25.5.1 Basic requirements
With all work in the gas chambers, you must ensure that
- no SF6 (even in very small amounts) escapes to the atmosphere
- the room of installation is well ventilated, particularly close to ground level
- no naked flame (e.g. welding flame) or hot surface (e.g. radiator) is located in the vicinity of work.
In addition, eating, drinking and smoking, as well as storage of foodstuffs, are prohibited during work on
open gas compartments.
SF6 gas compartments may not be opened until they have been emptied and the has been reduced to
atmospheric level.
For filling and emptying of SF6 installations, maintenance units which operate in enclosed systems must be
used. After connecting such a unit to the SF6 installation, the connections should be checked for leaks.
SF6 can be returned to the manufacturer in special cylinders.
Only the SF6 cylinders that are necessary for uninterrupted continuation of the work and connected to the
extraction equipment may be located in the installation rooms. In addition, it is permitted to store the same
number of cylinders again in the installation room. On SF6 plants without a SF6 cylinder continuously
attached to the removal device, you are permitted to hold a SF6 cylinder in readiness in the installation room.
Additional SF6 cylinders should be stored in a storeroom or outdoors.
If the occurrence of switch dust and/or decomposition products is anticipated, the following additional
precautions must be observed.
Pos : 9.36.18 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-379
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.36.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum U mg ang mit SF 6/7.25.4.2 Zusätzliche Anfor der ung en nac h sc hweren Kurzsc hl uss absc haltungen @ 4\mod_1336481548136_18.doc x @ 17904 @ 4 @ 1
7.25.5.2 Additional requirements in the case of heavy-duty switching operations
Switch dust will not be encountered during normal operation.
Switch dust is to be anticipated after repeated heavy-duty short-circuiting. In some circumstances it cannot
be ruled out that maintenance personnel will be exposed to decomposition products in gaseous or dust form.
In such cases the following additional procedures must be introduced:
• If heavy concentrations of SF6 are detected, the vicinity of the installation, including
connected and lower-level rooms, must be vacated immediately.
• Thoroughly ventilate the rooms before re-entering. Particularly basement rooms should
not be entered until the oxygen content of the air has been verified by means of
measuring equipment.
Since switch dust forms an adhesive layer once it has absorbed moisture from the air, the dust should be
removed without delay.
• Before opening the circuit-breaker, e.g. also after the rooms have been ventilated, it is
essential to put on suitable protective clothing.
• Effectively remove dust without stirring it up and dispose of it according to the following
procedure:
- remove loose dust with a suitable vacuum cleaner
- remove more firmly seated dust with dry, lint-free cloths
- clean all mechanical components with ARAL 4005 or HAKU 1025/920 and all insulating parts with HAKU
5067.
• Immediately rinse switch dust from the skin, using plenty of water or a soapy solution.
• Deposit switch dust, absorption agents and filters, as well as used materials and
equipment, in suitable plastic containers or double-layer plastic bags.
• Dispose of switch dust, absorption agents and filters in accordance with local regulations.
• Clean or dispose of used materials and equipment.
Pos : 9.36.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum U mg ang mit SF 6/7.25.5 Rei nigung und Ents orgung der ver wendeten M aterialien und Ausrüs tungen @ 4\mod_1336481854453_18.doc x @ 17915 @ 3 @ 1
7.25.6 Cleaning and disposing of used materials and equipment
Materials and equipment must be cleaned or disposed of so that the decomposition products they contain
are not released.
The owner is always responsible for cleaning and disposal tasks.
• Tools and appliances (e.g. vacuum cleaners) which have been in contact with
decomposition products must be wiped with dry cloths, then thoroughly cleaned with
ARAL 4005 or HAKU 1025/920.
• Switch dust, absorption agents and filters from gas compartments, respiratory equipment,
cleaning and maintenance gear, disposable protective clothing and other materials which
have been in contact with the decomposition products, must be deposited in sealed
containers and disposed of in compliance with local regulations, stating refuse code ASN
59304 (materials contaminated with chemicals) as necessary.
Pos : 9.37.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauber keit auf der Baustelle/7.26 Sauber keit auf der Baustell e @ 0\mod_1331549095213_18.doc x @ 4258 @ 2 @ 1
7-380
General considerations and instructions
7.26 Cleanliness on site
The section discusses the most important requirements for cleanliness and tidiness during assembly,
commissioning and maintenance work on the switchgear.
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
The high insulation resistance of the metal-clad gas-insulated switchgear can only be achieved when the
concept realised at the factory is met with equally intensive attention to regulations for cleanliness in the gas
compartments of all module assemblies.
Attention
Danger of damage to the switchgear following electrical flashovers
To this extent, be certain that all interior parts of gas compartments are free of dirt and foreign particles.
This results in the need for constantly ensuring the necessary environmental conditions at the site:
Pos : 9.37.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauber keit auf der Baustelle/7.26.1 F ertigstell ung des Gebäudes @ 0\mod_1331549126354_18.doc x @ 4262 @ 3 @ 1
7.26.1 Completing work on the building
Before any assembly housings are opened at the site, all work in the switchgear room must be completed
and the floor should be coated with a dust-binding primer. Windows and doors should be lockable. Caulking,
drilling and other such work must be prohibited inside the building while module assemblies are open.
If an air conditioning unit exists, it should be in operation before assembly work begins. The air conditioning
unit should not be turned on for the first time during switchgear installation due to the likelihood of whirling
dust.
Pos : 9.37.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauber keit auf der Baustelle/7.26.2 Ver pac kungs materi al @ 0\mod_1331549196057_18.doc x @ 4266 @ 3 @ 1
7.26.2 Packing material
After unpacking the module assemblies, remove the packing material from the site before any assemblies
are opened.
Pos : 9.37.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-381
General considerations and instructions
r
Pos : 9.37.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauber keit auf der Baustelle/7.26.3 R einigung des Sc haltanl agenr aumes @ 0\mod_1331549228338_18.doc x @ 4270 @ 3 @ 1
7.26.3 Cleaning the switchgear room
• Regularly vacuum the floor.

Note
Don't use the same devices intended to vacuum gas compartments!
• Sweep only when using specially-designed brooms that hold dust. Dispose of waste
immediately.
• Place a grating at the entrance or other floor treatment to minimise the amount of dirt
carried into the switchgear room.
Pos : 9.37.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauber keit auf der Baustelle/7.26.4 Sauber keit und Ordnung bei Ar beiten an offenen Baugruppen @ 0\mod_1331549285636_18.doc x @ 4274 @ 3 @ 1
7.26.4 Cleanliness and order when working with open assemblies

Note
Smoking, eating and drinking are not permitted in the room while working on open
assemblies.
• Before beginning work on open assemblies, create an especially clean area and block it
off.
• Gather and organise assembly components, tools and other necessary items.
• Have adequate receptacles available to gather small parts, particularly for disassembly
work.
• Properly dispose of all waste.
• Before opening, clean the outside of module assemblies.
• Remove cover from the housing only when finally necessary in order to maintain low
moisture levels inside the assemblies.
• For shipment or for intermediate storage, all housing openings must be provided with the
appropriate covers.
• Empty the pockets of your clothing before working on or in opened modules!
7-382
General considerations and instructions
• When working inside opened assemblies, the following work clothing should be worn:
-
Disposable overalls
Paper hood
Paper shoe covers
Cloth gloves
• When working through manways (e.g. installing shielding), the following work clothes
should be worn depending on the depth of the work:
- Disposable overall or sleeve protectors
- Paper hood
- Cloth gloves
• Seal off the assembly from dust before every pause in work.
• Before closing the housing, check all reachable parts for cleanliness and absence of
grease and clean them if necessary.
An assembly is considered clean if, when shining a light upon it, no particles are visible to the naked eye.
• If grease and Vaseline are required, apply sparingly.
• For cleaning inside assemblies, use a vacuum and lint-free paper.
• Use only approved cleaning agents.
Cleaning [ 7.19]
Pos : 9.37.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauber keit auf der Baustelle/7.26.5 Sauber keit von Wer kzeugen @ 0\mod_1331549372185_18.doc x @ 4278 @ 3 @ 1
7.26.5 Cleanliness of tools
All tools, SF6 pressure hoses and other required items must be kept clean.
Pos : 9.37.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopier vorlagen / Seitenumbrüc he/-------------Seitenumbruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-383
r
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.37.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauber keit auf der Baustelle/7.26.6 Vorsic hts maß nahmen bei sc hmutz erzeugenden Ar bei ten @ 0\mod_1331549409014_18.doc x @ 4282 @ 3 @ 1
7.26.6 Preventive measures for work likely to create dirt
As long as assemblies are open, the following measures must be carefully taken:
• Drive vehicles slowly into the work area.
• Open walls, windows and doors only when absolutely necessary.
• Ventilators and compressed air can only be used if they do not raise any dust.
• Set up workbenches in rooms separate from the switchgear whenever possible.
• Do not drill, file, scrape, sand, grind, brush or weld anything.
• If such work needs to be conducted on an assembly, shavings and residuals must be
simultaneously vacuumed out. Use the vacuum designed for cleaning the gas
compartments.
• Conduct required reworking on interior parts outside the chamber whenever possible. If
this isn't possible, use special preventive measures like coverings or vacuuming to
ensure that no foreign particles remain in the assembly.
Pos : 9.37.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgemeine Hi nweis e und Anweisungen/M odule/7.26 Sauber keit auf der Baustelle/7.26.7 Verantwortllicher für Sauber keit und Ordnung @ 0\mod_1331549460812_18.doc x @ 4286 @ 3 @ 1
7.26.7 Person responsible for cleanliness and tidiness
It is appropriate to name a responsible person who will maintain the cleanliness of the assembly area for the
period of installation. The person's name should be identifiable at the site.
Appendix: Form "Person responsible for cleanliness and order".
Pos : 9.37.11 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi er vorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
7-384
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.38.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.27 Ents orgung von H oc hs pannungsschaltg eräten und Anl agen/7.27 Ents orgung von H oc hspannungsschaltger äten und Anl agen 00 - Übersc hrift @ 14\mod_1362126097325_18.doc x @ 99650 @ 2 @ 1
7.27 Disposing of high-voltage switching devices and systems
Pos : 9.38.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinweise und Anweis ungen/M odul e/7.27 Ents orgung von H oc hs pannungsschaltg eräten und Anl agen/7.27 Ents orgung von H oc hspannungsschaltger äten und Anl agen 01a @ 0\mod_1331549578172_18.doc x @ 4290 @ @ 1
Basic information:
Safety Instructions [ 0.2]
The switchgear is an environmentally sustainable product, consisting mostly of reusable materials.
In its delivered state, it contains no dangerous substances or preparations as defined by the current
Chemicals Act in force in Germany.
It must be noted, however, that dangerous substances may form if operating the switchgear with SF6. In this
case, please implement the appropriate measures described in the chapters on operation and maintenance.
The amounts in the following tables relate to an 8DN8 cable feeder bay (approx. 3200 kg).
Disposal procedure:
• Lubricants must be removed first.
Lubricants
Disposal instructions
kg
SF6
Clean and reuse
100
Filter material
After use contains dangerous components, see also
chapter on maintenance
7
• A company specialising in the disposal of hazardous waste must be employed to dispose
of the insulation fluid and the filter material.
• The materials to be disposed of should as far as possible be sorted and separated.
Materials with a content of less than 1 % are not counted.
Materials
Disposal instructions
kg
Aluminium
Recycle through scrap merchant
1450
Iron
Recycle through scrap merchant
900
Copper
Recycle through scrap merchant
500
Plastic
Industrial waste similar to domestic waste, thermal
recycling if appropriate
220
Rubber
Industrial waste similar to domestic waste
50
Electronics, contactors, insulated
cables, motors
Recycle through electronics waste disposal
company
50
Due to the long service life of the switchgear, the original instructions for disposal post-decommissioning may
be no longer valid, or country-specific laws may allow for other means of disposal.
Local customer support offices will be able to answer any questions concerning disposal.
7-385
r
Pos : 10.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/Abbildungs verz eic hnis/1 Abbil dungs verz eic hnis - 01 Ü berschrift @ 25\mod_1395923922272_18.doc x @ 235850 @ @ 1
7-386
General considerations and instructions
List of Figures
Pos : 10.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/Abbildungs verz eic hnis/2 Abbil dungs verz eic hnis - 02 Aufbau @ 25\mod_1395924442085_0.doc x @ 235890 @ @ 1
Fig. 1-1
Fig. 1-2
Fig. 1-3
Fig. 1-4
Fig. 1-5
Fig. 1-6
Fig. 1-7
Fig. 1-8
Fig. 1-9
Fig. 1-10
Fig. 1-11
Fig. 1-12
Fig. 1-13
Fig. 1-14
Fig. 1-15
Fig. 1-16
Fig. 1-17
Fig. 1-18
Fig. 1-19
Fig. 1-20
Fig. 1-21
Fig. 1-22
Fig. 1-23
Fig. 1-24
Fig. 1-25
Fig. 1-26
Fig. 1-27
Fig. 1-28
Fig. 1-29
Fig. 1-30
Fig. 1-31
Fig. 1-32
Fig. 1-33
Fig. 1-34
Fig. 1-35
Fig. 1-36
Fig. 1-37
Fig. 1-38
Fig. 1-39
Fig. 1-40
Fig. 1-41
Fig. 1-42
Fig. 1-43
Fig. 1-44
Fig. 1-45
Fig. 1-46
Fig. 1-47
Fig. 1-48
Break-Make operation with automatic reclosing (to IEC / VDE / ANSI) ................................... 1-25
SF6 Data – terms ...................................................................................................................... 1-38
Nameplate of a bay with circuit-breaker (example).................................................................. 1-44
Nameplate of a current transformer (example) ........................................................................ 1-45
Nameplate of a voltage transformer (example)........................................................................ 1-46
Nameplate for a RC divider (example) ..................................................................................... 1-46
Circuit breaker with shared drive, 1.050 kg.............................................................................. 1-47
Circuit breaker with single pole drive, 1.300 kg ....................................................................... 1-47
Y component, 260 kg ............................................................................................................... 1-48
Active cross module, 370 kg .................................................................................................... 1-48
Passive cross module, 275 kg ................................................................................................. 1-48
Earthing switch, 70 kg .............................................................................................................. 1-48
Current transformer, 130 kg in addition approx. 430 kg .......................................................... 1-48
Current transformer, 210 kg in addition approx. 710 kg .......................................................... 1-49
Current transformer, 250 kg in addition approx. 430 kg .......................................................... 1-49
Current transformer, 330 kg in addition approx. 710 kg .......................................................... 1-49
Current transformer, 675 kg ..................................................................................................... 1-49
Current transformer, 980 kg ..................................................................................................... 1-49
Voltage transformer, 500 kg ..................................................................................................... 1-50
Voltage transformer with isolating distances and manual operation, 650 kg........................... 1-50
Voltage transformer with isulating distance and motor drive, 700 kg ...................................... 1-50
RC-voltage divider, 197 kg ....................................................................................................... 1-50
Cable connection module, 420 – 445 kg.................................................................................. 1-50
Cable connection module, 250 kg ............................................................................................ 1-51
Cable connection module, 390 kg ............................................................................................ 1-51
Cable disconnector, 470 – 495 kg............................................................................................ 1-51
Cable disconnector, 390 kg...................................................................................................... 1-51
Cable disconnector, 400 kg...................................................................................................... 1-52
End module, 85 kg ................................................................................................................... 1-52
End module, 20 kg ................................................................................................................... 1-52
Link for expansion purposes, 26 kg ......................................................................................... 1-52
Link for expansion purposes, 35 kg ......................................................................................... 1-52
Busbar extension, 80 – 110 kg................................................................................................. 1-52
Busbar extension, 110 – 130 kg .............................................................................................. 1-53
Busbar extension, 110 kg......................................................................................................... 1-53
Busbar extension, 180 – 200 kg .............................................................................................. 1-53
Busbar extension module, 200 kg ............................................................................................ 1-53
Extension component, 100 kg .................................................................................................. 1-53
Extension component, 45 – 126 kg optionally with bushing, 50 kg ......................................... 1-53
Extension component, 45 – 475 kg optionally with bushing, 50 kg ......................................... 1-54
Angle module, 117 kg .............................................................................................................. 1-54
Axial expansion joint, 120 kg.................................................................................................... 1-54
Axial expansion joint, 265 kg.................................................................................................... 1-54
Lateral expansion joint, 294 kg ................................................................................................ 1-54
Lateral expansion joint, 270 kg ................................................................................................ 1-54
Lateral expansion joint, 75 kg .................................................................................................. 1-55
Distributing module, 230 kg...................................................................................................... 1-55
Distributing module, 189 kg...................................................................................................... 1-55
7-387
Fig. 1-49
Fig. 1-50
Fig. 1-51
Fig. 1-52
Fig. 1-53
Fig. 1-54
Fig. 1-55
Fig. 1-56
Fig. 1-57
Fig. 1-58
Fig. 1-59
Fig. 1-60
Fig. 2-1
Fig. 2-2
Fig. 2-3
Fig. 2-4
Fig. 2-5
Fig. 2-6
Fig. 2-7
Fig. 2-8
Fig. 2-9
Fig. 2-10
Fig. 2-11
Fig. 2-12
Fig. 2-13
Fig. 2-14
Fig. 2-15
Fig. 2-16
Fig. 2-17
Fig. 2-18
Fig. 2-19
Fig. 2-20
Fig. 2-21
Fig. 2-22
Fig. 2-23
Fig. 2-24
Fig. 2-25
Fig. 2-26
Fig. 2-27
Fig. 2-28
Fig. 2-29
Fig. 2-30
Fig. 2-31
Fig. 2-32
Fig. 2-33
Fig. 2-34
Fig. 2-35
Fig. 2-36
7-388
Distributing module, 198 kg...................................................................................................... 1-55
Distributing module, 212 kg...................................................................................................... 1-55
Arrester, 350 kg ........................................................................................................................ 1-55
Outdoor bushing porcelain, 130 – 140 kg ................................................................................ 1-56
Outdoor bushing composite insulator, 49 – 130 kg.................................................................. 1-56
Transition module, 160 kg ........................................................................................................ 1-56
Transition module, 121 kg ........................................................................................................ 1-56
Integrated local control cabinet outdoor version, 141 kg ......................................................... 1-56
Integrated local control cabinet indoor version, 127 kg ........................................................... 1-57
Integrated local control cabinet outdoor version, 194 kg ......................................................... 1-57
Integrated local control cabinet indoor version, 180 kg ........................................................... 1-57
Current transformer terminal box, 18 kg .................................................................................. 1-57
Control system of the high-speed earthing switch drive .......................................................... 2-68
Control of the disconnector and earthing switch drive ............................................................. 2-68
Circuit-breaker control, Version shared drive (G) .................................................................... 2-69
Circuit-breaker control, Single pole drive (E) ........................................................................... 2-69
Cable conduits on the rear of the local control cabinet ............................................................ 2-70
Plug connectors on the rear of the local control cabinet .......................................................... 2-70
Density monitor ........................................................................................................................ 2-72
An example of gas monitoring by means of a density monitor ................................................ 2-73
View port .................................................................................................................................. 2-75
View port with adapter and camera ......................................................................................... 2-76
Arc detector .............................................................................................................................. 2-77
Test adapter for voltage detection............................................................................................ 2-78
Blind cover................................................................................................................................ 2-79
Circuit-breaker, version shared drive (G) ................................................................................. 2-82
Circuit breaker with single pole drive (E) ................................................................................. 2-83
Switching system 8DN8 5 ........................................................................................................ 2-84
Interrupter unit (in switching position OPEN) 8DN8 5 .............................................................. 2-85
Schematics of opening operation ............................................................................................. 2-86
Opened drive cabinet ............................................................................................................... 2-87
Rear view of spring-stored-energy mechanism (cover removed) ............................................ 2-88
Function diagram of the spring-stored energy mechanism ...................................................... 2-89
Spring-stored-energy mechanism with open cabinet doors (8DN8 5) ..................................... 2-90
Rear view of spring-stored-energy mechanism (cover removed) ............................................ 2-91
Spring-stored-energy mechanism, Current transformer single pole drive ............................... 2-92
External view of the disconnector and earthing switch module ............................................... 2-94
Earthing bar of the work-in-progress earthing switch, insulated version (illustration without
cover) ....................................................................................................................................... 2-95
Selection of possible circuit path leads at the flanges A, B, C and D ...................................... 2-96
Work-in-progress earthing switch ............................................................................................ 2-97
Switching positions of the disconnector and earthing switch module ...................................... 2-97
Contact systems of the disconnector and earthing switch module (example of an insulated
version)..................................................................................................................................... 2-98
Drive, external view .................................................................................................................. 2-99
Drive with cowl removed ........................................................................................................ 2-100
Devices for manual operation ................................................................................................ 2-101
Cable disconnector ................................................................................................................ 2-104
Cable disconnector ................................................................................................................ 2-105
Cable disconnector ................................................................................................................ 2-105
Fig. 2-37
Fig. 2-38
Fig. 2-39
Fig. 2-40
Fig. 2-41
Fig. 2-42
Fig. 2-43
Fig. 2-44
Fig. 2-45
Fig. 2-46
Fig. 2-47
Fig. 2-48
Fig. 2-49
Fig. 2-50
Fig. 2-51
Fig. 2-52
Fig. 2-53
Fig. 2-54
Fig. 2-55
Fig. 2-56
Fig. 2-57
Fig. 2-58
Fig. 2-59
Fig. 2-60
Fig. 2-61
Fig. 2-62
Fig. 2-63
Fig. 2-64
Fig. 2-65
Fig. 2-66
Fig. 2-67
Fig. 2-68
Fig. 2-69
Fig. 2-70
Fig. 2-71
Fig. 2-72
Fig. 2-73
Fig. 2-74
Fig. 2-75
Fig. 2-76
Fig. 2-77
Fig. 2-78
Fig. 2-79
Fig. 2-80
Fig. 2-81
Fig. 2-82
Fig. 2-83
Cable disconnector ................................................................................................................ 2-106
Cable disconnector ................................................................................................................ 2-107
Cable disconnector ................................................................................................................ 2-108
Earthing switch, uninsulated .................................................................................................. 2-110
Earthing switch, insulated ...................................................................................................... 2-110
Earthing switch, non-insulated and insulated version ............................................................ 2-111
Earthing bar mounting ............................................................................................................ 2-112
Preparation of the earthing switch for measurement ............................................................. 2-112
Opposing contact ................................................................................................................... 2-113
Work-in-progress earthing switch drive in position OPEN ..................................................... 2-114
Work-in-progress earthing switch drive in position CLOSE ................................................... 2-115
High-speed earthing switch drive in position OPEN .............................................................. 2-116
High-speed earthing switch drive in position CLOSE ............................................................ 2-117
External view of an integrated current transformer, short version ......................................... 2-120
External view of an integrated current transformer, long version .......................................... 2-121
Section of a separate current transformer, double version .................................................... 2-121
Section of a separate current transformer, double version .................................................... 2-122
Section of an integrated current transformer, short version ................................................... 2-123
Section of an integrated current transformer, long version .................................................... 2-124
Section of a separate current transformer, double-long version ............................................ 2-124
Section of a separate current transformer, double-short version........................................... 2-125
Secondary terminal with crimp connection ............................................................................ 2-126
Secondary terminal with terminal connection ........................................................................ 2-126
Terminal designations to IEC 61869 of a current transformer with three secondary
windings (each secondary winding with its own core) ........................................................... 2-127
Identification of CT mounting position referred to the circuit-breaker to IEC ......................... 2-127
Terminal designation to IEC 61869 of a current transformer with secondary winding tap
(ratios entered) ....................................................................................................................... 2-128
Voltage transformer without integrated insulating section. .................................................... 2-130
Voltage transformer with integrated insulating section (manual drive) .................................. 2-131
Voltage transformer with integrated insulating section (motor drive) ..................................... 2-132
Terminal box, cover removed................................................................................................. 2-133
Terminal designations of a voltage transformer with one secondary winding with tap to
IEC 61869 .............................................................................................................................. 2-134
External view of the RC divider .............................................................................................. 2-136
Section of a RC divider .......................................................................................................... 2-137
Subjections of the expansion joints ........................................................................................ 2-139
Pressure-balanced sliding expansion joint ............................................................................. 2-140
Removal link ........................................................................................................................... 2-141
Lateral expansion joint ........................................................................................................... 2-142
Lateral expansion joint ........................................................................................................... 2-142
Busbar, designed with removal link and expansion joints ..................................................... 2-144
Busbar, designed with removal link and expansion joints ..................................................... 2-145
Busbar slitting, designed with removal link and passive disconnector and earthing switch
module.................................................................................................................................... 2-146
Busbar-longitudinal clutch, designed with expansion joints and extension module .............. 2-147
Extension module ................................................................................................................... 2-149
Extension module 400 mm, including removal link ................................................................ 2-149
Extension module 400 mm, including removal link ................................................................ 2-150
Extension module 500 mm for separate gas chamber .......................................................... 2-150
Extension module 600 mm with removal link for separate gas chamber............................... 2-150
7-389
Fig. 2-84
Fig. 2-85
Fig. 2-86
Fig. 2-87
Fig. 2-88
Fig. 2-89
Fig. 2-90
Fig. 2-91
Fig. 2-92
Fig. 2-93
Fig. 2-94
Fig. 2-95
Fig. 2-96
Fig. 2-97
Fig. 2-98
Fig. 2-99
Fig. 2-100
Fig. 2-101
Fig. 2-102
Fig. 2-103
Fig. 2-104
Fig. 2-105
Fig. 2-106
Fig. 2-107
Fig. 2-108
Fig. 2-109
Fig. 3-1
Fig. 3-2
Fig. 3-3
Fig. 3-4
Fig. 3-5
Fig. 4-1
Fig. 4-2
Fig. 4-3
Fig. 4-4
Fig. 4-5
Fig. 4-6
Fig. 5-1
Fig. 5-2
Fig. 5-3
Fig. 5-4
Fig. 5-5
Fig. 5-6
Fig. 5-7
Fig. 5-8
Fig. 5-9
Fig. 5-10
Fig. 5-11
Fig. 5-12
Fig. 5-13
7-390
Extension module, 340 mm.................................................................................................... 2-151
Extension module, 400 ... 2.000 mm ..................................................................................... 2-151
Extension module, 900 ... 7,000 mm ..................................................................................... 2-151
Reducer module ..................................................................................................................... 2-152
Angle module, 90° .................................................................................................................. 2-152
End module for separate gas chamber .................................................................................. 2-152
End module for common gas chamber .................................................................................. 2-153
Cross module, passive ........................................................................................................... 2-153
Y component .......................................................................................................................... 2-153
Overhead line connection with distribution module................................................................ 2-155
Overhead line connection with distribution module................................................................ 2-156
Overhead line connection with distribution module................................................................ 2-156
Open-air connection, sectional view ...................................................................................... 2-157
Open-air connection, sectional view ...................................................................................... 2-157
Open-air connection, sectional view ...................................................................................... 2-158
Cable connection module, type 1 ........................................................................................... 2-160
Cable connection module, type 2 ........................................................................................... 2-161
Cable connection module type 3 (example with inserted cable) ............................................ 2-162
Cable connection module....................................................................................................... 2-163
Cover versions without rupture disc device ........................................................................... 2-166
Cover versions with rupture disc device ................................................................................ 2-167
Parts of a gastight and pressure-resistant joint prior to being bolted together ...................... 2-170
3-pole bushings ...................................................................................................................... 2-171
Coupling contact .................................................................................................................... 2-172
Fixed screw connection (1 x M16) ......................................................................................... 2-172
Fixed screw connection (1 x M12) ......................................................................................... 2-173
Welding the PE sheeting ........................................................................................................ 3-179
Symbols according to DIN EN ISO 780; Marking for shipping of packages .......................... 3-182
Crate with boards attached, showing symbols and written instructions (example) ............... 3-183
Label on packing accessory (example) .................................................................................. 3-184
Excerpt from a delivery note (different designs possible) ...................................................... 3-190
Contact support ...................................................................................................................... 4-218
Assembly device .................................................................................................................... 4-218
Centering pins ........................................................................................................................ 4-219
Fitting bolts ............................................................................................................................. 4-219
Bushings with symbol to identify the installation position ...................................................... 4-221
Connecting two bays with removal link .................................................................................. 4-222
Operating regulations for the operation of the switchgear ..................................................... 5-235
Ratchet / cordless screwdriver with attached Allen wrench ................................................... 5-242
Cover for manual operation and electric locking .................................................................... 5-243
Use of cordless driver for manual operation .......................................................................... 5-244
Two-way key, hexagon keys and torque limiter on fixing plate .............................................. 5-246
View with cover in position ..................................................................................................... 5-247
View with removed cover ....................................................................................................... 5-247
View with removed cover and inserted hexagon key 1 ......................................................... 5-248
View with plugged fixing plate and torque limiter ................................................................... 5-248
Push - and rotation direction of the knurled screw ................................................................. 5-249
Direction of rotation for opreation ........................................................................................... 5-249
Drive cabinet with releases .................................................................................................... 5-251
Charging the closing spring using a tool ................................................................................ 5-252
Fig. 5-14
Fig. 6-1
Fig. 6-2
Fig. 6-3
Fig. 6-4
Fig. 6-5
Fig. 6-6
Fig. 6-7
Fig. 6-8
Fig. 6-9
Fig. 7-1
Fig. 7-2
Fig. 7-3
Fig. 7-4
Fig. 7-5
Fig. 7-6
Fig. 7-7
Fig. 7-8
Fig. 7-9
Fig. 7-10
Fig. 7-11
Fig. 7-12
Fig. 7-13
Fig. 7-14
Fig. 7-15
Fig. 7-16
Fig. 7-17
Fig. 7-18
Fig. 7-19
Fig. 7-20
Fig. 7-21
Fig. 7-22
Fig. 7-23
Fig. 7-24
Fig. 7-25
Fig. 7-26
Fig. 7-27
Fig. 7-28
Fig. 7-29
Charging the closing spring by means of a special key with extended handle ...................... 5-253
Drive with cover for manual operation and electric locking .................................................... 6-270
Cover positions....................................................................................................................... 6-270
Cover for mechanically blocking ............................................................................................ 6-271
Blocking the earthing switch on the drive linkage .................................................................. 6-272
Devices for manual operation ................................................................................................ 6-273
Mechanically blocking on the gear shifting plate.................................................................... 6-274
Blocking the drive shaft .......................................................................................................... 6-275
Example of securing with a padlock ....................................................................................... 6-276
Max. permissible number of interruptions as a function of the breaking current. .................. 6-284
Connecting the gas cylinder with SF6 filling device and safety valve .................................... 7-293
Flange preperation of the metallic bare surfaces of flanges and covers ............................... 7-306
Auxiliary switch ....................................................................................................................... 7-314
AMP plug ................................................................................................................................ 7-314
Inspection of the dampers ...................................................................................................... 7-315
Latching block ........................................................................................................................ 7-315
Timing diagram for forming and main test with alternating voltage ....................................... 7-332
Opened tins with filter material ............................................................................................... 7-336
Fitting the rupture disk ............................................................................................................ 7-341
Corrosion protection of blind holes and unused holes on flanges and covers ...................... 7-350
Final sealing of flanges and covers ........................................................................................ 7-351
Rupture disc outdoors ............................................................................................................ 7-351
Transitional areas between components made of different metals ....................................... 7-352
Anti-corrosion procedures for bare metal surfaces of flanges and covers without/with
attachment, Interior ................................................................................................................ 7-353
Locking bolt ............................................................................................................................ 7-360
Blocking device, fitted ............................................................................................................ 7-362
Circuit-breaker - shared drive - OPEN and CLOSE ............................................................... 7-363
Circuit breaker - shared drive - Operating sequence CO ...................................................... 7-364
Circuit-breaker - shared drive - Operating sequence O - 0,3 s - CO ..................................... 7-364
Work-in-progress earthing switch - CLOSE and OPEN ......................................................... 7-364
High-speed earthing switch - CLOSE and OPEN .................................................................. 7-365
Disconnector and earthing switch module (Three position drive) - CLOSE and OPEN ........ 7-366
Pressure-temperature diagram for different gas densities (SF6). The following examples
demonstrate how it is to be used. .......................................................................................... 7-367
Fastening elements for general use ....................................................................................... 7-370
An example of the strength class (here 8.8) shown on hexagon bolts .................................. 7-371
An example of the strength class (e.g. 10.9) shown in cheese-head bolts with hexagon
sockets ................................................................................................................................... 7-371
Identification of strength class on studs ................................................................................. 7-371
Locking tabs ........................................................................................................................... 7-372
Sign warning of SF6................................................................................................................ 7-376
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Inhalt ===
7-391